Earthquake Engineering Application To Design PDF

EARTHQUAKE ENGINEERING
Earthquake Engineering: Application to Design. Charles K. Erdey

Copyright 2007 John Wiley & Sons, Inc. ISBN: 978-0-470-04843-6
EARTHQUAKE
ENGINEERING
Application to Design
CHARLES K. ERDEY
Northern Arizona University
Formerly Adjunct Professor, California State University Long Beach
JOHN WILEY & SONS, INC.
This book is printed on acid-free paper.

Copyright 2007 by John Wiley & Sons, Inc. All rights reserved
Published by John Wiley & Sons, Inc., Hoboken, New Jersey
Published simultaneously in Canada
No part of this publication may be reproduced, stored in a retrieval system, or transmitted in
any form or by any means, electronic, mechanical, photocopying, recording, scanning, or
otherwise, except as permitted under Section 107 or 108 of the 1976 United States Copyright
Act, without either the prior written permission of the Publisher, or authorization through
payment of the appropriate per-copy fee to the Copyright Clearance Center, 222 Rosewood
Drive, Danvers, MA 01923, (978) 750-8400, fax (978) 646-8600, or on the web at
www.copyright.com. Requests to the Publisher for permission should be addressed to the
Permissions Department, John Wiley & Sons, Inc., 111 River Street, Hoboken, NJ 07030, (201)
748-6011, fax (201) 748-6008, or online at www.wiley.com / go / permissions.
Limit of Liability / Disclaimer of Warranty: While the publisher and the author have used their
best efforts in preparing this book, they make no representations or warranties with respect to
the accuracy or completeness of the contents of this book and specically disclaim any implied
warranties of merchantability or tness for a particular purpose. No warranty may be created or
extended by sales representatives or written sales materials. The advice and strategies contained
herein may not be suitable for your situation. You should consult with a professional where
appropriate. Neither the publisher nor the author shall be liable for any loss of prot or any
other commercial damages, including but not limited to special, incidental, consequential, or
other damages.
For general information about our other products and services, please contact our Customer
Care Department within the United States at (800) 762-2974, outside the United States at (317)
572-3993 or fax (317) 572-4002.
Wiley also publishes its books in a variety of electronic formats. Some content that appears in
print may not be available in electronic books. For more information about Wiley products,
visit our web site at www.wiley.com.
Library of Congress Cataloging-in-Publication Data:
Erdey, Charles K., 1931
Earthquake engineering: application to design / Charles K. Erdey.
p. cm.
ISBN-13: 978-0-470-04843-6 (cloth)
ISBN-10: 0-470-04843-3 (cloth)
1. Earthquake engineering. I. Title.
TA654.6.E73 2006
624.1762dc22
2006011329
Printed in the United States of America
10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1
CONTENTS
PREFACE
xi
ACKNOWLEDGMENTS
xiii
NOTATION
xv
1 OVERVIEW
1.1
1.2
1.3
1.4
1.5
1.6
1.7
1.8
Introduction / 1
Concepts, Terminology, and Source of Earthquakes / 2
Wave Propagation and Velocities / 5
Magnitude of Earthquakes / 7
Building Damage / 7
Structural Failures: Overall Failure / 10
Component or Joint Failure / 17
Code Design Forces: Reserve Strength to Counter
Extreme Forces / 21
SEISMIC DESIGN REGULATIONS
2.1
2.2
2.3
2.4
25
Building Codes / 25
UBC 1997: A Model Code / 26
Interaction of Building Codes and Other Standards / 27
IBC 2006 / 29
v
vi
CONTENTS
REINFORCED-CONCRETE STRUCTURES
36
3.1
3.2
3.3
3.4
3.5
3.6
Introduction / 36
Shearing Resistance of RC Beams / 40
Development Length / 45
Northridge Experience / 49
Case 1: Reinforced-Concrete Parking Garage / 50
Case 2: Reinforced-Concrete Retaining Wall
System / 62
References / 67
4
SEISMIC STEEL DESIGN: SMRF
4.1
4.2
4.3
4.4
4.5
4.6
4.7
4.8
4.9
4.10
4.11
4.12
4.13
4.14
4.15
4.16
4.17
4.18
4.19
4.20
4.21
4.22
4.23
4.24
4.25
4.26
Design of SMRF Structure: LRFD Method / 68

Design Steps / 69
Project Description: Four-Story Ofce Building / 70
Project Layout and Typical SMRF per UBC 1994 / 70
1994 Design / 71
Wind Analysis: 1997 UBC, CHAPTER 16, DIV. III / 72
Example: Wind Analysis of Four-Story Building / 73
Seismic Zones 3 and 4 / 75
Earthquake Analysis of Four-Story Ofce Building / 76
Design for Earthquake / 79
Signicant Changes in 1997 Design / 84
1997 versus 1994 Design / 86
Summary of Procedure / 87
Design Strategies / 89
Design of Beams: Code Requirements / 89
Second-Floor Beam / 91
Beam-to-Column Joint / 92
Flexural Resistance of Beam-to-Column Joint / 92
Shear Tab Design / 96
Shear Tab-to-Beam Welded Connection / 99
Second-Floor Panel Zone / 99
Third-Floor Beam / 102
Third-Floor Shear Tab Connection / 103
Third-Floor Beam-to-Column Moment Connection / 107
Third-Floor Panel Zone / 108
Design of Columns / 109
68
CONTENTS
vii
4.27
4.28
Column Final Design Data / 115

First-Story Column Design for Compression: Major
Axis / 116
4.29 Column Design Flowchart / 120
4.30 Design of Third-Story Column for Compression / 120
4.31 Design of Third-Story Column Splice / 120
4.32 Reexamination of Pre- and Post-Northridge Research
and Literature / 124
References / 126
5
SEISMIC STEEL DESIGN: BRACED FRAMES
5.1
5.2
5.3
5.4
5.5
5.6
5.7
5.8
5.9
5.10
5.11
5.12
5.13
5.14
5.15
5.16
5.17
5.18
5.19
5.20
5.21
5.22
5.23
5.24
Introduction / 128
Project Description: Four-Story Library Annex / 129
Wind Analysis / 129
Earthquake Analysis / 130
Wind and Earthquake Loads / 135
Response of Braced Frames to Cyclic Lateral
Loads / 135
1997 UBC Provisions / 138
Rules Applicable to Bracing Members / 139
Column Strength Requirements / 141
Design for Earthquake / 141
Strategies for Brace Member Design / 142
Brace Members 2 and 3 / 144
Brace Members 3 and 2: First Story / 144
Design of Fillet Weld Connection / 148
Design of Gusset Plate: First and Second Stories / 149
Brace Member 13: Third Story / 152
Fillet Weld Design: Third and Fourth-Story Gusset
Plates / 154
Gusset Plate Design: Third and Fourth Stories / 155
Vertical Component / 156
Column Design / 157
Column Splice Design: Third Floor / 166
Beam Design / 167
Column Base-Plate Design / 174
Summary of Design Procedures / 180
128
viii
CONTENTS
5.25 SEAOC Blue Book and the Code / 180

References / 182
6
IBC SEISMIC DESIGN OF SMRF STRUCTURES
6.1
6.2
6.3
7
184
IBC Setup of Seismic Design Forces / 184

Design Example / 184
IBC Building Categories / 187
MASONRY STRUCTURES
191
7.1
7.2
7.3
7.4
Introduction / 191
Case 1: Retaining Wall System / 193
Case 2: Seismic versus Wind / 206
Case 3: Design of CMU Wall and Precast Concrete
Plate / 214
7.5
Case 4: Retail Store, Masonry and Steel / 217
References / 226
8
WOOD-FRAMED BUILDINGS
227
8.1
8.2
8.3
8.4
8.5
8.6
8.7
8.8
8.9
Introduction / 227
Northridge Lesson / 228
Case 1: Steel-Reinforced Wood-Framed Building / 237
Case 2: Wood-Framed Two-Story Home / 247
Case 3: Steel-Reinforced Two-Story Duplex / 252
Case 4: Wood-Framed Commercial Building / 256
Case 5: Wood-Framed Residential Building / 264
Case 6: Wood-Framed Garage and Workshop / 273
Light-Gauge Steel as Alternative to Wood
Framing / 277
8.10 Case 7: Light-Gauge Steel in Multistory Project / 278
Appendix / 283
References / 289
9
MATRICES IN ENGINEERING
9.1
9.2
9.3
9.4
9.5
Use of Matrices in Engineering / 290

Matrix Addition and Multiplication / 292
Matrix Forms / 294
Transposition / 295
Minor and Cofactor Matrices / 295
290
CONTENTS
9.6
9.7
9.8
9.9
9.10
10
11
303
Basic Concepts / 303

First-Order Differential Equations / 304
Separation of Variables / 304
Exact Equations / 305
Integrating Factor / 307
Second-Order Linear Equations / 309
Homogeneous Differential Equations / 313
Characteristic Equation / 313
NUMERICAL METHODS AND ENGINEERING APPLICATIONS 314
11.1
11.2
11.3
11.4
11.5
11.6
11.7
11.8
11.9
12
Determinant of a Matrix / 296

Inverse of a Matrix / 297
Linear Systems of Equations / 298
Elementary Row Operations / 301
Summary of Matrix Operations / 302
DIFFERENTIAL EQUATIONS
10.1
10.2
10.3
10.4
10.5
10.6
10.7
10.8
ix
Introduction to Dynamic Analysis / 314

Equation of Motion / 315
Damping: Damped Free Vibration / 321
Free Vibrations: Two-Degree Systems / 323
Eigenvalues and Eigenvectors / 323
Modeling Actual Structures / 327
Three-Degree Systems / 329
Existence and Uniqueness Theory: Wronskian / 334
Driving Function (Ft): Seismic Ground Motion
as Ft / 334
METHODS AND TOOLS TO UNRAVEL SECRETS OF

EARTHQUAKES
12.1
Elements of an Earthquake / 336
12.2
Vertical-Acceleration Component / 339
12.3
New Method of Dynamic Analysis / 339
12.4
Background of Research / 340
12.5
Analysis of Actual Structure / 342
12.6
Results and Findings / 344
12.7
Nature and Causes of Joint Failure / 344
References / 348
336
CONTENTS
13
RECENT AND FUTURE DEVELOPMENTS IN SEISMIC

DESIGN
349
13.1
Tests on Joints / 349
13.2
Dogbone Experiment / 350
13.3
Joint Strain Hardening: Speed Straining / 350
13.4
Mechanism of Joint Degradation / 350
13.5
Conclusions / 351
13.6
New Trends / 352
13.7
Seismic Isolation / 353
13.8
Engineered Damping / 357
References / 358
ACRONYMS
359
GLOSSARY
361
References / 370
APPENDIX: COMPUTER ANALYSIS
371
A. SMRF Project Part I / 372

B. SMRF Project Part II / 388
C. Braced-Frame Project / 399
INDEX
423
PREFACE
The primary motivation for writing this book is the causes of structural failureswhat went wrongduring the earthquakes that hit the western states
in the last decades.
In view of the relatively large number of steel moment-resisting frames
damaged during the Northridge earthquake, the book expands on the evaluation and performance of structures of this type. The pre- and post-Northridge
experimental research and new design strategies to improve moment connections for new buildings are also discussed, keeping in mind basic building
code concepts to demonstrate the application of general strength-level load
combinations.
Topics relevant to seismic design in other areas of engineering, such as
concrete, masonry, and wood-framed buildings, are also included. An attempt
has been made to maintain a practical approach. In lieu of problem-solving,
single design issues, the book walks the reader through step-by-step design
of actual projects in moderate-to-high seismicity areas in compliance with
building regulations.
Chapter 12 introduces a new method of dynamic analysis and discusses
the causes of joint failure in steel design. Subjects like matrices, differential
equations, numerical analysis, and engineering applications are presented for
completeness and ready reference for the reader.
It is hoped that the book will help practicing engineers not yet fully familiar
with seismic design and graduating students to use the building codes in their
seismic design practice.
xi
ACKNOWLEDGMENTS
The author gratefully acknowledges the comments and suggestions of Tom

King, professor of mathematics, California State Polytechnic University, Pomona, and John G. Shipp, S.E., senior member of SEAOC, for their suggestions, and to Victor F. Sanchez, P.E., for his valuable comments. Thanks are
also due to Ernest Pappas, former plan examiner, Mohave County, for his
contribution on some topics, Alex Zupanski, CSULB graduate student for
facilitating the inputting of the authors mathematical formulas into the computer, and to Alice H. Zwiller for assisting with proofreading.
xiii
NOTATION
A
AB
Agt
Agv
Ant
Anv
Aw
Ax
b
B
B1, B2
Ca, Cv
Ce
Cq
D
d
db
dc
E, Eh, Ev
E
Ec
FEXX
Fi, Fn, Fx
cross-sectional area (in.2)

ground-oor area
gross area subjected to tension (in.2)
gross area subjected to shear (in.2)
net area subjected to tension
net area subjected to shear (in.2)
effective area of weld (in.2)
torsional amplication factor (level x)
ange width of column
width of base plate (in.)
factors used to determine Mu for combined bending
and axial forces
seismic coefcients
height, exposure, and gust factor coefcient
pressure coefcient subject to function, geometry,
and location of structure or element
dead load on structural element
depth of column
nominal bolt diameter (in.)
column depth (in.)
earthquake design components
modulus of elasticity of steel (29,000 ksi)
modulus of elasticity of concrete (ksi)
strength of weld metal (ksi)
design seismic forces applied to each level
xv
xvi
NOTATION
c
Fp
Ft
Fu
Fy
G
g
H
I
Iw
K
L
Lb
Lp
M
Mmax
MA
MB
MC
Mp
Mu
Na, Nv
P
Pp
Pu
QE
qs
R
r
RI
Rp
SA, SB, SC, SD, SE, SF
T
tp
strength of concrete
design seismic force applied to part of structure
V portion of base shear on top of structure
specied minimum tensile strength of steel used (ksi)
specied minimum yield stress of steel used (ksi)
shear modulus of elasticity of steel (11,200 ksi)
acceleration due to gravity (386 in./s2)
average story height (above and below beam-tocolumn connection)
seismic importance factor related to Occupancy Category; moment of inertia (in.4)
importance factor subject to occupancy or function
of building
coefcient for estimating natural frequency of beam
(AISC Specication)
live load on a structural element; unbraced length
(compression or bracing member)
laterally unbraced length
limiting laterally unbraced length
maximum moment magnitude
value of maximum moment in unbraced segment of
beam (kip-in.)
absolute value of moment at quarter point of unbraced beam segment (kip-in.)
absolute value of moment at half point of unbraced
beam segment (kip-in.)
absolute value of moment at three-quarter point of
unbraced beam segment (kip-in.)
plastic moment of resistance of beam
required exural strength (kip-in. or kip-ft)
near-source factors
design wind pressure; concentrated load (kips)
bearing load on concrete (kips)
required axial strength (kips)
effect of horizontal seismic forces
basic wind pressure subject to basic wind speed
numerical coefcient applied to lateral-force-resisting
systems
ratio used in determining
response modication factor
component response modication factor
types of soil proles
elastic fundamental period of vibration; tension force
due to service loads (kips)
thickness of base plate (in.)
NOTATION
tp
U
V
Vn
W
wz
Z
M
S
b
c
c
t
v
w
0
xvii
panel zone thickness including doubler plates (in.)

reduction coefcient
total design lateral force (of shear)
shear force component (kips)
total seismic dead load (UBC 1997, Section
1630.1.1)
width of panel zone between column anges
seismic zone factor; plastic section modulus (in.3)
fraction of member force transferred across a particular net section
Maximum Inelastic Response Displacement
Design-level Response Displacement
deection (in.)
Redundancy/Reliability Factor
resistance factor
resistance factor for exure
resistance factor for axially loaded composite columns
resistance factor for compression
resistance factor for tension
resistance factor for shear
resistance factor for welds
Seismic Force Amplication Factor
CHAPTER 1
OVERVIEW
As usual in our vibrant, free society, it is up to us to decide whether to face the

reality of the seismic threat and embrace the availability of the solutions or to
continue to lie helpless before quakes which can atten our houses, destroy our
employers, damage our national economy and national defense, and wipe out
the nancial equity of a lifetime in a mere thirty seconds of groundshaking.
John J. Nance, On Shaky Ground, Morrow & Co., New York, 1988
1.1.
INTRODUCTION
During an earthquake an individual could be thrown out of bed at night, be

unable to stand upright and be forced to kneel on the ground, fall down stairs,
or even be tossed out of the swimming pool by the violent sloshing of the
water. In the aftermath of the 6.7-Richter-magnitude Northridge earthquake
of January 17, 1994 (Figure 1.1), the author spoke with the resident of a twostory house who had been through a similar experience during the 1971 San
Fernando earthquake. At that time she was repeatedly knocked down while
attempting to reach her baby daughter downstairs. Twenty-three years later,
living in a different location but still near the epicenter, the violent quaking
of Northridge prevented her once again from reaching the ground oor. Both
seismic events happened in the early morning.
The author collected these and other personal accounts in the course of
inspections of nearly 100 homes damaged by the Northridge earthquake.
There are ways of making structures safer than the current ones. Researchers and the engineering community have mobilized to achieve that goal, working on removing shortcomings in the design of structures that have not
OVERVIEW
Figure 1.1 Parking structure that collapsed during the 1994 Northridge earthquake,
California State University, Northridge Campus.
performed well in seismic events and coming up with improved versions

capable of standing up to a certain level of earthquakes. (See Figures 1.2 and
1.3.)
One option is to build or retrot on seismic isolators or structural dampers.
An example is the Los Angeles City Hall, retrotted with a viscous-device
type of supplemental damping to improve seismic response. However, placing
such a massive stone building and historic landmark on an earthquake damage
control system comes at a cost that not all areas can afford.
1.2
CONCEPTS, TERMINOLOGY, AND SOURCE OF EARTHQUAKES
Specic Gravity
The specic gravity of a substance refers to how much heavier than water a
unit volume of the substance is. Some specic gravities related to earthquake
engineering are as follows:
Earths crust
Mantle (inner periphery)
Core (periphery)
Center
2.73.0
5.7
9.7
12.3
The earths crust oats on the surface of the mantle (Figure 1.4), which possesses a viscoelastic character. This equilibrium is called isostasy.
1.2
CONCEPTS, TERMINOLOGY, AND SOURCE OF EARTHQUAKES
Figure 1.2 Straps are holding the crumbled lightweight concrete in a multistory
residential building in Santa Monica, California, severely damaged by the Northridge
earthquake.
Orogenic Movements and Crust Convection (Conveyor Belt)
Orogenic movements and crust convection are mainly responsible for mountain building and valley formingin other words, the constant changes affecting the surface of the earth.
In the rst half of the twentieth century Alfred Wegener asserted that at
one time continents such as Africa and South America were connected and
then drifted away from each other. Wegener, who was ridiculed at the time
for his continental drift concept, perished on an expedition to the North Pole.
Since then, fossil and geological evidence has substantiated the fact that these
continents were once one massive piece. High-technology developments of
the 1960s and deep-diving submarines have produced interesting ndings
about ocean oor ssures and left-and-right movements that, like a giant
conveyor belt, have the power of moving continents that oat on the viscous
mantle. A similar movement at Lake Victoria in Africa is slowly splitting the
African continent.
Subduction Zones
As the ocean oor exerts pressure on the coastline of the continent, the leading
edge of the ocean oor is pushed under the continent, carrying down sea
deposits, including the remains of organisms (Figure 1.5). The matter reaches
OVERVIEW
Figure 1.3 Detail of parking structure that collapsed during the Whittier Narrows
earthquake of 1987.
intensive heat under the continent and produces geothermal irregularities

gases and molten matter that tend to rise to the surface. This subduction
process can be seen in the series of active volcanoes along the Pacic shoreline of the American continent from Alaska to Chile, and is responsible for
the earthquakes that affected Chile, Colombia, California, and Washington
State.
Figure 1.4 Discontinuity of seismic waves, named the Mohorovicic discontinuity.
1.3
WAVE PROPAGATION AND VELOCITIES
Figure 1.5 Subduction process.
Volcanoes
Around 900 years ago the Sunset Crater volcano eruption coupled with strong
ground motion caused panic among the native population in what is today
Flagstaff and the surrounding areas of Arizona. We can still see the geologically fresh lava ow. In northern California, Mount Shasta bombarded the
neighboring region with boulders that scattered for miles, some weighing
about 5 tons. The upheaval was accompanied by severe ground motion.
Land Erosion
The 1812 New Madrid earthquake in Missouri is considered the largest earthquake in what is regarded a low-seismicity area. What could have caused such
an event was the mighty Mississippi constantly eroding the land mass and
making the earths crust lighter. Since the earths crust cannot adjust immediately to the rivers action, from time to time it springs up.
Summary of Main Sources of Earthquakes
1. Orogenic movements such as mountain building
2. Subduction and plate convection followed by geothermal and mechanical disturbances
3. Volcanic activity
4. Land erosion
1.3
WAVE PROPAGATION AND VELOCITIES
Wave Propagation
The focal point of an earthquake under the surface of the earth is called the
hypocenter and its corresponding point on the surface the epicenter. It is
customary to refer to earthquakes with relation to the epicenter.
OVERVIEW
When an earthquake hits the hypocenter, it sends out shock waves. There
are two types of shock waves:
Push wavesdenoted p
Shock waves or shear waves that produce transverse vibration with respect
to the direction of travel, also named s waves
The p waves are faster than s waves and arrive rst, produce a relatively mild
vibration, and cause less damage. They are messengers of the severe ground
shaking that will follow. The moment the s waves arrive, seismographic diagrams start recording the magnitude of ground shaking (Figure 1.6).
If the distance from a given observation point to the hypocenter is s, the
propagation velocity of the transverse waves is vs and the propagation velocity
of the longitudinal (push waves) is vp. Then T, the time difference between
the arrival of p and s waves, is given as
s
vs
s
vp
vs
1
vp
where the distance s (1/ vs 1/ vp)1 T from simple arithmetic. We need

three observation points to use triangulation and the geology of the ground,
which determines vs and vp by measurement. The 1997 UBC gives some
rough values for vs and vp. Nonetheless, it is advisable to have a good geotechnical report for accuracy.
Wave Velocities (Body Waves)
(1 E(1)(1 ) 2)
vp
where E Youngs modulus

Poissons ratio (usually 0.25)
density
Figure 1.6 Seismograph reading of ground vibration caused by an earthquake.
1.5
BUILDING DAMAGE
and
2(1E )
vs
Velocities vs of typical transverse waves to propagate through the ground for

selected materials are as follows (in meters per second):
Sand
Reclaimed sand
Clay
Gravel
Tertiary rock
1.4
60
100
250
600
1000 and up
MAGNITUDE OF EARTHQUAKES
To compare earthquakes, we need some yardstick or scale such as the one

created by C. F. Richter. Using a standard horizontal WoodAnderson seismograph, the magnitude
M log10 A
where A denotes the trace amplitude in micrometers for an epicentral distance
of 100 km. When the distance from the epicenter is other than 100 km,
M M
1.73 log10 100
where M is the magnitude at a distance calculated from the basic Richter

formula. The magnitudes of signicant earthquakes in the United States are
given in Table 1.1.
1.5
BUILDING DAMAGE
As a measure of the magnitude of destruction caused by the 1994 Northridge

earthquake, following is a summary of the structural damaged suffered in a
densely populated area, the City of Los Angeles:
Total Number of Buildings Damaged 93,200 (1900 red, 8800 yellow,
82,500 green). Of these, 3000 buildings suffered moderate to major
damage.
OVERVIEW
TABLE 1.1 Signicant U.S. Earthquakes

Location
Date
a
Cascadia Subduction Zone

New Madrid, Missouri
Ventura, California
Fort Tejon, California
Kau District, Island of Hawaii
Lanai, Hawaii
Owens Valley, California
California / Oregon coast
Denver, Colorado
Charleston, South Carolina
Imperial Valley, California
Cape Yakataga, Alaska
Yakutat Bay, Alaska
Eureka, California
San Andreas, California
San Francisco, California
Oregon
Pleasant Valley, Nevada
Eureka, California
Humboldt County, California
Santa Barbara, California
Clarkston Valley, Montana
Lompoc, California
Fox Islands, Aleutians, Alaska
Valentine, Texas
Cedar Mountain, Nevada
Long Beach, California
Excelsior Mountain, Nevada
Hansel Valley, Utah
Helena, Montana
Central Alaska
East of Shumagin Islands, Alaska
Imperial (El Centro), California
Ossipee Lake, New Hampshire
Skwenta, Alaska
Unimak Islands, Alaska
Wood River, Alaska
Southwest Montana
Manix, California
Seattle, Washington
White Wolf, California
Kern County, California
Near Islands, Alaska
Rainbow Mountain, Nevada
Fairview Peak, Nevada
Andreanof Islands, Alaska
1700
1811,
1812,
1812
1857
1868
1871
1872
1873
1882
1886
1892
1899
1899
1899
1906
1906,
1910
1915
1922
1923
1925
1925
1927
1929
1931
1932
1933
1934
1934
1935
1937
1938
1940
1940
1943
1946
1947
1947
1947
1949
1952
1952
1953
1954,
1954,
1957
Magnitude
9.0
December 16
February 7
April 18
August
December
8.1
8.0
7.1
7.9
7.0
6.8
7.4
7.3
6.2
7.3
7.8
7.9
8.0
7.0
8.3
7.8
6.8
7.1
7.3
7.2
6.3
6.6
7.1
7.8
5.8
7.3
6.4
6.5
6.6
6.25
7.3
8.2
7.1
5.5
7.4
8.1
7.2
6.25
6.4
7.1
7.7
7.3
7.1
6.8
7.1
8.6
1.5
BUILDING DAMAGE
TABLE 1.1 (Continued )

Location
Fairweather, Alaska
Wyoming
Hebgen Lake, Montana
Prince William Sound, Alaska
Rat Islands, Alaska
Puget Sound, Washington
Rat Islands, Alaska
San Fernando, California
Sitka, Alaska
Near Islands, Alaska
Eastern Idaho
Kalapana, Hawaii
Mount St Elias, Alaska
Imperial Valley, California / Mexico border
Eureka, California
Coalinga, California
Borah Peaks, Idaho
Chalfant Valley, California
Whittier, California
Gulf of Alaska
Gulf of Alaska
Loma Prieta, California
Crescent City (offshore) California
Sierra Madre, California
Joshua Tree, California
Big Bear, California
Cape Mendocino, California
Landers, California
Bishop. California
Northridge, California
Cape Mendocino, California
Northern California (off coast)
Hector Mine, California
Seattle, Washington
Denali Fault, Alaska
Rat Islands, Aleutians, Alaska
Offshore Oregon
San Simeon, California
Central California
Northern California (off coast)
Gulf of California
a
Date
1958
1959
1959
1964, March 27
1965
1965
1966
1971
1972
1975
1975
1975
1979
1979
1980
1983
1983
1986
1986
1987
1987
1988
1989
1991
1991
1992
1992
1992
1992
1993
1994
1994
1994
1996
1999
2001
2002
2003
2003
2003
2004
2005
2006, January 4
Magnitude
8.0
6.5
7.3
9.2
8.7
6.5
7.61
6.7
7.6
7.6
6.1
7.2
7.6
6.4
7.4
6.5
7.0
8.0
6.4
6.0
7.9
7.8
6.9
7.0
5.8
6.2
6.5
7.2
7.3
6.2
6.7
7.0
7.1
7.9
7.2
6.8
7.9
7.8
6.2
6.5
6.0
7.2
6.6
A 600-mile-long region that covers northern California, Oregon, Washington, and southern British Columbia. The earthquake triggered off a tsunami that reached Japan. Written records place
the earthquake in the evening of January 26, 1700.
Source: U.S. Geological Survey.
10
OVERVIEW
Failures by Building Class

Wood-framed homes: 1650
Wood-framed apartments, condominiums, and hotels: 630
Tilt-ups, masonry: 350
Unreinforced masonry retrotted: 213
Structural steel buildings: 100
1.6
STRUCTURAL FAILURES: OVERALL FAILURE
Structural failures may be categorized as overall failure and component failure. Overall failure involves collapse or overturning of the entire structure.
The choice of the type of structure is instrumental and often a predetermining
factor for failure.
1. Moment Frame in Longitudinal Direction, Shear Walls at Each End in
Short Direction This structural system was approved as a major structural
category to resist earthquakes by Structural Engineers Association of California (SEAOC), which inuenced the Uniform Building Code (UBC) and
the 2000 and 2003 International Building Codes (IBCs). This type of structure, however, fared badly in the January 17, 1994, Northridge earthquake.
Figure 1.7 shows the collapsed wing of an ofce building in the 1994 Northridge earthquake. The longitudinal moment frame underwent large lateral oscillation imposed by the longitudinal component of the quake.
The moment frame pushed over and destroyed the shear wall, leaving the
structure defenseless against the lateral force component in the short direction,
which caused the building to collapse. Each new UBC edition and its IBC
successors adopted this type of building system, granting it a prequalied
status design category. Such structures, they reasoned, would be able to resist
earthquakes, along with a few recognized structural types, such as moment
frames, braced frames, shear wall structures, and hybrid combinations of
these.
The basic concept behind the moment frameshear wall combination advocated by SEAOC is that the end shear walls will take care of the earth
force component in the short direction while the moment frame will resist
the longitudinal component acting in the longitudinal direction of the structure
(Figure 1.8). As explained below, the laws of nature challenge such an assumption.
When an earthquake hits, the structure undergoes lateral oscillations that
amplify in the longitudinal direction. The springlike response of the moment
frame and the large oor mass contribute to the excitation. Measured lateral
oor displacementsstory driftcan be on the order of 10 in. This fact
has been veried by the author while performing a dynamic analysis on
1.6
11
Figure 1.7 Northridge earthquake, 1994. Collapsed end shear wall, Kaiser Permanente Ofce Building, Granada Hills, CA. (Photo courtesy of the University of California Library at Berkeley.)
Figure 1.8 Moment frame and end shear wall, a bad combination to counter earthquakes.
12
OVERVIEW
earthquake-generated ground acceleration data at the base of an actual structure. Rapid and violent oscillations of the moment frame exceeding 2 Hz
(cycles per second) will cause the end shear wall to bend back and forth until
it breaks at the base. This was the case of the Kaiser Ofce Building in
Granada Hills during the 1994 Northridge earthquake. Once the end shear
walls are destroyed, the building is susceptible to catastrophic failure. It is
estimated that 80% of high-rise hospital structures in California have this type
of construction.
Champagne Towers, an upscale high-rise apartment building overlooking
the Santa Monica Bay in Southern California was built utilizing a similar
system, that is, end shear walls in the short direction and reinforced-concrete
moment frames acting in the long direction of the structure. When the 1994
Northridge earthquake hit, residents of the towers woke up to a frightening
sound and violent ground shaking accompanied by lateral sway. Initially not
all that signicant, within seconds the sway turned violent and uncontrollable
followed by the sound of an explosion when the concrete columns broke up
(Figure 1.9). The alarmed residents ed the building. The rst daylight revealed severe damage to the main load-bearing columns with diagonal cracks
up to 12 in. Within hours the building was declared dangerous, uninhabitable,
and condemned.
Mechanism of Destruction of Moment FrameEnd Shear Wall Construction. Shear walls are sensitive to out-of-plane bending. Normally just a
Figure 1.9 Reinforced-concrete columns severely damaged in the Northridge earthquake, Champagne Towers, Santa Monica, CA.
1.6
13
single layer of vertical reinforcement is provided for the wall and it is traditionally placed at the theoretical elastic centerline of the wall, thereby offering
poor resistance to out-of-plane bending (Figure 1.10).
When the moment frame undergoes lateral sway in the longitudinal direction, it causes serious out-of-plane exural deformation to the shear wall. As
the shear wall begins to sway back and forth, it crushes the outer and inner
bers of the concrete until there is no concrete left to support the rebars. Once
the rebars are deprived of the conning effect of the concrete, they buckle
under the load imposed by the shear wall. The process develops very fast,
the sway occuring at 23 Hz. The deformation of the wall can be very large
and the lateral oor displacement or story drift can reach a magnitude of 10
in. or more.
Exceedingly large sway of frame structures occurred during the San Fernando earthquake of 1971 in California. The stair/elevator towers of the Veterans Hospital swayed out, acting like a sledgehammer against the wings of
the main building and destroying it.
By now it should be clear to the reader that moment frameend shear wall
construction is a dangerous combination based on static force considerations
that ignore the dynamic response of the entire structure. Unfortunately this
type of construction was (and is) stated as accepted practice in successive
editions of the UBC and its successors, the IBC 2000 series.
Figure 1.10 It is estimated that 80% of hospital structures in California are of the
moment frameshear wall type of construction, a bad design arrangement to resist a
strong earthquake.
14
OVERVIEW
2. Multistory Buildings with First-Story Shear Walls Not Aligned with Upper Story Shear Walls When rst-story walls are not aligned with upper
story shear walls, they create an unnatural conguration that severs the continuity of the vital lateral force resisting system. Figures 1.111.13 show a
cross section and a side elevation of a building with the type of design forces
normallybut erroneouslyapplied to the main cantilever structure corbels
or cantilevered beams. These forces include gravity loads but ignore dynamic
impact by seismic forces.
While numerous engineering seminars teach that the oor of a structure
transfers the seismic shear to the nonaligned shear wall below, reality contradicts this concept. In addition to horizontal shear, the cantilever oor transfers
the overturning moment, which is greatly amplied by the rocking motions
induced by the dynamic impact of the earthquake.
Figure 1.11 Cross section of building with discontinuous shear walls.
Figure 1.12 Side elevation showing incomplete cantilever design forces. Dynamic
force caused by rocking motion can exceed PG gravity load for which the building is
normally designed.
Figure 1.13 Side elevation showing seismic reaction forces on cantilever ends.
1.6
15
The cantilever element, not designed for dynamic forces that may well
exceed dead- and live-load gravity, will be underdesigned and prone to failure.
Such was the case at the chemistry-physics building of the Santa Monica
Community College (SMCC) in Santa Monica, California, destroyed by the
1994 Northridge earthquake. The damage was so severe that the building
collapsed in a heap of rubble and no attempts were ever made to repair
and/or rehabilitate it. Instead, the building was demolished before the restoration of the majority of the other damaged buildings even began.
Numerous high-rise hospitals and hotel structures built using this system
are in danger of collapsing if a signicant earthquake hits them. An example
is the Santa Ana Tustin Hospital in Santa Ana, California, where shops occupy
the rst story space provided by the offset shear wall system.
3. Dry-Jointed Connections in Precast Parking Structures without Monolithic Connections An example of this type of construction was the California State University precast parking structure located near the epicenter of
the 1994 Northridge earthquake (Figure 1.14). Being dry jointed, that is, the
precast beams were supported on corbels of the equally precast concrete columns without monolithic connection, the structure relied on friction of the
support reaction created by gravity forces (mostly dead weight) across a few
inches of seating.
Figure 1.14 California State University parking structure. A corner of the cast-inplace framework was pulled in by the collapsed interior of the multistory structure
during the 1994 Northridge earthquake.
16
OVERVIEW
During an earthquake of relatively large magnitude, such as the 1994

Northridge earthquake, the several-feet-long lateral movement of the ground
tends to pull the beams off the inadequate support. Worse, the vertical ground
acceleration makes the structure weightless, thus overcoming any attempt to
rely on friction connection.
Regrettably, a moratorium has never been declared on these potentially
dangerous structures. Paradoxically, just a few months after the 1994 Northridge earthquake another precast parking structure was built at a sister campus, the California State University Long Beach, using the same system as
the collapsed Northridge parking structure.
Some California freeway bridges are perfect examples of ill-fated uses of
dry-jointed connections. An expansion joint is provided for the otherwise
continuous bridge deck, separating a main span into a short cantilever (the
supporting portion) and a long span (the supported portion). The main span
rests on a few-inch-wide seating. When an earthquake hits, it causes several
feet of measured lateral movement between adjacent or dry-joint connected
structural components. As the long span springs up, its support, the initially
continuous system breaks and suddenly converts into one short and one large
span cantilever element no longer capable of supporting their own weight.
The I-14/I-5 interchange near the town of San Fernando, California, crushed
a motorist to death when it collapsed in the 1971 San Fernando earthquake.
Yet the bridge was rebuilt using the same structural system, only to kill a
highway patrol ofcer that was on the bridge when the Northridge earthquake
hit.
It is estimated that more than 90% of the major California freeway bridges
are built using the same faulty concept and construction method. Following
the Loma Prieta and Northridge earthquakes, CALTRANS attempted to retrot the joints by locking the two bridge segments with high-strength steel
tendons. The tendons were inserted through holes drilled into the supporting
joints. However, the soft concrete matrix has a Brinell hardness of about 10
with the high-strength steel at about 100 on the Brinell hardness scale. Thus,
when a strong earthquake occurs, there is likely to be a cheese-cutter effect
that will cause the cable to cut through the concrete and separate the joints.
Once good construction is compromised, it seems virtually impossible to reverse the inevitable course of events, such as earthquakes exposing inherent
structural weaknesses.
Is there any other way to create expansion joints in continuous structures?
Perhaps doubling the columns would create safer expansion gaps between
separable bridge components.
4. When a Structure Is Too Strong to Break Up A solid, several-story
apartment structure built as a monolithic box of cast-in-place concrete tilted
without structural damage in the 1964 Niigata earthquake in Japan. Evidently
the rocking motion of the building, generated by the earthquake, created a
pumping action to the partially saturated soil, increasing its potential for liquefaction.
1.7
1.7
COMPONENT OR JOINT FAILURE
17
Component failure refers to failure of one or more structural elements, mostly

joints, due to a type of damage that makes the structural component or joint
unusable. Such a condition necessitates repair or replacement. Because the
failure mechanism differs according to the choice of material and type of
structure, it seems best to categorize the structure by the construction materials used, especially steel and concrete, and then create subcategories.
Steel Structures
Apart from hybrids, two major lateral force-resisting systems exist: (1)
moment-resisting frames and (2) braced frames.
1. Moment-Resisting Frames The most frequently observed damage to
these structures is beamcolumn joint failure. To ensure continuity and moment transfer, the solution by the construction industry has been to butt weld
the beam anges to the column. Shear transfer from beam to column (and
column to beam!) is provided by the shear tab, a vertical steel plate welded
to the column. The shear tab and the beam web provided with boltholes allow
prompt and easy erection. By tightening the bolts between the beam web and
the plate, the beam is kept in place until the beam anges are welded to the
column anges (or webs).
Several California earthquakes have proven that such a construction
method is defective. The lateral oscillations caused by ground motion on a
highly elastic steel frame create large internal forces that correspond to the
mass times acceleration of the massive concrete oor acting as the driving
force.
The amplication of dynamic lateral displacements often goes out of control, overtaxing the joint. During the rapid cycle, reversed stresses observed
by the author far exceeded the nominal yield strength of the steel. In fact,
often even the nominal ultimate strength (Fu) of the metal was exceeded.
Under such conditions, the structure had to depend upon additional reserves.
Such reserves are provided by the moment of resistance of the shear tab
by utilizing resistance of the bolts. When the friction grip bolts slip to form
a couple, the bolts begin exerting an excessive force on the shear tab. Not
meant for such extreme use (or misuse), the hardened high-strength bolts split
the shear tab. The author observed such damage during the postearthquake
retrotting of the Anthony Building, head ofce and control building for the
Los Angeles County Water and Power utility (Figure 1.15).
A fully welded web joint, the shear tab was welded to the beam web
instead of being bolted. It could have performed better if it had utilized the
full exural resistance of the entire beam section consisting of ange and
web. Yet this method was compromised in favor of a fast and easy erection.
18
OVERVIEW
Figure 1.15 Left: crack in beam web during the Northridge earthquake, Anthony
Building, Department of Water and Power, Los Angeles County.
Needless to say, tearing up the shear tab represents the last phase of the
integrity of a structure.
When the destroyed shear tabs can no longer carry the vertical reaction,
the oor will collapse on the oor below, which could create a catastrophic
chain reaction of progressive failure (pancaking) that could eventually wipe
out the entire building. Fortunately, in the case of the Anthony Building, the
January 1994 Northridge earthquake was of relatively short duration. Had it
lasted longer, it would have caused a oor collapse and possibly catastrophic
failure of the entire control building.
2. Braced Frames Concentric braced frames that proved their value in
situations involving static loads have a rather poor performance in an earthquake. Being a rather rigid structure, its shock absorption under dynamic
impact is almost negligible.
The damage to the concentric braced frames of the Oviatt Library Annex
in the California State Northridge Campus, California, is a clear demonstration of the lack of shock-absorbing properties of this type of structure (Figures
1.16 and 1.17).
The 4-in.-thick base plates connecting the Oviatt Library Annex structure
to its foundation, behaving like glass, cracked and failed in brittle fracture.
In addition to splitting the plates horizontally, as shown in Figure 1.16, a
punching shear failure started to develop around the perimeter of the frame
1.7
19
Figure 1.16 Cracks in 4-in.-thick base plates during the Northridge earthquake,
Oviatt Library Annex Building.
Figure 1.17 Shear failure at perimeter of frame legbase plate solidly welded connection, Oviatt Library Annex Building. Note the crack in the center and the initial
stage of shear failure on the left.
20
OVERVIEW
legbase plate solidly welded connection. Torn from its footings, this rather
slender structure would have overturned had the earthquake lasted a bit longer.
An alternative to the concentric braced frame which offers improved shock
absorption properties is the hybrid eccentric braced frame, which has members eccentrically connected at the joints. However, there is a trade-off for
improved shock absorption. During the time-dependent impacts of the earthquake, the beam providing eccentric connection for the braces will bend and
undergo permanent deformation. Should the deformation be of signicant
magnitude, it will affect the entire structure and leave an out-of-alignment
building that is difcult and expensive to repair or a permanently damaged
building that is impossible to repair. Developed alternatives for added safety
that do not compromise serviceability are presented at the end of this book.
Although there has been much debate about this structure, the improved
shock absorption is at the expense of sizable and permanent deformations that
make the entire building unacceptable for future use.
Reinforced-Concrete Structures: Moment-Resisting Frames
Of all structures, perhaps the reinforced-concrete moment-resisting frame is

the most vulnerable to earthquakes. Initially named ductile moment-resisting
frame by SEAOC and in several UBC editions, it was renamed special
moment-resisting frame in the 1997 edition of the Code. It was the preferred
structural design category and enjoyed a special low lateral coefcient as
compared to other structures. The problem is that there is nothing ductile
about this type of structure.
An example of the nonductile performance of the reinforced-concrete
moment-resisting frame was a fashion center parking structure in the Whittier
Narrows earthquake of 1987 in California (Figures 1.181.20). The author
established that, during each aftershock, the large, rapidly reversed horizontal
shear forces produced a grinding action at the beamcolumn joint that pulverized the concrete until it totally disappeared. Once the concrete was gone,
the slender rebars, lacking lateral connement, could no longer support the
weight of the massive concrete oor structure and buckled.
The mechanism of beamcolumn joint failure can be described in the following manner. As the signicant mass of the oor (or roof) deck starts
swaying back and forth, the frame columns attempt to resist the movement.
This causes the acceleration and dynamic forces to be imparted by the oor
beam to the beamcolumn joint. The dynamic response characteristics of a
deck are normally different from the frame column. The reversal of dynamic
forces, with their back-and-forth movement, grinds the concrete between
beam and column until it entirely disappears from the joint, leaving the column rebars exposed. The rebars, no longer conned, behave like slender columns and buckle under a large vertical beam reaction that they were not meant
to support. A progressive failure mechanism then results in collapse of the
entire structure.
1.8
CODE DESIGN FORCES: RESERVE STRENGTH TO COUNTER EXTREME FORCES
21
Figure 1.18 Initial stages of column joint degradation in the progressive failure of a
fashion center parking structure in the Whittier Narrows earthquake, 1987.
What went wrong with the Whittier fashion center parking structure and
the numerous other earthquake-damaged reinforced-concrete moment frames
that complied with UBC and SEAOC Blue Book requirements? According to
the SEAOCUBC concept, the column joint was supposed to yield under the
sway action of the frame. Since moment frames are referred to as rigid frames
in most textbooks, it seems odd to adopt them in earthquake areas, thereby
endowing them with qualities they do not possess. Such attributes are joint
yielding, plastic joint rotation beyond 3 rad, and excessive strength reserve
under the dynamic load of successive strain reversals caused by an earthquake.
Another major problem is underestimating earthquake-generated forces in
the UBC and IBC codes, as discussed next.
1.8 CODE DESIGN FORCES: RESERVE STRENGTH TO COUNTER
EXTREME FORCES
The author has analyzed actual forces acting upon a newly built, Codecomplying structure damaged by the Northridge earthquake. By reconstructing time deformations, frequency of internal forces, and characteristics of
22
OVERVIEW
Figure 1.19 Exterior columns that supported the second oor broke at the secondoor beamcolumn intersection, fashion center parking structure.
structural vibration caused by the earthquake, it was determined that the large
internal forces exceeded several times the UBC-predicted forces.
At this point it is important to evaluate and compare the UBCrecommended design forces with actual earthquake forces as measured at the
site. The 1979 UBC lateral coefcient for base shear (the maximum lateral
force coefcient) was 0.094 g at working stress level, or 13% at strength
level, using the 1.4 UBC 1997 load factor for conversion. The 1988 UBC
lateral coefcient for base shear was a mere 11.3% g at strength level, to be
increased again to 13% by the 1997 UBC.
How do these predictions compare to actual eld measurements? The lateral and vertical earthquake force was 100% g during the 1971 San Fernando
earthquake, measured at the Pacoima Dam. It was nearly 200% g near the
epicenter of the 1994 Northridge earthquake, at a nursery north of the California State University Northridge Campus.
The effects on buildings with a disproportion between projected or design
forces and actual forces are clearly obvious. In addition, building code regulations are prescriptive. As such, design professionals are expected to follow
somewhat rigid design rules based on the law of man rather than the law of
1.8
CODE DESIGN FORCES: RESERVE STRENGTH TO COUNTER EXTREME FORCES
23
Figure 1.20 Collapsed upper oor and a large portion of the collapsed parking structure, later demolished, Whittier Narrows earthquake, 1987.
physics. The latter is inherent in the nature of earthquakes, based on proportions of predictable forces and actual structural resistance.
If the gap between actual and predicted design forces were not too large,
it could be assumed that a structure would remain safe by applying a bit of
additional resistance as an adjustment. However, if the actual forces were in
excess of approximately 15 times the UBCs predicted design forces, something drastic is destined to happen. Fortunately the duration of California
earthquakes has been short as compared to other U.S. regions such as Alaska.
Time plays an essential role: The longer the duration of an earthquake, the
more damage it will cause, such as the 1964 Great Alaska earthquake, which
lasted more than 3 min.
The UBC lateral coefcient, applied horizontally to a ductile moment
frame, was between 12 and 18% g depending on height, geometry, and other
factors. This is a markedly underestimated value as compared to the 100% g
lateral ground acceleration measured at the Pacoima Dam during the 1971
San Fernando earthquake, that is, more than ve times the UBC-estimated
equivalent static force that overlooks the magnifying dynamic impact factor
due to structural response.
24
OVERVIEW
As mentioned earlier, the horizontal and vertical ground accelerations measured almost 200% gthe strongest ground movement recorded in the Northridge earthquakeat the Cedar Hills nursery in Tarzana,* near the epicenter.
Such readings substantiate the fact that structures engineered following UBC
regulations in force at the time were about 10 times underdesigned.
* The Tarzana Shake. The strong-motion accelerograph in this location recorded 1.82 g vertical
accelerations for approximately 8 seconds after the Northridge earthquake. The puzzling readings
and unrelenting shaking intrigued seismologists around the world and attracted them from Africa,
England, Japan, and New Zealand. It was the strongest measurement recorded in seismic history.
Equally inexplicable was the fact that Tarzana houses did not suffer signicant damage and people
in the community were ne.
The accelerograph was implanted into a rock close to the ground, on top of a hill in a ranch
once owned by author Edgar Rice Burroughs, creator of Tarzan, now the grounds of Cedar Hills
Nursery. The fact that the measuring instrument was on shallow rock proves that the readings
were not augmented. Site and instrument evaluations done afterward also conrmed the validity
of the readings.
CHAPTER 2
2.1
BUILDING CODES
The 1997 UBC, the 75th and last UBC issued, was replaced by the IBC in
2000. Revised twice as we write these pages, the 2006 IBC has been published. The UBC underwent several modications, some changes undoubtedly
inuenced by signicant seismic events such as the 1933 Long Beach earthquake. Here we discuss some of the most signicant provisions that affected
seismic design.
The 1960 UBC provided the following equation in addressing the total
lateral force acting at the base of the structure:
V KCW
for base shear
This approach was soon modied. Subsequent editions of the UBC included
zone factor Z, which depends on the expected severity of earthquakes in
various regions of the United States; coefcient C, which represents the vibration characteristic based on the fundamental period T of the structure;
horizontal force factor K, which measures the strength of the structure against
earthquake impact; and the total dead-load weight W of the structure:
V ZKCW
expression for the base shear.
The coefcients I and S were added to the formula in the 1970s, where I
represents the importance of the structure (such as hospitals and re and
25
26
police stations) and S the soil structure, a site structure resonance factor in
UBC 1982:
V ZIKCSW
The 1988 UBC provided a modied expression,
V
ZIC
W
RW
where C incorporated the soil structure response factor S into the expression
for the fundamental period of the structure and RW assumed the role of the
former K factor for basic braced frame, special moment-resisting space frame
(SMRSF), and other types of structures. Contrary to expectations, the new
formula produced virtually the same relatively low value for base shear as its
predecessors.
Unlike the 1997 UBC, previous codes did not indicate the steps to be taken
by the design professional. The implementation of code provisions was left
to the interpretation of individuals, namely engineering seminar instructors,
which inevitably led to a disparity of code interpretations and uncertainty.
The uncertainty over code interpretation was acutely felt by design professionals taking courses for the structural licensing examination. A palpable
example is the discontinuity of seismic forces through shear walls from upper
stories down to the rst oor where the shear wall is offset. Seminar instructors maintained that the second-oor slab would pick up the horizontal reaction of the upper shear wall and transmit it to the offset lower shear wall.
This awed concept ignored the existence of other severe internal forces,
evident in the collapse of the Santa Monica Community College Chemistry
Building and other structures in the 1994 Northridge earthquake.
2.2
UBC 1997: A MODEL CODE
The 1997 UBC can be considered the model code for years to come. The
structure and methodology will be practically the same for the IBC editions
that followed, with the exception of setting up earthquake forces. The 1997
UBC currently in use in California and other western states led to the IBC.
A quantum leap from previous seismic provisions, the 1997 UBC was drafted
after the 1994 Northridge earthquake and benets from the lessons learned
from a seismic event that proved the need for revision and signicant improvement of the design provisions contained in the building code. It resulted
in signicant change in structural congurations, member sizes, and types of
beam-to-column connections.
Among the new features introduced by the 1997 UBC is the modication
of internal design forces such as column loads and forces in braces and con-
2.3
INTERACTION OF BUILDING CODES AND OTHER STANDARDS
27
nections in an attempt to increase design values. Regrettably, the design values

stem from unrealistically low seismic design forces applied to the main structure. While the method to increase some internal design forces might be
arbitrary, such as to multiply values of basic code seismic analysis by 2.8 or
3.0, 1997 UBC effectively guides the designers as to how to modify values
in their analysis.
Two design examples based on the complex, elaborate 1997 UBC regulations will be presented later, one using load and resistance factor design
(LRFD) and the other based on allowable stress design (ASD) analysis. The
examples are analytical with regard to 1997 UBC prescriptive provisions and
are illustrated by a step-by-step design of all structural elementsexcept
foundation and base-plate designin accordance with 1997 UBC requirements.
The design seismic forces in the 1997 UBC are based on earthquake zones
with due consideration given to existing faults. The 2000 and 2003 IBC earthquake forces are based on statistics of ground velocities and accelerations. A
question arises: Where do such nationwide data come from? When IBC 2000
was issued, there were U.S. seismograph networks present in three states:
California, Oregon, and Washington. It is critical to have accurate data from
the rest of the nation to accomplish the ambitious seismic design proposed
by the IBC.
2.3
INTERACTION OF BUILDING CODES AND OTHER STANDARDS
The IBC, as well as its predecessor the UBC, is the product of a joint effort
by engineering bodies and design professionals. Both reference other building
standards, such as the American Concrete Institute (ACI), the American Society of Civil Engineers (ASCE) 7, the American Institute of Steel Construction (AISC) Manual, the American Society for Testing and Materials
(ASTM), and others in whole or in part, with or without modication. Thus
those standards become part of the code. Practicing professionals and most
students at the graduate level are aware of the system and how it works. The
2005 third edition of the AISC Manual (p. vi) warns the reader in this respect:
Caution must be exercised when relying upon other specications and codes
developed by other bodies and incorporated by reference herein since such
material may be modied or amended from time to time subsequent to the
printing of this edition.
As a general rule, the UBC and its successor the IBC adopt AISC standards
for structural steel design, ACI 318 for structural concrete design, and ASCE
7 for design loads for buildings and other structures, all with due consideration to ASTM standards with regard to material properties and performance
as well as American Welding Society (AWS) tests and standards and other
engineering and construction entities. A signicant example of this interaction
is IBC 2006, Section 1613, Earthquake Loads. What was several pages of
28
denitions, examples, and design philosophy in IBC 2000 has been reduced
substantially by adopting the ASCE 7 provisions for structures and nonstructural permanent components to resist the effects of earthquakes. Following
are examples of close interaction and cross-referencing among codes and
adopted standards from other entities.
Section 2205 of IBC 2003 adopts AISC provisions when addressing structural steel design:
2205.1 General. The design, fabrication and erection of structural steel for
buildings and structures shall be in accordance with the AISC LRFD, AISC 335
or AISC-HSS. Where required, the seismic design of steel structures shall be in
accordance with the additional provisions of Section 2205.2.
The 2003 IBC also includes ACI guidelines in its seismic requirements:
2205.3 Seismic requirements for composite construction. The design, construction and quality of composite steel and concrete components that resist seismic
forces shall conform to the requirements of the AISC LRFD and ACI 318. An
R factor as set forth in Section 1617.6 for the appropriate composite steel and
concrete system is permitted where the structure is designed and detailed in
accordance with the provisions of AISC 341, Part II. In Seismic Design Category
B or above, the design of such systems shall conform to the requirements of
AISC 341, Part II.
In turn, Section 1617.6 adopts ASCE 7 provisions stating that for seismicforce-resisting systems the provisions given in Section 9.5.2.2 of ASCE 7
should be used except as modied in Section 1617.6.1. Exception: For structures designed using the simplied analysis procedure in Section 1617.5, the
provisions of Section 1617.6.2 shall be used.
In turn AISC, issues Seismic Provisions for Structural Steel Buildings, now
in its 2005 edition, published as American National Standards Institute
(ANSI)/AISC 341-05.
It is worth noting that the latest revision of the AISC Seismic Provisions
implemented a number of changes to reect the Federal Emergency Management Agency (FEMA)/SAC recommendations. As we know, such recommendations were part of the massive effort undertaken by the engineering
community to improve seismic design of structures after the 1994 Northridge
earthquake.
The AISC revisions to the seismic provisions also include modications
to be consistent with the ASCE 7-02 document, Minimum Design Loads for
Buildings and Other Structures. This allows these provisions to be incorporated by reference into both the 2003 IBC and NFPA 5000 building codes
that use ASCE 7-02 as their basis for design loadings.
In the area of masonry design, IBC codes adopt provisions and design
practice and philosophy of entities such as The Masonry Society (TMS), the
Masonry Standards Joint Committee, the ACI, and the ASCE. CHAPTER 21
(Masonry), Section 2103, of IBC 2003, which addresses masonry construc-
2.4
IBC 2006
29
tion materials, relies heavily on ASTM standards. The chapter includes several tables for mortar proportions and properties, compressive strength of clay
masonry and reinforced masonry, and a table that summarizes specic requirements for masonry replaces and chimneys. Section 2106, Seismic Design, of IBC 2003 adopts the provisions of ACI 530/ASCE 5/TMS 402 and
specic sections of each of those entities depending on the seismic design
category of the structure.
There are other examples of the strong relationship between the main building code and engineering bodies. In the eld of design, manufacturing, and
use of open web steel joists, the IBC adopts the Steel Joist Institute (SJI)
specications. Section 2206 of IBC 2003 establishes that the design, manufacturing, and use of open web steel joists and joist girders should be in
accordance with one of the following SJI specications:
1. Standard Specications for Open Web Steel Joists, K Series
2. Standard Specications for Longspan Steel Joists, LH Series and Deep
Longspan Steel Joists, DLH Series
3. Standard Specications for Joist Girders
In addition, where required, the seismic design of buildings should be in
accordance with the additional provisions of Section 2205.2 or 2211.
Section 2211 addresses the design of cold-formed steel light-framed shear
walls in great detail, taking into account wind and seismic issues, and provides
tables for the nominal shear values for wind forces and seismic forces for
shear walls framed with cold-formed steel studs. The 2003 IBC is also concerned with the shear resistance adjustment factor Co and provides a table for
maximum opening height ratio and height.
In general, IBC 2003 refers to AISI-NASPEC for the design of cold-formed
carbon and low-alloy steel structural members but also includes ASCE provisions. These are given in Section 2209, Cold-Formed Steel, stating that
the design of cold-formed carbon and low-alloy steel structural members
should be in accordance with the North American Specication for the Design
of Cold-Formed Steel Structural Members (AISI-NASPEC). However, the design of cold-formed stainless steel structural members should be in accordance with ASCE 8. Cold-formed steel light-framed construction should
comply with IBC 2003, Section 2210.
2.4
IBC 2006
At the time of this writing the International Code Council (ICC) launched the
third edition of the IBC, IBC 2006.
Like its predecessors, the latest edition strives to provide an up-to-date
building code that addresses the design and construction of building systems
with emphasis on performance. The aim is also to offer a forum for building
30
professionals to evaluate and discuss the performance and prescriptive requirements of IBC 2006 at an international level.
The preface of the 2006 edition presents the code as originally issued,
with changes reected in the 2003 edition and further changes approved
through the ICC Code Development Process through 2005.
Signicant Changes from 2000 and 2003 Editions
CHAPTER 16. STRUCTURAL DESIGN
Table 1604.5 Occupancy Category of Buildings and Other Structures
The 2006 IBC has attempted, and achieved, simplication. One of the signicant
changes in structural design is in Table 1604.5. Initially issued as Classication
of Buildings and Other Structures for Importance Factors, the table is now
presented as Occupancy Category of Buildings and Other Structures. The
seismic factor, snow factor, and wind factor have been eliminated. The rst
column is now Occupancy Category and, as IBC 2003, includes categories
IIV.
From our structural and seismic point of view, other changes in Chapter 16
worth noting are mentioned next.
Section 1602 Denitions and Notations
Several items have been deleted from the list, such as basic seismic-forceresisting systems and boundary members. Dead loads include additional items
such as plumbing stacks and risers; electrical feeders; heating, ventilating, and
air-conditioning systems; and re sprinkler systems. The concept element has
been deleted. The frame denition and listing have been eliminated in their
entirety.
The denition of occupancy category as a category used to determine structural requirements based on occupancy has been added to reect the changes in
Table 1604.5 as noted above.
Section 1603 Construction Documents
Minor modications have been made to this section.

1603.1.5 Earthquake Design Data The 2006 IBC shows the evolution of
concepts and philosophy since the IBC 2000 issue. The IBC 2000 listed: (1)
Seismic use group, (2) Spectral response coefcients SDS and SD1, (3) Site class,
(4) Basic seismic-force-resisting system, (5) Design base shear, and (6) Analysis
procedure. In IBC 2003 the list was modied to add other information:
1.
2.
3.
4.
Seismic importance factor IE and seismic use group

Mapped spectral response accelerations SS and S1
Site class
Spectral response coefcients SDS and SD1
2.4
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
10.
IBC 2006
Seismic design category

Basic seismic-force-resisting system(s)
Design base shear
Seismic response coefcient(s) CS
Response modication factor(s) R
Analysis procedure used
Consistent with the revisions discussed earlier, IBC 2006 modies item 1 to read
Seismic importance factor, I, and occupancy category.
Section 1604 General Design Requirements
has been modied once again in IBC 2006, this time to show
a more concise and specic list: The deection of steel structural members
shall not exceed that permitted by AISC 360, AISI-NAS, AISI-General, AISITruss, ASCE 3, ASCE 8, SJI JG-1.1, SJI K-1.1 or SJI LH / DLH-1.1, as applicable.
1604.3.3 Steel
Table 1604.5 Was discussed above in the introduction to IBC 2006.
Two subsections have been added to 1604, General Design Requirements, of

IBC 2006, and it is interesting to note that they address resistance to earthquake
and wind, including the role of seismic isolation in structures:
1604.9 Counteracting Structural Actions Prescribes that structural members, components, and cladding must be designed to resist earthquake and wind
forces, taking into consideration overturning, sliding, and uplift. Continuous load
paths should be provided to transmit those forces to the foundation. The 2006
IBC specically mandates that the force should take into account the effects
of friction between sliding elements when sliding is used to isolate the components.
1604.10 Wind and Seismic Detailing Prescribes that lateral-force-resisting
systems should meet the provisions of the Code and ASCE 7, excluding Chapter
14 and Appendix 11A.
1605.2.1 Basic Load Combinations Modications are made to equations
where strength design or LRFD is used:

(Equation
(Equation
(Equation
(Equation
16-1):
16-2):
16-6):
16-7):
1.4(D F)
1.2(D F T) 1.6(L H) 0.5(Lr or S or R)
0.9D 1.6W 1.6H
0.9D 1.0E 1.6H
1605.3.1 Basic Load Combinations Where ASD (working stress design) is

used, this section has also undergone modications to the equations, not listed
here for simplication.
31
32
Section 1606 Dead Loads
The wording is changed in 1606.1 to note that dead loads are those dened in
Section 1602.1 and dead loads shall be considered permanent loads. Although
not marked in the margin, 1606.2 has also been modied: Design dead load.
For purposes of design, the actual weights of materials of construction and xed
service equipment shall be used. In the absence of denite information, values
used shall be subject to the approval of the building ofcial.
Table 1607.1 Minimum Uniformly Distributed Live Loads and Minimum
Concentrated Live Loads Item 30, roofs, of the table has undergone sub-
stantial changes, not included here for simplication.

Section 1609 Wind Loads
1609.2 Denitions A number of denitions have been deleted from IBC 2003.
Two are left in IBC 2006: hurricane-prone regionsareas vulnerable to hurricanesand wind-borne debris regionportions of hurricane-prone regions
that are within 1 mile of the coastal mean high water line where the basic wind
speed is 110 mph or greater or portions of hurricane-prone regions where the
basic wind is 120 mph or greater; or Hawaii.
1609.3.1, 1609.4, 1609.4.1, 1609.4.2, and 1609.4.3 These sections have undergone signicant changes; not listed here for simplication.
Section 1610 Soil Lateral Loads
No changes were made to this section from 2003.

Section 1613 Earthquake Loads
General Note Again, overall great simplication in IBC 2006 as compared to
2003, namely:
IBC 2006 has reduced a number of denitions from the rather extensive
list included in IBC 2003.

Sections 16141623 of IBC 2003 have been eliminated, including the tables
for design coefcients for basic seismic-force-resisting systems.

1613.1 Scope In 1613.1 IBC 2006 prescribes that every structure and portions
thereof, including nonstructural components that are permanently attached to

structures and their supports and attachments, must be designed and built according to ASCE 7, with exclusion of Chapter 14 and Appendix 11A. The
seismic design category can be determined according to either Section 1613 of
IBC 2006 or ASCE 7. Exceptions are certain family dwellings, some woodframe buildings, agricultural storages and structures that require special considerations that are not addressed by IBC or ASCE 7.
2.4
IBC 2006
1613.2 Denitions IBC 2006 has included here some of the earthquake nomenclature that was listed in Section 1613 of IBC 2003.
Table 1613.5.2 Site Class Denitions Replaces Table 1615.1.1 in IBC 2003
with no changes.
Replaces Table 1615.1.2(1)
of IBC 2003 with a change in caption b that now reads: Values shall be determined in accordance with Section 11.4.7 of ASCE 7.
Table 1613.5.3(1) Values of Site Coefcient Fa
Replaces Table 1615.1.2(2)

of IBC 2003 with a change in caption b that now reads: Values shall be determined in accordance with Section 11.4.7 of ASCE 7.
Table 1613.5.3(2), Values of Site Coefcient FV
1613.5.6 Determination of Seismic Design Category The subject of this
subsection was under 1616.3 in IBC 2003 that was based on the seismic design
use group and has been substantially modied. Essentially, Occupancy Category I, II or III structures located where the mapped spectral response acceleration parameter at 1-second period, Sl is greater than or equal to 0.75 shall be
assigned to Seismic Design Category E. Occupancy category IV structures under seismic conditions should be assigned to seismic design category F. All
others should be assigned to a category based on their occupancy category and
the design spectral response acceleration coefcients SDS and SDI according to
Section 1613.5.4 or the site-specic ASCE 7 procedures.
Tables 1613.5.6(1) and 1613.5.6(2), which were 1616.3(1) and 1616.3(2), respectively, in IBC 2003, are presented with a modication to the title to include
occupancy category I or II in the rst column.
1613.6.2 Additional Seismic-Force-Resisting Systems for Seismically Isolated Structures IBC 2006 incorporates this subsection (the last in the struc-
tural design chapter) to add an exception to the end of ASCE 7, Section 17.5.4.2.
The exception is for isolated structures designed in accordance with this standard [ASCE 7] the Structural System Limitations and the Building Height Limitations in Table 12.2-1 for ordinary steel concentrically braced frames (OCBFs)
. . . and ordinary moment frames (OMFs) . . . are permitted to be taken as 160
feet . . . for structures assigned to Seismic Design Category D, E or F, provided
that . . . 1. The value of RI as dened in Chapter 17 is taken as 1; 2. For OMFs
and OCBFs, design is in accordance with AISC 341.
CHAPTER 19. CONCRETE

Section 1908
Like previous IBC editions, IBC 2006 adopts ACI 318 provisions with signicant modications included in 1908.11908.1.16. Section 1908.1.3 modies and
adds ACI 318 denitions. One of them is design displacement as total lateral
33
34
displacement expected for the design-basis earthquake, as specied by Section

12.8.6 of ASCE 7.
CHAPTER 21. MASONRY
We are mostly concerned with Section 2106, Seismic Design. The 2006 IBC
introduces a modication to 2106.1, Seismic Design Requirements for Masonry, stating that masonry structures and components should comply with the
requirements in Section 1.14.2.2 and Section 1.14.3, 1.14.4, 1.14.5. 1.14.6 or
1.14.7 of ACI 530 / ASCE 5 / TMS 402 depending on the structures seismic
design category as determined in Section 1613. The same sections of the ACI,
ASCE, and TMS standards are referred to in Section 2106.1.1, Basic seismicforce-resisting system; 2106.1.1.2, Intermediate prestressed masonry
shear walls; 2106.1.1.3, Special prestressed masonry shear walls; and
others that show minimal changes from IBC 2003.
CHAPTER 22. STEEL
The 1997 UBC devoted about 36 pages to steel design, which were then reduced
to 6 pages in IBC 2000 and 8 in IBC 2003. Inasmuch as IBC 2006 adopts
chiey AISC 360 for the design, fabrication, and erection of structural steel for
buildings and structures, the chapter on steel has been reduced to two and a half
pages. Seismic Design Categories A, B, or C in Section 2205.2.1, which were
the subject of modications in IBC 2003, are changed once again in IBC 2006.
The R Factor
In IBC 2003 an R factor was set forth in 1617.6 for the appropriate steel system
and was permitted where the structure was designed and detailed according to
the provisions of AISC, Parts I and III. The 2006 IBC refers to an R factor as
set forth in Section 12.2.1 of ASCE 7 for the appropriate steel system and is
permitted where the structure is designed and detailed conforming to the provisions of AISC 341, Part I. For structural steel systems not specically detailed
for seismic resistance, the designer shall use the R factor in ASCE 7, Section
12.2.1.
Steel Joists
It is interesting to note that IBC 2006 devotes almost one full page to Section
2206, which addresses the design, manufacture, and use of open web steel joists,
as compared to about 10 lines in IBC 2003. In both cases, though, the codes
refer to the additional provisions of Section 2205.2 or 2210.5. In general, the
design regulations rest with one of the SJI specications, that is, SJI K-1.1, SJI
LH / DLH-1.1, or SJI JG-1.1, already mentioned above in reference to Chapter
16, Structural Design.
2.4
IBC 2006
35
Cold-Formed Steel, Light-Framed Construction
The 2006 IBC devotes Sections 2209 and 2210 to cold-formed steel and lightframed steel construction, respectively. In general, the subject is referred to AISINAS and to ASCE 8 for cold-formed stainless steel structural members. Section
2211 included in IBC 2003 has been eliminated.
Wind and Seismic Loads
2210.5 Lateral Design Modied to prescribe that the design of light-framed
cold-formed steel walls and diaphragms to resist wind and seismic loads should
be in accordance with AISI-Lateral.
CHAPTER 23. WOOD
The 2006 IBC devotes virtually the same number of pages to the design of
wood-framed structures as its predecessor, IBC 2003.
Section 2307 Load and Resistance Factor Design LRFD,
which was in accordance with ASCE 16* in IBC 2003, is now modied to state
that the structural analysis and construction of wood elements and structures
using LRFD design should be in accordance with the American Forest and Paper
Association (AF&PA) National Design Specication (NDS).
Table 2308.12.4
With regard to seismic design, there is a signicant change in this table, Wall
Bracing in Seismic Design Categories D and E, with minimum length of wall
bracing per each 25 linear feet of braced wall line. Once again IBC 2006
achieves simplication. Story location in the table has been changed to Condition and reduced to one story.
* ASCE 16, Load and Resistance Factor Design Standard for Engineered Wood Construction.
CHAPTER 3
REINFORCED-CONCRETE
STRUCTURES
3.1
INTRODUCTION
We mentioned the inadequate performance of reinforced-concrete momentresisting frames in Chapter 1, which addressed structural failures during an
earthquake. However, properly engineered reinforced-concrete structures normally fare well in an earthquake.
Concrete design procedures are thoroughly described in current textbooks,
namely Design of Reinforced Concrete by J. C. McCormac (Wiley, New York,
2005), among others. The procedures adhere to the principles set up by ACI
318, now in its 2005 edition and adopted by the IBCs. This ensures compliance with the latest seismic regulatory standards.
Concrete as Construction Material
Concrete has high compressive strength but comparatively low tensile

strength. To compensate, reinforced concrete was invented by placing steel
reinforcement in anticipated zones of tension of members such as beams and
columns. The outcome of this blend was a successful and highly popular
material that, if well designed and properly constructed, offers a number of
advantages:
Economical Can be constructed of local materials. Stone and sand aggregates are found near almost any job site.
Not Susceptible to Buckling Unlike steel, the structural components of
concrete are relatively robust.
36

3.1
INTRODUCTION
37
Easy to Form The continuity of components such as beam-to-column

connection facilitates construction. Cast-in-place concrete is monolithic,
provided we ensure continuity of reinforcement. Both concrete and steel
must be used to form the composite known as reinforced concrete.
Steel Reinforcement Grade refers to the specied yield strength. Per
ASTM A 615:
Grade 40: y 40 ksi
Grade 60: y 60 ksi
Grade 40 is used mostly for smaller projects, whereas grade 60 is used for
major jobs such as large-span beams and columns for multistory buildings.
However, we must not draw an oversimplied conclusion about the usefulness
of grade 40. Despite its lower strength, grade 40 is more ductile than its
stronger counterpart and extremely well suited for ties and stirrups, where
corners of relatively tight curvature must be formed without risk of cracking
the reinforcement. As a general rule, the stronger the grade, the least ductile
is the reinforcing steel.
Aggregates To cast a strong concrete, we must have coarse and ne aggregates. Coarse aggregate may be gravel such as from a river deposit or
crushed stone. Fine aggregate is sand that must not contain any sizable
amount of silt, organic matter, and so on. The ratio of coarse to ne aggregate
is determined by trial and error using test mixes for the local aggregate. If
concrete is made of stone, we call it stone concrete or normal-weight concrete.
Lightweight concrete is made of aggregates that are the byproduct of industrial
processes.
Cement In addition to strong and durable aggregates, we must cement the
aggregates and steel together to form a monolithic articial stone. The amount
of water added to make the chemical composition work is controlled by the
watercement ratio. The ratio of water by weight to the amount of cement is
critical for the strength of concrete. Too little water might not be sufcient
to trigger the chemical reaction and might result in a nonworkable mixture.
On the other hand, too much water will dilute the effectiveness of cement
and result in weak concrete. A suitable watercement ratio is just a bit over
0.4 for concrete without plasticizers and between 0.30 and 0.35 with plasticizers. Making good concrete, casting it, and leaving it at the mercy of the
elements does not mean the job is done. The fresh concrete should be protected from dehydration, excessive heat, and frost.
Reinforcing Bars Reinforcing steel bars may be plain or deformed. Deformed bars are preferred over plain bars because they provide a better bond-
38
ing (grip) between concrete and steel. Bars are identied by numbers that
refer to the diameter expressed in one-eighth of an inch. For instance, the
diameter of a #10 bar is 10 18 in. 1.25 in.
The most commonly used deformed bars are #3#11. The #14 bar is considered too large for buildings, but is suitable for bridge construction.
The bar carries a force of 1.27 60 76.2 k nominal axial force. This
is a very large force that has to be transmitted to the body of concrete through
development length at the ends of the beam, by lap length.
The development of bars has become a major issue in recent years.
The #4 and #5 bars are mostly used for slab reinforcement, ties, and stirrups for columns and beams. The #6 bars and larger are normally used for
main exural reinforcement of beams and tensioncompression reinforcement
of columns.
Mechanical Properties of Concrete
Modulus of Elasticity The modulus of elasticity is the ratio of stress to
strain and is applicable to elastic materials. A member will have smaller
deformation if the value is higher. The general formula for all concrete, normal or lightweight, is
Ec w1.5(33)(c)0.5
where w is the unit weight expressed in pounds per cubic and c the strength
of concrete in pounds per square inch for a 28-day cylinder. For the normalweight or stone concrete
Ec 57,000 (c)0.5
where both Ec and c are in pounds per square inch.
Tensile Strength As a rule, ACI 318 does not include the tensile strength
of concrete in any strength calculation, except under special conditions. Apart
from prestressed concrete (transfer), ACI 318 is silent about the tensile
strength of concrete. Concrete tensile strength values are given in ACI 9.5.
Modulus of Rupture A cracked concrete member possesses less stiffness
to counter deection as compared to an integral member.

The tensile resistance of normal-weight concrete in ACI 9.5.2.3 is given
as the modulus of rupture
r 7.5(c)0.5
3.1
INTRODUCTION
39
as measured in destructive bending tests on plain concrete beams. The modulus of rupture is the upper bound of the measured tensile resistance. Its value
is higher than the values obtained by more accurate test measurements obtained in Europe in tensile tests on dogbone coupons.
Following are the tensile strength values for grades of concrete according
to the modulus-of-rupture tests:
c 3000 psi
r 410 psi
c 4000 psi
r 475 psi
r 5000 psi
r 530 psi
where
c 4000 psi is generally considered the most popular for buildings in
the construction industry, except for very tall multistory structures and
bridges
c 5000 psi is chosen where there is a supply of local, adequately strong
aggregate available
Weight of Concrete
Normal weight: 150 pcf

Light weight: 100120 pcf
ASTM Standard Bar Sizes and Areas
#3
#4
#5
#6
#7
#8
a
0.11
0.20
0.31
0.44
0.60
0.79
in.2
in.2
in.2
in.2
in.2
in.2
#9
#10
#11
#14a
#18a
1.00
1.27
1.56
2.25
4.00
in.2
in.2
in.2
in.2
in.2
Use with discretion.
Design for Bending
For years the only method used was working stress design (WSD). It was
based on actual or working loads with a load factor of 1. Following European
practice, this method was gradually replaced by ultimate strength design
(USD), now referred to as strength design or limit-state design. The major
steps in this transition are:
40
The 1956 ACI code included ultimate strength design in the Appendix.
The 1963 ACI code awarded the two methods equal standing.
The 1971 ACI code became almost totally a strength code.
According to the rules of strength design, there are two options to design
for exure:
(a) Using two of the three basic static equations M 0 and H 0,
and allowing an idealized plastic response to take place for both concrete and steel
(b) Using the stressstrain compatibility relationship to determine internal
stresses as a function of the external moment
The latter method, however, is mandatory for some special cases, such as
combined bending and axial compression and doubly reinforced beams.
Assume that, after vertical exural, a crack has propagated to the extreme
compression ber at the top face of a simply supported beam. Then the compression zone has to bear on a single line A of an innitesimal depth. If the
compression zone has enough strength, it will plasticize and build up an
internal force C required to resist the external moment.
This method is known as the rectangular compression block method. It
was used in Europe for years before being incorporated into the ACI code.
The reader will note that the results were easily obtained: Let the compression
block develop a sufcient fully plasticized depth to build up the resistance to
counter the factored external moment. For this we assumed an ideal plasticizing process that would result in a uniform plastic stress distribution.
In reality the edges of the compression stress diagram are rounded off,
especially at the neutral axis, where transition takes place. The idealized
rectangular stress block sets up an equivalent, simplied, uniformly distributed stress block. The block in turn, with adjusting parameters such as
0.85c, would produce the same results as the complex and more laborious
stressstrain compatibility method.
3.2
SHEARING RESISTANCE OF RC BEAMS
The shearing resistance of RC beams should be renamed combined bending

and shearing resistance of reinforced concrete beams because the two concepts cannot be separated.
In the 1950s the exural resistance/ultimate exural strength was already
in use very much as we are using it today. At that time Europe and Russia
gradually introduced the concept of ultimate strength design into their building codes, as did the United States about 10 years later. What was named
ultimate strength design or strength design was only applicable to pure bend-
3.2
41
ing, that is, for a single section along a beam. Combined bending and shear
were present everywhere. Building codes were still using ASD formulas for
shear strength design, which did not make much sense. The ASD shear formulas were unclear and did not t the physics of beam behavior in the ultimate strength state. This author led the way to solve the problem by
combining shear and bending as it naturally occurs in a reinforced-concrete
beam and developed a full ultimate strength design method for combined
shear and bending moment (Figures 3.13.6).
Looking at the free-body diagram of Figure 3.1 we note that both sums of
the horizontal forces must be equal to zero,
CT0
but also the sum of the vertical forces must be in equilibrium and equal to
zero; otherwise the two pieces A and B would move vertically with respect
to each other and the beam would collapse in shear failure.
The basic derivation without building code restrictions is as follows: We
design the beam for bending, that is,
Mu 40 2 80 k-ft 960 k-in.
We are concerned with the 40 k vertical force acting on A. If the shearing
resistance of the compressed zone counteracts the entire 40 k shear, we would
have nothing to worry about, but in most cases this does not work out. In our
example, C is about 48 k and the combined frictional and intrinsic shear
resistance of the compressed zone is about 22.5 k. That leaves an unbalanced
shear force of 40 k 22.5 17.5 k that must be counteracted by some
means.
Among others, the most practical solution is the use of stirrups. We must
place enough stirrups along 0.577(d a) 11.0 in. because efciency dictates that all stirrups that accounted for resisting the unbalanced shear must
intersect the inclined crack with a horizontal projection of tan 30 (d a)
11.0 in. Let us try #3 U-shaped stirrups.
Figure 3.1 Diagrammatic representation of beam under combined shear and bending
forces.
42
Figure 3.2 Free-body diagram showing summation of forces.
Figure 3.3 Equilibrium of the free-body diagram.
Figure 3.4 Horizontal splitting at the level of main reinforcement of a test beam
before nal destruction of bond and anchorage occurred.
Figure 3.5 RC beam shear and bond failure patterns.
3.2
43
Figure 3.6 Shift in the moment diagram by horizontal projection h of the inclined
crack. Reproduced from the authors paper presented at the European Concrete Committee Symposium on Shear, Wiesbaden, Germany, 1963.
Every U-shaped stirrup has a cross-sectional area of 2 0.11 0.22 in.

and a vertical resistance with y 40 ksi 0.22 40 8.8 k. We need
17.5/8.8 1.99 stirrups, say 2.0, to counteract the unbalanced 17.5 vertical
force. Thus we have an ultimate design without the added sophistications and
restrictions imposed by the ACI code, for example, the strength reduction
factor.
Notice the shift of force in the tensile reinforcement. It leaves only 24
11 13 in. development length. No wonder bars failed in the past, pulling
out of the support area of the concrete. The authors ndings mentioned above
were that the stirrups not only resist in bending but also have a horizontal
lever arm of tan 30 (d a)/2 5.5 in. There is a shift in the location of
the horizontal tensile component T.
After our introduction we discuss the design for shear in the ACI regulations.
ACI Regulations
In the course of research on shear the author found that cracks follow the
stress trajectories or patterns of the principal stresses of a homogeneous
material. Reinforced concrete, just as plain concrete, tends to behave like a
homogeneous material until it cracks along the path of principal tensile
stresses. The role of stirrups is to add to the shearing resistance of concrete
in a combined effort to resist Vu. The basic equation is
Vu Vsn Vcn
44
where Vsn is the shearing resistance of the stirrups and Vcn is the shearing
resistance of the concrete. We added the subscript n to indicate nominal resistance, even though this is not included in the ACI 318.
Another key equation is
Vs Avy n
where n d/s
d effective depth
s spacing of stirrups
Thus
Vs Avy
d
s
or
Avy d
Vs
where Vs must be dened from the rst basic equation,

Vu Vs Vc
Vs
Vu Vc
For the above operation we need Vc, which is dened as

bwd2c Vc
where bw is the width of the beam web. There are other, more complicated
expressions for Vc in the ACI 318, such as
Vc 1.9c 2500w
Vud
b d 3.5cbwd
Mu w
The three ACI limits to stirrup spacing are as follows:

1. Calculate
Vc 2bwdc
If Vu 12 Vc or bwdc
Use nominal stirrups like
50bws Avy or s Avy /50bw
If Vu 12 Vc bwdc
Calculate amount of stirrups
s d/2
3.3
DEVELOPMENT LENGTH
45
2. Between
bwdc
and
Vs 4cbwd
stirrup spacing must be less than or equal to

3. If
Vs 4bwdc
spacing is
d/2 .
but Vs 8bwdc the maximum stirrup
d/4
The absolute limit is

Vs Vs,max 8bwdc
Practical Note. Stirrup sizes are normally #3, #4, and #5. Anything larger
is for a megaproject. As mentioned earlier, do not use it unless you are designing a bridge.
The best y for stirrups is 40,000 psi. At this strength, stirrups bend well.
For harder steel, y 60,000 or higher, stirrups tend to be brittle and might
crack around hooks. Then you have development length for the stirrups, which
might fail. Minimum spacing: 3 in.
3.3
DEVELOPMENT LENGTH
By now it should be obvious to the reader that there is a potential danger of

bars pulling out. The force in the bars can be much larger and closer to the
support of simply supported beams than anticipated by a conventional engineering approacha shift in the bending moment diagram.
When the 1963 ACI code made strength design the preferred method of
analysis for bending, there was no ultimate strength methodologylimit
strength as it became known laterto calculate shear strength or development
strength. Both are essential parts of beam design. At that time the provisions
of the code and the technical literature were only good for pure bending, that
is, for analysis of a section subjected to bending. It did not take into consideration the presence of other forces such as shear and compression that are
inevitably combined with the external moment.
In a simply supported beam loaded with a uniformly distributed load there
is only one cross section that receives a pure moment, while mathematically
speaking, there are innite cross sections subjected to both bending and shear.
What methods were then used to evaluate the limit-state effects of these
forces? For shear, a parabolic stress distribution matched with a uniform stress
distribution extending from a working stress evaluated the neutral axis to the
46
centerline of the tensile reinforcement. Still, these stresses where applied to

a nonexisting part of the cross section split by a crack. That is, stresses were
applied over a void and results evaluated on a hypothesis that contradicted
the laws of physics. Evaluation of resistance to bond failure of bars embedded
in concrete was equally not adapted to ultimate strength or strength requirements.
A homogeneous materialreinforced concrete is anything but homogeneouswas assumed subjected to differential tensile forces at the location of
the rebar. This means a continuum of innitely small elements was assumed
capable of forming a continuous chain with the tendency to shear off along
a plain parallel to the axis of the beam. Again, splitting of concrete by numerous diagonal cracks was not considered. These cracks actually reacted
against slippage under the high bearing pressure created by lugs of rebars
that would either deform or pull out.
In 1963 the author presented the unique ndings of research about the
relationship of those hitherto ignored forces that affected the limit-state response and strength of reinforced concrete to the Wiesbaden Symposium on
Shear of the European Concrete Committee. The paper contained the rst
mathematical model and rational method that showed by actual design examples how to combine shear and moment in one ultimate strength operation,
that is, to determine the amount and disposition of rebars for shear and exural resistance. It was also the rst time that it was noted that the stirrups
take part in the resisting moment.
The author also derived mathematically the amount of moment sharing
between stirrups and main tensile reinforcement. He named it shift in the
moment diagram. The concept was quoted by others without crediting the
original source and was eventually incorporated into ACI 318.
Application to Design of Structural Members
Consider a continuous beam with a uniformly distributed load. The following

steps will determine the total shear reinforcement:
1. Divide the length over which shear reinforcement is required into equal
increments; then calculate each cross section separately for the given
static conditions.
2. Provide each zone with the reinforcement required for the worst case
in that zone, that is, the biggest area of steel at the smallest pitch obtained from the two results of the calculations made on the two boundaries of the zone1-1 and 2-2 of zone II in Figure 3.7.
Thus a typical system of shear reinforcement will be as in Figure 3.7, where
heavy lines represent stronger shear reinforcement and thinner lines lighter
3.3
DEVELOPMENT LENGTH
47
Figure 3.7 Typical system of shear reinforcement. Reproduced from the authors
paper presented at the European Concrete Committee Symposium on Shear.
reinforcement. The area of each pair of stirrups is large in zone II because

this coincides with the point of zero bending moment. No shear resistance is
provided by the bending moment and the intensity of the shear force is still
high.
The pitch of the shear reinforcement is quite large, though, because the
inclination of the crack is 45. In zone III the area of stirrups is the smallest.
This is due to the decrease of the shear forces and the increased shear resistance of the compression zone caused by the increasing bending moment.
48
The inclination of the cracks varies with the type of load, which makes it
difcult to give actual gures for the spacing of stirrups. In beams reinforced
with stirrups large secondary cracks tend to form at the nal stages of loading,
which also weakens the structure. It follows that it is more practical to combine stirrups with bent-up bars.
We will now present how the ACI addresses the development length requirement. Given the ACI equation (12-1) with Ktr 0,
ld
3 y
d
40 c [(c Ktr)/db] b
(12-1)
we have
ld
3 y
3 y
db 40 c [(c Ktr)/db] 40 c 1.5/db

We now develop a #7 bottom bar for c 3.0 ksi and y 40 ksi:
ld
3 40000 (1.0)(1.0)(1.0)(1.0)
32 in.
db 40 54.77
1.5/(7/8)
42-in. top bar, 78 in.
That is, the development length ld 32 in. for a 78 -in. diameter bottom bar.
To develop a #8 bottom bar for c 3.0 ksi and y 40 ksi,
ld
3 40000 (1.0)(1.0)(1.0)(1.0)
36.5 36 in.
db 40 54.77
1.5
47-in. top bar, #8
To develop a #6 bottom bar for c 3.0 ksi and y 40 ksi,

ld
(1.0)Bott(1.0)Epox(0.8)(1.0)Ltw
54.77
db
(1.5 0)/0.75
27.38 28 in. for #6 bottom bar
That is, 36-in. top bar, #6.

Redo the above for y 60 ksi (c 3.0 ksi):
#7 Bottom bar
#8 Bottom bar
#6 Bottom bar
48 in.
55 in.
41 in.
62-in. Top bar

71-in. Top bar
54-in. Top bar
3.4
NORTHRIDGE EXPERIENCE
49
For y 60 ksi (c 4.0 ksi):

#7 Bottom bar
#8 Bottom bar
#6 Bottom bar
42 in.
48 in.
36 in.
54-in. Top bar

62-in. Top bar
46-in. Top bar
Building Code Provisions
As a rule, all IBC editions adopted the ACI 318 regulations for concrete
design of structures and components to resist seismic forces with some added
requirements of ASCE 7. In addition, IBC 2006 has modied existing denitions and added the following denitions to ACI 318, Section 21.1:
Design Displacement Total lateral displacement expected for the design
basis earthquake, as specied by Section 12.8.6 of ASCE 7.
Detailed Plain Concrete Structural Wall A wall complying with the requirements of Chapter 22, including 22.6.7.
Ordinary Precast Structural Wall A precast wall that complies with the
requirements of Chapters 118.
Ordinary Reinforced Concrete Structural Wall A cast-in-place wall complying with the requirements of Chapters 118.
Ordinary Structural Plain Concrete Wall A wall complying with the requirements of Chapter 22, excluding 22.6.7.
3.4
NORTHRIDGE EXPERIENCE
Reinforced-concrete parking structures and tilt-up concrete walls were areas

of major concern for the City of Los Angeles after the Northridge earthquake.
The Parking Structure Subcommittee of the Department of Building and
Safety/SEAOSC Task Force investigated 20 heavily damaged parking structures including 8 that had suffered partial or total collapse. The failures had
occurred primarily as result of:
1. Excessive drift in lateral resisting concrete frames or shear walls
2. Lack of ductility in interior, nonlateral resisting concrete frames
3. Lack of strength and proper detailing of diaphragm boundary members
A series of emergency measures followed to prevent similar shortcomings in
the design of future parking garages.
The City of Los Angeles Building Bureau addressed the deciencies found
in tilt-up wall buildings, namely that the wall anchoring system and continuity
ties had performed poorly in over 350 buildings, of which about 200 had
50
partial roof collapses. A number of the structures were of reinforced masonry,

although the damage was not as extensive as for tilt-up panels.
3.5
CASE 1: REINFORCED-CONCRETE PARKING GARAGE
Seismic: High-Seismicity Area

The parking structure analyzed next suffered extensive damage during
the Northridge earthquake. Nevertheless it was not until two years later
that the facility was red-tagged by county ofcials, after it was determined that the damage to the structural system was more severe than
initially observed.
DESCRIPTION OF FACILITY
The structure is an underground four-level, approximately 200,000-ft2

reinforced concrete parking garage in downtown Los Angeles. It contains four square congured levels, A to D. The parking facility was
designed in 1968 under the UBC then in effect. The vertical loads are
resisted by precast, prestressed T beams and poured-in-place reinforced
beams which are framed into concrete columns. It is not a momentresisting frame. The lateral loads are resisted by four shear walls in the
northsouth direction, two shear loads at level D, and three shear walls
from level A to level C in the eastwest direction. Floor slabs are
poured-in-place, post-tensioned concrete.
The oor-to-wall connection is by dowel bars of moderate reinforcement. The concrete diaphragmoors and rampsare connected to the
exterior walls by #4 dowels at 24 in. on center (OC) with 24-in embedment in the slab and the walls. Conventional isolated concrete pad footings and continuous spread footings serve as foundations supporting
reinforced columns and walls. Design bearing pressures were 12,000 psf
dead load (DL) plus live load (LL) allowing 50% overstress for a combination of earthquake and gravity (DL LL). Ramps are built of 7 in.
concrete cast in place on top of precast, prestressed beams resting on
corbels. Concrete shear walls serve as the seismic-resisting elements.
The drive ramps are supported by post-tensioned precast, prestressed
lightweight concrete T beams of approximately 64 ft span, spaced 19 ft
on center. Four-foot-wide pilasters cast monolithically with the concrete
walls support the precast beams on 2-ft-wide, 2.75-ft-deep concrete corbels. The ramp oor is a 7-in.-thick concrete slab post-tensioned in both
directions. Cast-in-place 5-ft 5-ft reinforced concrete girders and a
10-in.-thick slab form the roof of the parking structure. As noted below,
the roof carries about a 5-ft depth of earth ll and landscaping.
3.5
51
Above the concrete parking structure is a street-level landscaped and

paved ag plaza. During the years 19881992 the Metropolitan Transit Authority built an elevator and escalator/stair entrance to the subterranean Civic Center Red Line Station north of the western entrance
to the parking garage stairs. Long-span girders and columns support the
landscaped plaza. A short tunnel leads to a three-bay double-loaded
parking level with the center bay ramping down to three additional
levels.
EARTHQUAKE-CAUSED AND OTHER DAMAGE
The cast-in-place concrete walls, oor, roof slabs, and precast lightweight concrete beams that supported the parking structure ramps
cracked profusely during the January 17, 1994, Northridge earthquake
(Figure 3.8). The damaged areas that caused most concern were the
support ends of the precast T beams and the beams that supported the
fan room, which were shattered by numerous cracks (Figure 3.9).
The cracks showed a limit-state pattern and prompted the closure of the
facility.
Previous earthquakes such as Whittier Narrows and Sierra Madre had
already left a mark in the structure, which worsened under the seismic
impact of Northridge and became unsafe. However, seismic activity was
not the only culprit: Excessive tensile stresses caused by shrinkage in
relatively large, shrinkage-sensitive oor slab areas contributed to the
deterioration of the structural members.
Another source of the damage is corrosion. Rusty reinforcing bars
precipitated the fragmentation of the concrete beams in an outdoor canopy structure. Seepage from the landscaped plaza irrigation had gradually corroded the reinforcements and deteriorated the concrete in a
number of places (Figure 3.10).
Figure 3.8 Seismograph readings of the 1994 Northridge earthquake ground motion,
vertical acceleration taken in Los Angeles Civic Center location.
52
Figure 3.9 Earthquake-caused cracks in cast-in-place concrete beams.
Figure 3.10 Water damage in roof structure due to seepage from the plaza above.
3.5
53
The author was part of the team that inspected the facilities and was
appointed to report on the causes and extent of damage:
Damaged T-4 and supporting corbels at D-3 (half level)
Several T beams and supporting corbels
The bearing area between T beams and corbel is 9 9 81 in.2 of
drypack. T beams are placed at 19.0 ft OC.
Load on T Beam
Service loads:
DL 7-in. concrete slab
Precast beam
LL during earthquake (EQ), estimated
0.088 (19.0) 1.66 k/ft

1.0(2.67)(0.15) 0.40 k/ft
19.0(0.01) 0.19 k/ft
2.25 k/ft
Factored load:
wu 1.4(2.06) 1.7(0.19) 3.21 k/ft, say 3.2 k/ft
The reaction due to wu 3.2 k/ft is
RA RB 21 (63.83)(3.2) 102.35 k
The actual bearing pressure (static) is
p
102.35
1.125 ksi 0.85(4.0) 3.4 ksi
91.0
The actual bearing pressure during the January 17, 1994, earthquake
must have been 3 times larger than the static bearing pressure.
Shearing Resistance of Corbel Supporting T-1 Precast
The available Av for bars crossing the potential crack at the face of the
support is
Av 3(0.6) 1.8 in.2
Vu Avy 0.85(1.8)(60)1.4 128.5 k 102.35 k
However, a minimum of 0.2Vu tensile force due to shrinkage must be
applied (ACI 11.9.3.4) resulting in a loss of steel area
54
An
0.2(128.5)
0.428 in.2
60
The effective reinforcement available for shear friction is determined as

1.8 0.43 1.37 in.2
Vu,corrected(ACI 11.9.3.4) 0.85(1.37)(60)(1.4) 98.0 k 102.35 k applied
Not much extra safety factor in corbel.
OK for static load.
The fact that some of the corbels cracked leads to the conclusion that
the earthquake produced much larger reactions by dynamic impact than
expected from the design static load.
CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE BEAMS SUPPORTING ELECTRICAL

EQUIPMENT ROOM
The rst step was to calculate the load-carrying capacity of the critically
damaged AB-14A beam that provided support to heavy equipment in
the fan room above (Figure 3.11). The structural assembly consists of a
7-in reinforced-concrete oor slab supported by beam AB-64, 18 30
in. spanning northsouth. The entire structural system, in turn, rests on
two beams of approximately 64 ft span: AB-14A on the north side and
AB-16A on the south side. Of the two, AB-14A was the weakest even
though it carried about the same load:
Concrete strength: c 4000 psi
Reinforcing steel: Grade 60, y 60,000 psi
We used ACI and UBC recommendations:
Tributary width for
each AB beam
Weight of 7-in.
concrete slab
Weight of AB-64
beam
Weight of AB-14A
beam
28.84
14.42
2
7/12(150)(14.42)
1.26
1000
23
1
1
(1.5)
(14.42)(150)
0.40
12
15.5 1000
26 35 150
0.95
12 12 1000
2.61
ft
k/ft
k/ft
k/ft
k/ft
3.5
55
Figure 3.11 Cracks in AB-14A beam that supported the fan room and other electrical
equipment on the oor above.
Housekeeping
concrete pads to
mount fans, 4 in.
high, acting on
only half of the
beam span at B
2(10 6)(0.33)(150) 1
0.56 k/ft
1000
32
Converting the 0.56 k/ft into a uniformly distributed load over the span
yields
wpad
0.56(32.0 ft)
0.28 k/ft
64.0 ft
The factored dead load is

wD 1.4(2.61 0.28 0.05 (metal studs, lath, and plaster)
4.116 k/ft
say 4.12 k/ft
The shearing resistance of the beam at the support is determined as

follows:
56
#4 stirrups @ 6 in. OC for 6 ft, 0 in.

Vc
24000(26)(42 5.4)
120.37 k
1000
Vs
(0.4)(60)36.6
146.40 k
266.77 k
The shearing resistance at the support (span 63.83 ft) is

0.85(266.77) 226.75 k
The equipment only occupies the west side of BM (from the centerline
to B).
The weight of the equipment as obtained from the architects report
is as follows:
Fans
5.3 k each
Duct work
350 lb 130 90/100 285 lb 0.3 k each Factored loads
5.6 k each
1.7 5.6 9.52 k
Electric transformer 4.0 k
1.7(4.0) 6.8 k 6.80 k
Floor mounted 5-kV load interruptor
switch 1.35 k
1.7(1.35) 2.3 k 2.30 k
Floor-mounted switchboard 1.20 k
1.7(1.20) 2.00 k 2.0 k
VBequip.
2.3(38.83) 6.8(43.25) 2.0(43.83) 9.52(51.83 57.83)

63.83
23.73 k
VBDequip.
63.83
(4.12) 23.73 155 k
2
Reaction of factored DL at B
DL equipment 75 psf
LL (UBC Table 23-A, item 29, light)
The factored live load is
3.5
57
wL 0.075 (28.84/2)(1.7) 1.84 k/ft

The maximum shear at B due to wD wequip wL is
VBmax (4.12 1.84) 63.83/2 23.73 214 k 226.75
Original shear resistance OK for static load.
The AB-14A beam that supported the fan room and equipment on
the oor above had pulled away from the concrete pilaster support at
B5. A wide crack approximately 85% of the entire height and the full
width of the beam separated the beam from the pilaster. Only four #11
top reinforcement held the beam in shear friction (Figures 3.12 and
3.13). There was widespread moisture throughout the structure and rusting of rebars in the two major beams AB-14A and AB-16A. To determine the shear friction resistance of AB-14A we assumed that 50% of
the cross section was impaired by rust and 50% of the reinforcement
area was still providing some resistance.
c 4000 psi, grade 60
Av (0.50)(4)(1.56) 3.12 in.2
From the shear friction equation UBC (11.26)
Vn Avy 3.12(60)(1.0) 187.2 k 214 k
1.4,
1.0 normal weight
factored reaction of equipment DL LL.

where
1.4 1.4(I) for monolithically cast stone concrete.
Therefore there is not enough resistance based on the

embedment along the top of the beam.
Actual Bond Provided for Hook of #11 Bars into B4
Required:
Lnb
1200db
26.75 in.
4000
58
Figure 3.12 Close-up of earthquake-caused cracks in RC beams. One of the beams

separated from the concrete pilaster support and was held in friction by four #11
reinforcement.
Provided: 17 in. (per original engineering drawings, March 1968).

17 in. 26.75 in. This is not enough.
The resistance of the hook end of the bars is
3.5
59
Figure 3.13 AB-14A beam and pilaster conguration.
17/26.75 (187.2) 119.0 k
GOVERNS
just slightly over the unfactored maximum support shear of its own
weight and equipment load (110.7 k).
There is not enough safety in shear.
Precast Lightweight Concrete Beam, 63.83-ft Span
We rst determined the maximum factored shear and the shearing capacity of the beam at supports:
c 4000 psi
Beams 19.0 ft apart
y 60,000 psi
Two bottom bars are available for shear friction. Pretensioned tendons
would not help in shear friction since they do not extend to provide
support and do not build up adequate bond and compressive strength
near the end.
The factored DL LL on the beam is as follows:
19-ft-wide, 7-in.-thick lightweight
concrete slab
Weight of 12 in. 2.5 ft lightweight
concrete beam
(7/12)0.11(19.0) 1.22 k/ft

(1.0)2.5(0.11) 0.275 k/ft
1.495 k/ft
wD 1.495 1.4 2.10 k/ft

The live load using UBC is determined as follows:
60
R 23.1 1
D
1.495
23.1 1
59.45%
L
19(0.05)
GOVERNS
or
R r(A 150)
19.0
150 0.08 85%
63.83
Reduction formulas
wL
0.5945(50) 19.0
0.5648 k/ft
1000
wL,ult 0.96 k/ft
Factored live load
wDu wLu 2.10 0.96 3.06 k/ft

The maximum factored shear at B (Figure 3.14) is
3.06(63.83/2 2.7) 90.0 k applied static shear
We then apply UBC shear friction formula (11-27) assuming a 20%
failure plane with the vertical.
Contribution of the two #7 horizontal reinforcements:
Vn Avy [(1.4 sin 1) cos 1]
2(0.6)60[1.4(0.85) 0.34] 33.12 k
Contribution of #4 at 9-in.-OC vertical stirrups:

Vn,stirrups 3(2)(0.2)(60)(1.19 0.34 0.94) 96.8 k
Figure 3.14
3.5
61
Combined shear resistance:

Vu Vn 0.85(33.12 96.8) 110.4 k 90.0 k
or 13% over
OK
Corbel Supporting T-1 Precast Beam
Now we calculate the shearing resistance of the corbel. The available

Av for bars crossing the potential crack at the face of the support is
Av 3(0.6) 1.81 in.2
Vu Avy 0.85(1.8)(60)1.4 128.5 k 102.35 k
However, a minimum of 0.2Vu tensile force due to shrinkage must be
applied (ACI 11.9.34), resulting in a loss in steel area:
An
0.2(128.5)
0.428 in.2
60
The effective reinforcement available for shear friction is determined as

1.8 0.43 1.37 in.2
Vu,corrected (ACI) 0.85(1.37)(60)(1.4) 98.0 k 102.35 k applied
No signicant extra safety in corbel.
OK for static load.
The fact that some of the corbels cracked leads to the conclusion that
the dynamic impact of the earthquake produced much larger reactions
than estimated by purely static analysis.
CAUSES OF FAILURE OF STRUCTURAL SYSTEMS
(a) General Numerous cracks were observed on cast-in-place concrete walls, oor and roof slabs, prestressed, precast lightweight
concrete T beams supporting the parking structure oors and
ramps, and the cast-in-place normal-weight concrete beams.
Some of the damage suffered by the structural elements during
the Northridge earthquake was due to the impact of earlier earth-
62
quakes; other causes were choice of materials and insufcient

protection to prevent corrosion of reinforcing elements.
(b) Fan Room Structure, Beam AB-14A Only four #11 top bars
were opposing shear failure at the support in lieu of the previously solid concrete section. The embedment of the four top bars
into the wall was short, 17 in. versus 26.75 in. as required by the
UBC current at the time. Therefore the shearing resistance was
only (17/26.5) 187.2 119 k versus the unfactored shear of its
own weight and equipment weight of 110.7 k. Thus the beam
was left without safety factors.
(c) Precast, Prestressed Lightweight Concrete Beams Many of the
T beams in the parking structure displayed the pattern of ultimate
limit state, that is, formation of a plastic mechanism when the
reinforcement yields to form plastic hinges at enough sections to
make the structure unstable.1,2 Cracks displayed a shear failure
pattern as would be caused by excessive vertical and horizontal
forces that occur during earthquakes. The lightweight aggregate,
lacking the strength of normal-weight aggregate, exacerbated the
cracks. Lightweight concrete exhibited weak performance in
other structures impacted by the Northridge earthquake, such as
the Champagne Towers discussed in Chapter 1 of this book.
(d) Originally cast as a monolithic mass, the concrete in the prestressed, precast T beams was fragmented into smaller segments
held together by reinforcement, stirrups, and pretensioned tendons that were not protected by sleeves or sheathing (see Figure
3.15).
3.6
CASE 2: REINFORCED-CONCRETE RETAINING WALL SYSTEM
Seismic: Moderate-Seismicity Area
PROJECT DESCRIPTION
The system of retaining walls designed for this project was on sloping
ground at the back of the property. (See Figures 3.17 and 3.18). The
steep hill and nature of the soil required an extensive soil investigation
on which we based our calculations.
Soil prole SC. Allowable bearing pressure was 2000 psf per geotechnical exploration and report. The test pits at the site encountered
dense sand with gravels and a few boulders below the existing ground
surface. The soils at the site were considered suitable for use as struc-
3.6
63
Figure 3.15 A fragment of lightweight concrete that broke off a precast T beam and
landed on the parking level below about two weeks after the Northridge earthquake.
This was a typical occurrence in the process of deterioration that followed the earthquake.
tural backll for the proposed retaining wall system if larger material
were screened out.
The design parameters followed the recommendations contained in
the geotechnical report, which in this case prevailed over seismic considerations:
(a) Soil pressure for cantilevered retaining walls 40 pcf
(b) Coefcient of lateral pressure Ka: 0.4
(c) Allowable bearing pressure 2000 psf
CASE 1
12.0 ft Maximum Height of Earth Retained
A 50-psf surcharge with a 30% load reduction will be included.
64
He
0.04 12.02
2.88 k 5.66
2
16.3 k-ft
HS 0.4(0.7)(0.05)(12.0) 0.17 k
Mo 16.30 k-ft 0.17
12.0
1.66
2
17.6 k-ft
MR Ww(4.4) W(3.75) We(6.25)

2.1(4.4) 1.87(3.75) 3.6(6.25)
38.75 k-ft
FS 38.75 / 17.6 2.20
Figure 3.16
OK
The location of the resultant of the vertical forces affected by lateral

earth pressure is
38.75 17.60
2.80 from the toe
7.57
The maximum toe pressure is
7.57 23 2.80 1.80 ksf 2.0 ksft
OK
Design against Sliding
H He HS 3.05 k
The passive resistance is 2.0(0.3) 6.33 0.4 3.13 k 3.05; nevertheless, a 16-in.-wide, 1.0-ft-deep keel will be provided under the stem
wall to enhance resistance against sliding.
Design of 16-in.-Thick RC Stem Wall
6.0-ft high from top of footing:

Mu,max 1.6 [13 (2.88 12.0) 21 (0.17 12.0)] 20.00 k-ft
240 k-in.
3.6
65
Figure 3.17 Retaining wall range 10 ft h 12 ft. Scale: 12 in. to ft.
Ast
240
0.37 in.2 0.377 in.2
0.9 0.88 13.62 60
Provided by #6 @ 14 in. OC vertical.
Design of 12-in. RC Stem Wall
Attached to top of 16-in. stem wall:

Mu,max 1.6[16 (0.04 6.03) 12 (0.014 6.02)]
2.70 k-ft 32.5 k-in.
66
Figure 3.18 Retaining wall range 8 ft h 10 ft. Scale: 12 in to ft.
Ast
32.5
0.08 in.2 0.17 in.2
0.9 0.8 9.625 60
Provided by #4 @ 14 in. OC.
CASE 2
10.0 ft. maximum height of earth retained a 21 slope. The equivalent

uid pressure is 60 pcf:
H 12 (0.06 10.02) 3.0 k (3.33 1.5) 14.49 k-ft
REFERENCES
67
Because both overturning and horizontal force are almost identical to

case 1, the overall concrete dimensions for case 2 will remain the same
except footing 1 width at 7.0 ft.
Design of 16-in. RC Stem Wall
Mu,max 1.6[16 (0.06 10.03) 21 (0.014 10.02)

17.12 k-ft 205 k-in.
Ast
205
0.292 in.2 0.293 in.2
9 0.95 13.69 60
OK.
REFERENCES
1. McCormac, J. C. 1993. Design of Reinforced Concrete, 3rd ed. HarperCollins. New
York.
2. Erdey, C. K. 1963. Ultimate Resistance of Reinforced Concrete Beams Subjected
to Shear and Bending. Paper presented at the European Concrete Committee Symposium on Shear, Wiesbaden.
CHAPTER 4
4.1
DESIGN OF SMRF STRUCTURE: LRFD METHOD
Knowledge of the design principles and methodology established by 1997

UBC makes it a relatively easy transition to the IBCs. The seismic design
procedure discussed in this chapter will demonstrate seismic design following
the basic 1997 UBC requirements. It guides the reader through the full design
of an actual structure originally engineered to the 1994 UBC provisions and
redesigned in compliance with the stringent seismic requirements of the 1997
UBC.
The 2000 IBC and its successive editions were issued to replace the three
existing model codes: the National Building Code (NBC), Standard Building
Code, and UBC. Under the IBC the entire country is considered subjected to
varied degrees of seismicity. Apart from setting up earthquake forces from
seismic maps, the IBC follows the same seismic design philosophy and methodology set forth by 1997 UBC.
One of the objectives of this chapter is to show the impact on seismic
design philosophy and methodology brought forth by the Northridge experience reected in 1997 UBC. The design procedure presented here is not
merely an exercise in structural analysis; we also endeavor to provide interpretation and explanation of the complex, prescriptive provisions of 1997
UBC.
It is hoped that this chapter will be useful to civil and structural engineers
not yet exposed to seismic design as well as to those familiar with earthquake
regulations. It offers the double benet of a step-by-step seismic design as
well as guiding the reader through the basics of the Load and Resistance
68

4.2
DESIGN STEPS
69
Factor Design (LRFD). A method still new to many design professionals,

LRFD is considered the preferred design alternative by the steel industry.
While every effort has been made to show detailed analysis and design,
some steps of standard textbook applicationsuch as distribution of torsional
story shearhave been deliberately omitted to help the reader concentrate on
seismic design procedures rather than repetitive textbook solutions.
4.2
DESIGN STEPS
Before starting the seismic design establish a methodology and a plan consisting of six major steps:
1. Study the 1997 UBC provisions thoroughly to acquaint yourself with
the new regulations and set up the basis for your design. You might
nd it useful to keep a log of notes.
2. Determine external loads, which are of three types:
Gravity
Earthquake
Wind
Special provisions in CHAP. 22, DIV. IV, address specic seismic design and overstrength requirements that call for added strength for connections and specic structural elements.
Advice. Prepare two independent sets of load cases that correspond
to (a) CHAP. 16, DIV. I, formulas (12-1)(12-6), for the general design
and (b) CHAP. 22, DIV IV, formulas (3-1)(3-8) and (6-1) and (6-2)
for the detailed systems design requirements mandated by Section 1633.
3. Before starting the analysis check the provisions of the value in (303), a function of rmax, to avoid member overstress:
2
20
rmax AB
If this step is done too late and the value of is too high, you will have
to thoroughly revise your structural layout and may have wasted considerable effort.
4. Before you do the structural analysis, determine lateral displacements
and compare these with the 1997 UBC story-drift limitations (interstory
drift, SEAOC Blue Book, September 1999, seventh edition). They are
very restrictive; if not checked, your previous work may have been
wasted because some of the structural members selected may not t the
story-drift criteria.
70
5. Establish member sizes.

6. Do a separate structural design for specic elements and connections to
comply with CHAP. 22, DIV. IV.
Note. Steps 5 and 6 interact and must be done simultaneously.
4.3
PROJECT DESCRIPTION: FOUR-STORY OFFICE BUILDING
The structure is a four-story ofce building in UBC seismic zone 4. It was

designed by the 1994 UBC regulations. Our task is to redesign it in accordance with the 1997 UBC provisions. Our exercise will be enlightening, as it
will show the basic differences between the 1994 and 1997 designs. You will
notice major changes in structural layout and member sizes.
4.4
PROJECT LAYOUT AND TYPICAL SMRF PER UBC 1994
Figure 4.1 shows the typical oor layout. Figure 4.2 is a typical SMRF as it
was designed for the 1994 project. Our task will be as follows:
Figure 4.1 Typical oor layout of four-story SMRF structure.
4.5
1994 DESIGN
71
Figure 4.2 Special moment-resisting frame, UBC 1994 regulations.
(a) Go through the plans and a new design process following the provisions of UBC 1997.
(b) Analyze the structure for gravity loads (DL, LL), earthquake loads,
and wind loads.
(c) Carry out the engineering design on selected structural members and
connections as though the building had not yet been constructed.
4.5
1994 DESIGN
Four identical SMRFs were provided to resist lateral forceswind and earthquakein the northsouth direction. Figure 4.2 shows one of the identical
frames. The SMRFs act in conjunction with the gravity force supporting structural steel elementsgirders, beams, columnsnot shown in the gure for
simplication. We will carry out our design on frame 1.
72
4.6
WIND ANALYSIS: 1997 UBC, CHAPTER 16, DIV III
The 1997 UBC states:

Design wind pressures for buildings and structures and elements therein shall
be determined for any height in accordance with the following formula
p Ce Cq qs Iw
(20-1)
where
Ce height, exposure, and gust factor coefcient
Cq pressure coefcient subject to function, geometry,
and location of structure or element
qs basic wind pressure subject to basic wind speed
Iw importance factor subject to occupancy or function
of building
Table 16-G
Table 16-H
Table 16-F
Table 16-K
The 1997 UBC gives two options for determining wind loads:
Method 1: Normal-Force Method (1621.2) The wind pressure is applied
to all surfaces separately, that is, walls on the windward side, leeward
side, roof, projecting elements, and so on. The sum of the effects determines the overall effect on the structure such as overturning moment
and base shear. The advantages and disadvantages of this method are as
follows:
Advantages: It is versatile and can be applied to structures of complex
geometry, architectural projections, and irregularities. The 1997 UBC
establishes no height or other limitations for its use and states that it
may be used for any structure.
Disadvantages: It is more laborious; the information is collected element by element.
Method 2: Projected-Area Method (1621.3) Wind pressures are assumed
to act on the silhouette or image projected on a vertical surface, almost
like designing a two-dimensional object; however, one must not forget
the vertical loadoften suction on the roof as a whole. The advantages
and disadvantages of this method are as follows:
Advantages: It is fast and easy to use for a regular building such as a
box type and it is not necessary to collect wind pressures element by
element or projection by projection.
Disadvantages: It can be used only up to 200 ft in height; usage for
gabled rigid frames is not allowed.
4.7
EXAMPLE: WIND ANALYSIS OF FOUR-STORY BUILDING
73
Once you have determined which method to use, the pressure coefcient Cq
can be read from Table 16-H. The coefcient Ce reects to what extent the
structure is exposed to wind in relation to its environment:
Exposure D represents the most severe exposure, for instance, a structure
close to the shoreline facing large masses of water, even a lake extending
over a mile in front of the exposed building.
Exposure B means the structure is protected by its surroundings in the
form of a forest or other structure for at least 1 mile.
Caution. Beware of wind tunnel effect in large towns where other buildings, rather than sheltering your project, channel the wind toward it with great
amplication. Several cooling towers in England collapsed under increased
wind velocities and pressure caused by surrounding cooling towers that created a veritable wind tunnel.
Exposure C represents an intermediate, average exposure condition such
as at and open terrain extending one-half mile or more from the building site.
Basic wind pressure qs is measured at a standard 33-ft height and a function
of wind velocities measured in the specic geographical region where the
project is located. Figure 16-1 provides minimum basic wind speeds in miles
per hour on page 2-36 of the 1997 UBC.
Note. Check with the building ofcials about local conditions; some areas
are notorious for catching high winds and, because of the microclimate effect,
you might have to adjust your gures.
Consider the occupancy or function-dependent importance factor Iw. From
the public point of view other projects may be more important than yours;
for instance, re and police stations, hospitals, and emergency units that need
a higher factor of safety have a wind importance factor Iw of 1.15. Hazardous
facilities housing toxic or explosive materials also have a wind importance
factor Iw of 1.15. Obviously we do not want more damage added to the one
caused by wind or earthquake.
The example that follows illustrates how the 1997 UBC regulations such
as wind pressure and force computations are applied to the project.
4.7
EXAMPLE: WIND ANALYSIS OF FOUR-STORY BUILDING
Evaluate the wind pressure coefcients and horizontal forces acting in the
northsouth direction for the rst and top stories of the project. Use 1997
UBC method 2.
74
Figure 4.2 shows the dimensions of the building.

Basic wind speed 70 mph, exposure C
Maximum building height h 54 ft
From Table 16-F, qs 12.6 psf
First story: height range 013.5 ft.
From Table 16-G for a maximum height 15 ft
From Table 16-H and noting that structural height h 40 ft
From Table 16-K, occupancy category 4
Ce 1.06
Cq 1.4
Iw 1.0
Hint. To nd Iw, use the process of elimination. If your project does not
seem to t any of the above categories go down the lines; it might be under
All structures . . . not listed in Category 1, 2 or 3. The wind pressure is
determined as
p CeCqqs Iw
(1.06)(1.4)(12.6)(1.0) 18.7 psf
Uppermost story: height range 40.554.0 ft.

From Table 16-G and interpolating for the average height of 47.25 ft:
Ce 1.310 0.043 1.353
Cq 1.4
(unchanged)
Iw 1.0
(unchanged)
p (1.353)(1.4)(12.6)(1.0) 23.9 psf

Now we complete our wind pressure evaluation for the rest of the building.
The lateral wind pressure at the second story is given as
p (1.13)(1.4)(12.6)(1.0) 20.0 psf
and the lateral wind pressure for the third story as
p (1.26)(1.4)(12.6)(1.0) 22.2 psf
Figure 4.3 shows the lateral wind pressure distribution per unit width of wall.
Figure 4.4 shows the northsouth lateral wind pressure distribution for the
entire structure.
4.8
SEISMIC ZONES 3 AND 4
75
Figure 4.3 Wind design pressures (psf).
The total base shear in the northsouth direction is

V 13.5(2318 2154 1940 1814) 111 kips 280 kips
Here Eh /1.4 280 kips is the base shear for the earthquake.
Earthquake design forces govern.
4.8
SEISMIC ZONES 3 AND 4
Before we do the seismic force analysis it is appropriate to point out some

of the basic differences and similarities between seismic zones 3 and 4, in
Figure 4.4 Northsouth wind pressure forces (lb / ft) acting on the building.
76
general and in particular, related to moment-resisting frames. Earthquake design forces are determined from the 1997 UBC Tables 16-I through 16-U,
including Tables 16-Q and 16-R, which provide the seismic coefcients Ca
and Cv, respectively, a function of soil type and seismic zone.
Differences
The major difference is that, while for seismic zone 4 near-source factors Na
and Nv must be used in conjunction with the values in the tables, Na and Nv
do not apply to zone 3. Therefore the values of Ca and Cv can be obtained
from the tables and used for evaluation of the base shear in formulas (30-4)
(30-7).
Similarities
In steel design, UBC 1997 allows you the option of using either the Special
Moment Resisting Frame (SMRF) or the ordinary moment-resisting frame
(OMRF) for both zones 3 and 4, but with different R values. The SMRF
design will enjoy a more favorable R value of 8.5 while the OMRF will be
penalized by a less favorable R 4.5, which no doubt will result in a more
costly design.
When the SMRF is opted for the special seismic provisions, the design
must follow the requirements of both CHAP. 16 and CHAP. 22, Detailed
Systems Design Requirements. Among the seismic provisions, operators
such as and 0 for both seismic zones are meant to improve performance
and ensure a sound structural design.
4.9
EARTHQUAKE ANALYSIS OF FOUR-STORY OFFICE BUILDING
The 1997 Design Project Data
Total building height

Total building weight
Seismic zone
Seismic source type
Soil type
54.0 ft
3025 kips
4
A (8 km from source)
Very dense, per geotechnical report
The weight of the structure was based on the following:
Floor/roof area: 11,350 ft2

Roof deck: 56 psf
412 -in. lightweight concrete on metal sheeting, including roong, suspended ceiling, ducts and pipes, curtain walls, and steel framing.
4.9
77
EARTHQUAKE ANALYSIS OF FOUR-STORY OFFICE BUILDING
Weight of roof: 640 kips

Floor deck: 70 psf
412 -in. lightweight concrete on metal sheeting, including ooring, ducts
and pipes, suspended ceiling, curtain walls, built-in partitions, and
steel framing.
Weight of oor: 795 kips

Other parameters are:
Z 0.4
Soil type SC
Nv 1.4 (interpolated)
Cv 0.56Nv 0.56(1.4) 0.784
Na 1.1 (interpolated)
Ca 0.4Na 0.4(1.1) 0.44
R 8.5
I 1.0
Ct 0.035
T Ct (hn)3 / 4 0.035(54)3 / 4 0.697 s 0.70 s
CvI)
0.784 1.0
V
W
3025 400 kips
RT
(8.5 0.7)
R EQ response modification coefficient
Table 16-I
Table 16-J
Table 16-T
Table 16-R
Table 16-S
Table 16-Q
Table 16-N
Table 16-K
Section 1630.2.2
Formula (30-8)
Formula (30-4)
DIV. IV 2-11
Note that the total design base shear need not exceed
V
2.5Ca I
W
R
2.5 0.44 1.0

3025 392 kips*
8.5
GOVERNS
or be less than
V 0.11CaIW
(30-6)
0.11 0.44 1.0 3025 146.4 kips
0.8ZNvI
W
R
(30-7)
0.8 0.4 1.4 1.0

3025 160 kips
8.5
* V 392 kips is at strength level.
78
Lateral Force Distribution
The northsouth lateral force distribution at strength level is determined as
F
n
V Ft
(30-13)
i1
Ft 0
for T 0.7
(1630.5)
Fx
(V Ft)wx hx
n
i1 wihi
F5
F4
392 795 40.5

127.5 kips
640 54 795(40.5 27.0 13.5)
F3
392 795 27
85 kips
640 54 795(40.5 27.0 13.5)
F2
392 795 13.5

42.5 kips
640 54 795(40.5 27.0 13.5)
(30-15)
(392 0)640 54
136.9 kips
640 54 795(40.5 27.0 13.5)
Figures 4.5 and 4.6 show the northsouth lateral force distribution for the
building and one of the frames.
Figure 4.5 Northsouth strength-level earthquake forces acting on building, by 1997

UBC.
4.10
DESIGN FOR EARTHQUAKE
79
Figure 4.6 Northsouth strength-level forces acting on SMRF 1, by 1997 UBC.
The preceding results will now be used for the nal design.
Wind will not be considered.
4.10
Table 4.1 summarizes the northsouth lateral earthquake forces acting on the
building and frame 1. The values represent the largest horizontal load acting
on an individual frame SMRF 1 based on:
(a) Load sharing of frames at oor level
(b) Torsional effect
Before going any further we will apply the reliability/redundancy factor
test as required by the 1997 UBC (1630.1) to ensure that there are sufcient
TABLE 4.1 Lateral Earthquake Force Fi Acting on Building and Frame 1a

Acting on Frame 1
Level
Acting on
Building
4 frames / oor
6 frames / oor
5
4
3
2
137.0
127.5
85.0
42.5
37.8
35.2
23.4
11.7
25.2
23.4
15.6
7.8
Values include torsion as well as redundancy factor 1.0.
80
elements to resist the lateral component of the earthquake and that none of
the elements carries an unjustiably large portion of the total load:
20
Check 2
rmax AB
(30-3)
The design story shear at the rst level is

Fi (137 127.5 85 42.5) 392 kips
There is about 10.0 kips of additional shear due to earthquake-caused torsion

acting on frame 1* that makes this frame the most heavily loaded single
element in the four-SMRF structural system.
The maximum element-story shear carried by frame 1 evaluated at the rst
level (Table 4.1) including torsional shear is
S
392
10.0* 108 kips
4
The maximum element-story shear ratio is

rmax
108
0.2757
392
20
2
2 0.68 1.32 1.25
0.183711,350
Allowed (1630.1.1)
Because 1997 UBC does not allow larger than 1.25 for SMRFs, we add
one more frame to each side, increasing the total number of frames to six per
oor in the northsouth direction. Figure 4.7 shows the new 1997 layout.
Clearly the 1997 UBC provision is to ensure better load sharing among
the earthquake (Eh) resisting elements by providing more redundancies and
more elements against the seismic load. Indirectly, but effectively, the provision makes you reect on the soundness of the initial structural scheme to
avoid that certain structural elements carry an unduly large share of the total
horizontal earthquake load.
* 1997 UBC, Section 1630.7, Horizontal Torsional Moments: Provisions shall be made for
increased shears resulting from horizontal torsion where diaphragms are not exible. The most
severe load combinations for each element shall be considered for design.
4.10
81
Figure 4.7 Revised structural layout. Two SMRFs added to meet reliability criteria
(30-3), 1997 UBC.
The test is naturally carried out oor by oor in computing ri. The largest
value of ri, rmax, represents the worst scenario and will be the controlling
factor.
Unlike previous editions, the 1997 UBC urges you to review your initial
disposition of structural elements and, if proved inadequate, to go back to the
drawing board and come up with a new scheme before going any further with
detailed design.
Note. Keep track of your strategy in countering EQ forces at the very early
stage of your design.
Once the new structural scheme has been worked out, in our case by increasing the number of frames, we need to compute new values for rmax and
. The maximum element-story shear dened by 1630.1.1 is the seismic design shear at the most heavily loaded single frame subjected to maximum
horizontal and torsional seismic forces at the rst level (Table 4.1 in this text):
82
S 25.2 23.4 15.6 7.8 72.0 kips

rmax
72.0
0.1837
392
20
2
0.977 1.0
0.183711,350
Because 1997 UBC does not allow 1.0, we will use 1.0 for our
computation.
You will notice a major change in design philosophy. The 1997 UBC calls
for a more robust design to resist earthquakes, which is reected in the conguration and disposition of the major lateral-force-resisting system. Four
SMRFs in the northsouth direction would have satised the requirements of
the 1994 edition.
Figure 4.7 shows the new northsouth lateral force distribution on frame
1 for the six-SMRF-per-oor arrangement. In addition, the following gravity
loads are superimposed on the frame beams:
Dead Load*,
Uniformly distributed roof load acting on a tributary width of 8.0 ft
Uniformly distributed oor load acting on a tributary width of 8.0 ft
Roof: wR 550 lb/ft 0.55 k/ft
Floor: wF 594 lb/ft 0.60 k/ft
Live Load
20-psf roof (Table 16-C)
50-psf ofce use (Table 16-A)
Roof: wLr Lr tributary width
wLr 20 8.0 160 lb/ft 0.16 k/ft
Floor: wL L tributary width
wL 50 8.0 400 lb/ft 0.40 k/ft
Two sets of load combinations for the computer analysis were prepared with
the above data:
* The 0.5-ft strip on the roof and oor will not receive a live load because it is occupied by
parapet and curtain walls, respectively.
Note that wR and wF include the weight of the heating, ventilation, and air-conditioning system
(HVAC).
4.10
83
1. For the LRFD design (1612.2) using strength-level factored loads

2. For the detailed systems design requirements (1633) and the maximum
inelastic response displacements (1630.9) applying strength-level factored loads (1612.2) amplied by factors such as 0.7R (Section
1630.9.2) and 0.4R (Section 6.1, CHAP. 22, DIV. IV), respectively
The next major step before preparing the detailed component design is to
comply with the 1997 UBC story-drift limitation (1630.9 and 1630.10) of the
displacement of the structure caused by the horizontal vector components of
the earthquake (Eh) in an effort to prevent buildup of large internal stresses
and strain caused by excessive deformation.
What is involved in the analysis of the maximum story-drift control, called
interstory drift in the 1999 edition of the SEAOC Blue Book? First, the story
drift, termed maximum inelastic response displacement (1630.9.2), is evaluated at strength level; that is, the deformations S are calculated under limitstate or strength-level earthquake forces. The drift so obtained is further
magnied by a factor of 0.7R, thus further increasing it to more than eight
times larger than the elastic deformation obtained by a theoretical allowable
stress design analysis using ASD load combinations (12-7)(12-11), CHAP.
16, Section 1612.3.1. A very strong restriction indeed which calls for a comparatively more robust design. (See Figures 4.7 and 4.8.)
The story-drift check (1630.9 and 1630.10) is an overall stiffness review
for the entire structure; it involves all structural elements affecting the deformation characteristics of the lateral-force-resisting system. It would be pointless to rene the design of components if the entire system fails the test.
For the initial drift analysiscomputer analysis part IIwe rst applied
sectional properties of the 1994 steel frame prototype (Figure 4.2) to the sixframe system. The test failed. The computer analysis part II, Drift Evaluation, shows excessive rst-oor story-drift of
M 0.7RS
M 0.380 ft 4.56 in.
(30-17)
larger than allowable 4.05 in.
allowable 0.025 story height 4.05 in.
for a fundamental period of less than 0.7 s (1997 UBC, Section 1630.10.2).
The fundamental period of the structure was found to be 0.697 s.
Based on the foregoing, new input data were generated. The new input
data contained two types of major changes: rst-oor beam and column size
increase and reduction of member size at upper levels. The most signicant
modications to the inherited 1994 prototype frame are discussed below.
84
Figure 4.8 Revised frame to meet reliability criteria, 1997 UBC.
4.11
SIGNIFICANT CHANGES IN 1997 DESIGN
Beam and Column Size Increase
First- and second-story columns increased from W14 193 to W14 257
and second-oor beam increased from W36 135 to W36 160 to t the
1997 UBC stringent drift control requirements. By now it is obvious that the
1997 UBC story-drift control will not let you go any further with a detailed
designeven if it meets the strength requirementsunless you have complied with the story-drift limitations and the reliability/redundancy factor ()
test.
Reduction of Member Size at Upper Levels
It became imperative to economize on member sizes inherited from the 1994

design. In carrying out this second task, we had to meet two objectives:
4.11
SIGNIFICANT CHANGES IN 1997 DESIGN
85
(a) Comply with the 1997 UBC story-drift control at all stories. This meant
to curb reduction in member sizes so as not to violate 1630.9 and
1630.10. The values in Table 4.2 (in Section 4.27 on column design)
verify that the 1997 UBC provisions for maximum allowable story drift
(1630.9 and 1630.10) were satised.
(b) Ensure that the revised member sizes meet the AISC and UBC requirements. AISC Specication Load and Resistance Factor Design, (second edition) and UBC Detailed Systems Design Requirements (1633
and CHAP. 22, DIV. IV).
With the second upgrading the structure is ready for nal analysis and design.
The rst upgrading, as described earlier, occurred when a pair of frames were
added to each oor level.
Figures 4.9(a) and (b) show the new mathematical model and applied loads
(1612.2). A partial xity representing about 15% of exural member stiffness
was applied to column joints 1 and 2 to represent real-life condition.
A reduced modulus E 26,000 ksi was used taking into account results
of cyclic tests that showed pinched hysteresis loops and implied reduction of
E values. The modulus of elasticity for steel was reduced from 29,000 to
26,000 ksi to reect softening of the metal under the effect of hysteresis
caused by earthquake cyclic loading. A more accurate value of the reduced
Figure 4.9 (a) Mathematical model showing nal member sizes. Member numbers
are circled. (b) Seismic design loads.
86
E could be the subject of research. Obviously a revised E is a complex issue;

for instance, it is a function of the softening of the metal as well as a function
of bolt slippage and damage to beam-to-column connection.
All of these factors had an overall effect in reducing the lateral stiffness
of the moment frame. By reducing the E value, we attempted to demonstrate
that a simplied corrected E value can be utilized in the elastic time-history
analysis performed (UBC 1631.6.2). A number of nonlinear time-history analysis computer programs are available (UBC 1631.6.3); however, it is doubtful
that all of the complexities involved are taken into account, specically the
deterioration of the moment connection itself due to earthquake-imposed cyclic loading.
The computer analysis for LRFD strength-level design is by 1612.2, CHAP.
22, DIV. IV, and the story-drift analysis per 1630.9.2.
4.12
1997 VERSUS 1994 DESIGN
A comparison between the two designs is enlightening. Remember that in the

1997 UBC standards the 1994 four-frame scheme was deemed inadequate
because it did not have enough structural elements to counter earthquake
forces (the , rmax control).
Responding to the 1997 UBC warning about insufcient system redundancy, we were forced to provide more resisting structural elements and upgrade the structural system to a six-frame scheme, keeping the original
structural elements of the 1994 design in place. In doing so we expected that
the structure would pass the second testthe 1997 UBC maximum storydrift limitation test (1630.9 and 1630.10).
However, despite a major change in structural layout complying with the
restriction imposed by the reliability/redundancy factor , the rst-story drift
was still too large for the 1997 UBC. Thus we were left with no alternative
but to increase both beam and column sizes for the rst story.
The , rmax restrictionintended to prevent member overstressand the
maximum story-drift provision make the 1997 UBC far more conservative
than earlier editions, a marked departure from previous design philosophy.
Before going into the actual design it is appropriate to review the 1997
UBC load combination provisions applicable to LRFD design, that is, a set
of load combinations (12-1)(12-6) applied in conjunction with CHAP. 22,
DIV. II, Design Standard for Load and Resistance Factor Design Specication for Structural Steel Buildings, per the AISC Manual of Steel Construction, Load and Resistance Factor Design, Volumes I and II (second
edition, 1998). The specic set entitled Load Combinations Using Strength
Design or Load and Resistance Factor Design (1612.2) is
4.13
SUMMARY OF PROCEDURE
1.4D
(12-1)
1.2D 1.6L 0.5 (Lr or S)
(12-2)
1.2D 1.6(Lr or S) (1L or 0.8W)
(12-3)
1.2D 1.3W 1L 0.5(Lr or S)
(12-4)
1.2D 1.0E (1L 2S)
(12-5)
0.9D (1.0E or 1.3W)
(12-6)
87
where
1
2
0.5
1.0
for floor live loads

for floor live loads in excess of 100 psf
0.2
0.7
for roofs
for roofs that do not shed off the snow
and, in addition, a set of load combinations (3-1)(3-8) and (6-1) and (6-2)
for the Detailed Systems Design Requirements. As mandated by CHAP.
16, 1633, this set operates in conjunction with the Detailed Systems Design
Requirements found in CHAP. 22, DIV. IV, Seismic Provisions for Structural Steel Buildings.
It must be emphasized that the specic detailing instructions of CHAP. 22,
DIV. IV, address only seismic design and require that modied strength-level
forces be applied to specic earthquake-resisting elements, such as columns,
beam-to-column joint, and panel zone. In addition, CHAP. 16 contains specic seismic restrictions such as maximum inelastic response displacement
M (Section 1630.9 and 1630.10).
4.13
SUMMARY OF PROCEDURE
We will use load combinations (12-1)(12-6), Section 1612.2.1, for Load

and Resistance Factor Design. These combinations include earthquake and
wind forces in addition to gravity forces and are applicable to this specic
project, subjected to winds up to 70 mph, exposure C, seismic zone 4, source
type A. The design procedure must be adjusted to local conditions if higher
winds prevail on a specic site.
88
We will use a second set of load combinations (3-1)(3-6) for the Detailed Systems Design Requirements of CHAP. 22, DIV. IV (1633).
Yet a third set of load combinations is needed although not specically
termed as such in the 1997 UBCfor column strength,
Pu 1.0PD 0.5PL 0.4RPE
(6-1)
Pu 0.9PDL (0.4R)o PE
(6-2)
as mandated by 2211.4.6.1, CHAP. 22, DIV. IV, and if you consider that the
1997 UBC calls for augmented earthquake forces for the design of the panel
zone (2211.4.8.2a) or for a magnied inelastic displacement (0.7R)S
(1630.9.2), each of these specic requirements corresponds to yet another set
of load combination not listed under 1612.2.1 and expressed, for instance, as
0.0D (0.7 8.5)E 5.95E
(30-17)
We entered these relevant special load combinations in the computer analysis

part II.
CHAPTER 22, DIV. IV, Seismic Provisions for Structural Steel Buildings, contains special recommendations for the design strength of members
and connections developed in conjunction with strength-level factored external loads and resisted by the nominal strength of the member multiplied by
1.0 resistance factors. Of particular concern is the design of:
(a) Columns
(b) Beam-to-column connections
(c) Panel zone
We will address each issue when we design the particular element or connection.
In general, factored strength-level forces are called for in the overall design
of the structure. In addition, the 1997 UBC requires that for specic elements of the structure, as specically identied in this Code, the minimum
design strength should be the product of seismic amplication factors and
design forces set forth in Section 1630. In accordance with this rule, a 0.4R
seismic amplication is applied to CHAP. 22, Section 6.1, column design
formulas as
1.2PD 0.5PL 0.2Ps 0.4R PE
0.9PD 0.4R PE
c Pn
t Pn
or to formulas (3-7) and (3-8) of CHAP. 22, Section 3.1, as
(6-1)
(6-2)
4.15
DESIGN OF BEAMS: CODE REQUIREMENTS
1.2D 0.5L 0.2S 0.4R E
(3-7)
0.9D 0.4R E
(3-8)
89
The reader will note that we applied the preceding load combination for the
column design. It will also be noted that, by using load combinations (3-7)
and (3-8), a number of other specic requirements of CHAP. 22 are waived.
An example of such a specic provision is the beam-to-column joint design
requirement, CHAP. 22, Section 8.2.b, that involves superposition of load
cases. The requirement calls for a shear strength based on the application of
the beam end moment of either Mp or the moment derived from the factored
shearing resistance of the panel zone, UBC 1997, CHAP. 22, formula (8-1).
To the seismic shear thus obtained we must add the reaction of factored
gravity loads 1.2D 0.5L 0.2S.
As indicated earlier, the alternative to the individual load superposition
would be to use load combinations (3-7) and (3-8) permitted by CHAP. 22,
Section 8.2.b, probably resulting in a more organized bookkeeping of engineering calculations that would lead to a direct design.
These specic 1997 UBC requirements, under CHAP. 22, DIV. IV, Seismic Provisions for Structural Steel Buildings, are to ensure that vital elements of the structure such as columns, beam-to-column connections, and
panel zone will perform to guard the overall safety of the structure.
4.14
DESIGN STRATEGIES
(a) Apply loads as required by the 1997 UBC load combinations (12-1)
(12-6), (3-1)(3-6), (6-1), and (6-2).
(b) Comply with CHAP. 22, DIV. IV, Seismic Provisions for Structural
Steel Buildings, as mandated by Detailed Systems Design Requirements (1633).
(c) Ensure adequacy of structural components and connections under the
provisions of the AISC Manual of Steel Construction, Load and Resistance Factor Design, second edition, 1998 (the Specication), as
mandated by CHAP. 22, DIV. II, of UBC 1997.
4.15
DESIGN OF BEAMS: CODE REQUIREMENTS
The 1997 UBC detailed systems design requirements, CHAP. 22, DIV. IV,
Section 2211.4.8, states, under Requirements for Special Moment Frames
(SMF):
90
8.1. Scope. Special moment frames (SMF) shall have a design strength as
provided in the Specication to resist the Load Combinations 3-1 through
3-6 as modied by the following added provisions:
8.2. Beam-to-Column Joints
8.2.a. The required exural strength, Mu, of each beam-to-column joint shall be
the lesser of the following quantities:
1. The plastic bending moment, Mp, of the beam.
2. The moment resulting from the panel zone nominal shear strength, Vn,
as determined using Equation 8-1.
The joint is not required to develop either of the strengths dened above
if it is shown that under an amplied frame deformation produced by
Load Combinations 3-7 and 3-8, the design strength of the members at
the connection is adequate to support the vertical loads, and the required
lateral force resistance is provided by other means.
8.2.b. The required shear strength, Vu of a beam-to-column joint shall be determined using the Load Combination 1.2D 0.5L 0.2S plus the shear
resulting from Mu, as dened in Section 8.2.a, on each end of the beam.
Alternatively, Vu shall be justied by a rational analysis. The required
shear strength is not required to exceed the shear resulting from Load
Combination 3-7.
8.2.c. The design strength, Rn of a beam-to-column joint shall be considered
adequate to develop the required exural strength, Mu, of the beam if it
conforms to the following:
1. The beam anges are welded to the column using complete penetration
welded joints.
2. The beam web joint has a design shear strength Vn greater than the
required shear, Vu, and conforms to either:
a. Where the nominal exural strength of the beam, Mn, considering
only the anges is greater than 70% of the nominal exural strength
of the entire beam section [i.e., b t (d t )Fy 0.7Mp]; the web
joint shall be made by means of welding or slip-critical high
strength bolting, or;
b. Where b t (d t )Fy 0.7Mp, the web joint shall be made by
means of welding the web to the column directly or through shear
tabs. That welding shall have a design strength of at least 20 percent
of the nominal exural strength of the beam web. The required
beam shear, Vu, shall be resisted by further welding or by slipcritical high-strength bolting or both.
8.2.d. Alternate Joint Congurations: For joint congurations utilizing welds or
high-strength bolts, but not conforming to Section 8.2.c, the design
4.16
SECOND-FLOOR BEAM
91
strength shall be determined by test or calculations to meet the criteria

of Section 8.2.a. Where conformance is shown by calculation, the design
strength of the joint shall be 125% of the design strengths of the connected elements.
4.16
SECOND-FLOOR BEAM
The maximum moment corresponding to the 1997 UBC load combination

(3-5) is Mu 646 kip-ft, derived from computer load combination [10].
Caution. The 1997 UBC formulas (3-5) and (3-6) contain both vertical
and horizontal earthquake design components Ev and Eh
(30-1)
The Ev component either magnies or reduces (uplift) the effect of gravity
load and is expressed as
0.5CaID 0.5(0.44)(1.0)D 0.22D
Therefore
1.2D 1.0(E) 0.5L 1.2D 1.0(Ev Eh) 0.5L
(1.2D 0.22D) 0.5L Eh
1.44D 0.5L Eh
(3-5)
Formula (3-5) was entered into the computer analysis as load combination
[10].
The LRFD moment capacity of the W36x160 with
Lb 9.0 ft Lp 10.4 ft
bMp 1680 kip-ft 646 kip-ft applied
(ASTM A36 steel)
was obtained from the load factor design selection AISC Table 4-16. The
section satises the 1997 UBC strength requirements. The 8-in. dimension
deducted from the clear span represents the width of the lateral bracing provided at midspan of the beam.
Because the beam deformation is subjected to reversals during the entire
duration of the earthquake, design and detailing of the bracing must be such
that full lateral support to top and bottom anges is ensured (1997 UBC,
2211.4.8.8).
According to the AISC Specication, because Lb Lp, full plastic moment
response could be expected along the entire length of the beam. However, a
cautionary comment is relevant at this point: The Lb Lp mathematical statement alone is no guarantee of yielding; it only assures that no torsional
instability occurs before the plastic response can be achieved, provided other
92
conditions of mechanics of materials are satised. Analysis by the author of

the effect of complex boundary conditions at the beam-to-column interface
indicates that joint behavior is complex and beyond simple design manual
rules.1,2
4.17
BEAM-TO-COLUMN JOINT
Three basic issues need to be addressed:

(a) The moment of resistance of the connection at the beamcolumn interface
(b) The joint shearing resistance to vertical reactions
(c) The horizontal shearing resistance of the panel zone, dened between
column anges and continuity plates
4.18
FLEXURAL RESISTANCE OF BEAM-TO-COLUMN JOINT
As described earlier, UBC 1997 (2211.4) gives the option of designing the
joint for the lesser of the following values:
1. Plastic moment of resistance Mp of the beam:
(AISC LRFD selection table 4-16)
As p Mp 1680 kip-ft
p Mp
1680
Mp
1867 kip-ft 22,404 kip-in.

p
0.9
2. Moment resulting from the panel zone nominal shear strength Vn as
determined using Equation (8-1) of 2211.4
Using formula (8-1) and dividing both sides by v 0.75,
Vn 0.6Fy dctp 1
where tp
dc
db
bc
tc
Fy
2
3bctc
dbdctp
total thickness of panel zone 1.175 in. column web thickness

overall column depth 16.38 in.
overall beam depth 36.0 in.
width of column ange 16.0 in.
thickness of column ange 1.89 in.
specied yield strength of panel zone steel column (A36)
4.18
Vn 0.6 36 16.38 1.175 1
93
3 16.0 1.892
36 16.38 1.175
518.6 kips
Mu Vn(d t) 518.6 (36.01 1.02) 18,145 kip-in.
We will attempt to demonstrate that it is virtually impossibleunless the

1997 UBC seismic provisions are violatedto design a fully restrained moment connection relying on a beam-to-column ange complete joint penetration weld only, without improving the moment connection joint.
The statement in 2211a and b implicitly requires a Mu joint exural resistance larger than can be provided by the complete joint penetration (CP) weld
of the beam anges. This is quite evident from the inequality equation, which
can be expressed as
Mu M Mp Mp
M Mp
Although perhaps less evident at rst glance, 2211.4.a.2 involves an inequality

that urges the designer to come up with an improved connection. It appears
that the quoted 1997 UBC provisions prevent the designer from reverting to
the pre-Northridge moment connection that caused much concern in the engineering community.
The rst step to joint design is to determine the moment of resistance of
the CP groove weld joint connecting the beam ange to the column ange
interface. Noting that the tensile resistance of the CP joint weld is identical
to the base metal and with resistance factor, 0.9,
M b t(d t)FY 0.9 12.0 1.02(36.01 1.02) 36
13,880 kip-in. Mp 18,145 kip-in.
where M is the design resistance of the CP weld of beam anges to the

column. Since the moment of resistance of the CP weld connection is insufcient, top and bottom plates will be attached by welding to the anges of
the beam using llet welds between ange and plate and complete joint penetration weld between the plate and the column ange.
Attach a 10-in.-wide, 38 -in. top plate tapered along its length to improve
stress transfer between plate and ange. The design tensile strength of the
plate is given as
Hp bptpFy 0.9 10.0 0.375 36
121.5 kips
for yield
94
Hp btpUFu 0.9 10 0.375 0.75 58

146.8 kips
for fracture
The 121.5 kips tensile strength by yielding
GOVERNS.
Assuming the same size for the bottom plate, the lever arm of the attached
plates will be approximately
La d tp 36.01 0.375 36.38 in.
The additional design moment of resistance offered by the plate reinforcement
is given as
Mp Hp(d tp) 121.5 36.38 4420 kip-in.
The total design strength of the moment connection is

b Mn b Mp MF b Mp 13,880 4420
18,300 kip-in. 18,145 kip-in.
The minimum llet weld size permitted by the AISC Manual Table J2.4 for
5
5
1.0 in. ange thickness is
16 in. The design resistance of a
16 -in. llet weld
(Table J2.5) is
5
5
w 0.707(
16 )(0.60 FEXX) 0.75 0.707 (
16 )0.60 70 6.96 kip/in.
The required weld length (two lengths, one on each side of the plate) is
L
121.5
8.73 in.
2 6.96
Provide 9-in.-long llet welds on each side with (58 -in. end returns to comply
with the AISC LRFD Manual of Steel Construction J2b llet weld termination
requirement: llet welds shall be returned around the side or end for a
distance not less than two times the weld size.
The reader will note that the end of the plate pointing toward the midspan
of the beam will not be welded. This is because researchers in general believe
that in this manner a smoother stress transfer can be achieved.
The width of the bottom cover plate will be wider than the lower beam
ange to allow for a at horizontal llet welding position. Dictated by practical reasons, the plate will be rectangular.
5
The design resistance of a 13.0-in.-wide,
16 -in. A36 plate is given as
4.18
95
5
H5 / 16 0.9
16 13 36 131.6 kips 121.5 kips required
5
H5 / 16 0.9
16 13 0.75 58 159.0 kips
Specifying a 14 -in. llet weld, the required weld length (on two sides) is
121.5
21.9 in.
5.57
(11.0 in. each side)
Both top and bottom A36 cover plates will be attached to the column ange
by a complete-joint-penetration-groove weld. It is recommended that this operation be carried out in a separate phase, after welding of beam anges to
the column is complete. Figure 4.10 shows cover plate dimensions and welds.
The reader will note that the back-up bar that facilitates erection and welding of the upper beam ange has been removed. Although adding to construction costs, it is believed that the removal of back-up bars will improve
performance of the joint, because presence of the temporary erection piece
might evoke stress concentrations. Finite-element models also attest to it.
Although logical to scholars of engineering, the foregoing has never been
fully proven. Brittle fracture of the joint during cyclic loading has been
equally observed even in large-scale specimens, despite thorough preparation
such as carefully removed back-up bars, gouged-out weld root pass, lled
with new weld material, and smooth ground at these locations. Finite-element
models are seldom capable of reproducing the complexities of boundary conditions and related stress disturbances in the beam column joint.
A complex load path and stress distribution may also exist in built-up
joints. During the authors visit to the large-scale testing laboratory at the
University of California at San Diego in the fall of 1999, Dr. Chia-Ming Uang
indicated that one of the characteristics of the cover-plated joint is that, while
the top cover plate undergoes tension due to downward loading of the frame
beam, a considerable portion of the beam top ange, normally considered to
be in full tension, will be subjected to compression.
Complex boundary conditions that evoke three-dimensional stresses exist
in a uniaxially loaded specimen when xed into a machine platen that prohibits lateral expansion or contraction.3,4 The beam ange solidly welded to
a robust column ange will react somewhat similar to a specimen attached
by interlocking to an almost innitely stiff machine platen.
The reader will note that the 1997 UBC provisions 2211.4, Section 8.2.a.,
are strength related. They aim at making the welded connection stronger than
the simple beam ange-to-column full-penetration weld that failed in the
Northridge earthquake.
The SEAOC and Applied Technology Council (ATC) procedures, channeled through the 1997 UBC provisions, are far from setting forward an
energy-dissipating system. Like a car without shock absorbers, any energy
96
Figure 4.10 Top: second-oor beam-to-column connection. Bottom: plan view of

cover plates.
dissipation is achieved at the high cost of permanent damage to beamcolumn

joints including the base material. A better approach would be calibrated
dampers to release the enormous stresses on the connection by the swaying
mass of the structure during an earthquake.
4.19
SHEAR TAB DESIGN
Once adequate exural resistance has been provided by a ange-to-ange

connection capable of resisting moment and horizontal forces only, the engineer has to provide sufcient strength to resist the vertical forces of the
beam-to-column joint. These forces are:
4.19
SHEAR TAB DESIGN
97
1. Gravity forcesthe reaction caused by dead weight of oor and structure and a portion of live load that has to be supported even during the
most severe earthquake
2. Reactions of the frame beam subjected to sway and bending due to
lateral seismic or wind forces
The procedure allows treating force componentsmoment and vertical
shearseparately. After all, the three basic equations
H0 M0 V0
that pertain to the free-body diagram must be obeyed. Using these equations,
however, could lead in a pitfall unless the law of compatibility of deformations is also observed. This issue will be analyzed later.
The quoted CHAP. 22, DIV. IV, Section 8.2.b, requires designing the joint
for a gravity load of
1.2D 0.5L 1.2(0.6) 0.5(0.4) 0.92 k/ft
uniformly distributed load and, in addition, a shear resulting from Mu dened
in 8.2.a applied on each end of the beam.
By 8.2.a, Mu was dened earlier as the lesser of the following quantities:
1. The plastic bending moment Mp of the beam
2. The moment resulting from the panel zone nominal shear strength Vn
as determined using Equation (8-1)
The value of Mu was found to be
Mu 18,145 kip-in. 1512 kip-ft
The shear resulting from the uniform load (no snow load present) is
VW
(20.0 1.37) 0.92

8.6 kips
2
The shear resulting from Mu end moments is

Vmu
2 1512
162.4 kips
20.0 1.37
The total shear to be resisted by the joint is

Vu 8.6 162.4 171.0 kips
98
From AISC Manual of Steel Construction, Volume II, Connections, Table

7
9-158, eight 1-in. 325N bolts with standard holes,
16 24 single plate,
3
and 8 -in. weld size have a shear capacity of 171 kips. However, the shear tab
must also resist a moment of
0.2(Mu) 0.2(1512 12) 3629 kip-in.
As the nominal exural resistance of the beam anges is less than 70% of
the nominal exural strength of the entire beam section,
bt(d t)Fy
12.0 1.0 (36.0 1.0)36

1260 0.7Mp
12
0.7(1867) 1307 kip-ft
The 1997 UBC, Section 2211.4, 8.2.c.2.b, states: the web joint shall be made
by means of welding the web to the column directly or through shear tabs.
The welding shall have a design strength of at least 20% of the nominal
exural strength of the beam web. Stated otherwise, the single plate and its
weld, designed to function as a simple shear connection as tabulated in AISC
Manual of Steel Construction, Volume II, must be modied to resist both
shear and the 20% exural resistance of the beam web to counteract the
secondary effects caused by frame action.
The 20% nominal exural strength of the beam web having a cross section
of twT 0.65 32.12 is given as
36
0.2Mn,web 0.2 0.65 32.122
4 1207 kip-in.
By increasing the length of the shear tab to 26 in., the additional shear tab
thickness to resist the 20% Mn,web is given as
t
1207
4 1207
0.198 in.
26.02 (36/4) 26.02 36
3
However an extra thickness of
16 0.188 in. will be adequate because, by
increasing the shear tab length, we have gained a reserve shearing resistance
for the connection. Thus the following total shear web thickness is deemed
adequate for the combined bending and shear:
For shear only

For bending only
16 in.
3
16 in.
From AISC, Connections, Table 9-158
10
5
ttotal
16 in.
8 in.
4.21
4.20
SECOND-FLOOR PANEL ZONE
99
SHEAR TAB-TO-BEAM WELDED CONNECTION
1
The strength of a
16 -in. weld is given as
1
1
(0.707)(
16 )(0.6)FEXX 0.75(0.707)(
16 )(0.6)(70) 1.392 kips/in.
The llet weld to connect the shear tab to a 58 -in.-thick beam web must be at
least 14 in. thick following the minimum weld sizes of AISC Table J2.4. The
limit-state equation will be derived assuming a 38 -in. llet weld with a design
strength of 8.352 kips/in. resistance and noting that the internal arm is
d X 26.0 X
for a fully plasticized tension/compression zone of uniform thickness. The
equation of the required length X of the 38 -in. llet weld applied to top and
bottom of the shear tab-to-beam web connection,
X(8.352)(26.0 X) 0.2Mu 1207 kip-in.
reduces to
X 2 26X 144.5 0
giving
X 8.0 in.
6
Thus provide an 8-in.-long,
16 -in. weld top and bottom of the shear tab. See
Figure 4.10.
The regulation that requires welding in addition to bolts stems from test
results at the University of California at Berkeley and the University of Texas
at Austin. During cyclic loading the tests exhibited considerable slippage of
bolts in shear tab connections not welded to the beam web.
4.21
The 1997 UBC, CHAP. 22, DIV. IV, Section 8.3.a, mandates load combinations (3-5) and (3-6) for the panel zone design. Of these, (3-5) denes the
bending moment acting on structural element 3, represented by [10], which
yields the largest value for the panel zone design shear.
The moment computed by [10] is
100
Mu 645.4 kip-ft
coupled with a oor shear component S 35.3 kips. The load combination
formulas
1.2D 1.0E 0.5L 0.2S
(3-5)
0.9D (1.0E or 1.3W)
(3-6)
contain E, which is well dened in the 1997 UBC, CHAP. 16, DIV. IV,
Section 1630.1.1, under Earthquake Loads as
E Eh Ev
(30-1)
as the sum of all earthquake effects, horizontal and vertical.

Regrettably, Section 2211, rather than keeping the well-organized system
of CHAP. 16, adopts AISC Seismic Provisions for Structural Steel Buildings, June 15, 1992, without incorporating it into the body of the 1997 UBC.
In the adoption, E is dened as the earthquake load (where the horizontal
component is derived from base shear Formula V Cs Wg), taking away
the clear-cut mathematical denition of CHAP. 16 and leaving the engineer
in the uncertainty as to whether to take the vertical component into consideration or not.
Formulas (3-5) and (3-6) are just a variation of the 1997 UBC, Section
1612.2.2.1, formulas (12-5) and (12-6), where E is clearly dened under the
section Notations as the sum of all earthquake effects in the quoted Section
1630.
The Cs does not appear in the UBC notation or its formulas. It comes from
the transcribed notations of the AISC Seismic Provisions without being
adjusted and properly incorporated into the framework of the Code.
In general, the local building code [NBC by BOCA, SBC by Southern
Building Code Congress International (SBCCI), UBC by ICBO] takes precedence over a national standard (ACI, AISC, NDS) and often modies its
recommendations. In this text the 1997 UBC well-dened E will be used,
including Ev, the vertical effect of earthquake.
It would be unwise to ignore the physics of earthquakes and the strong
message sent by the San Fernando earthquake of nearly 100% g vertical
component and the Northridge earthquake with nearly 200% g measured at
specic locations. Still vivid in the authors memory are the news of the nearly
100% g vertical acceleration readings by strong-motion seismograph at the
Pacoima Dam during the 1971 San Fernando earthquake.
The panel zone shear is expressed by the difference of two vector components:
4.21
101
1. the reaction of the beam anges H that can be conservatively

approximated by Mu /(d t) ignoring any contribution of the beam
web,
H
Mu
d t
645.4 12
221.3 kips
(36.0 1.0)
less
2. the oor shear of 35.3 kips transferred by the column above the joint.
The resultant shear that intends to shear across the column web and anges,
represented by the second-order term of UBC formula (8-1),
Vu 221.3 35.3 186.0 kips
must be less than or equal to the panel zone shear strength given by UBC
(8-1),
vVn 0.6vy dctp 1
2
3bctc
0.6(0.75)(36)(16.4)(1.175)
dbdctp
3 16 1.892
389 kips
36 16.4 1.175
As the computed panel zone shear is less than the shear strength, 186 k
389 k, the panel zone meets the 1997 UBC strength requirements. The UBC
symbols for formula (8-1) are
tp total thickness of panel zone including doubler plate(s)
dc overall column depth
db overall beam depth
tc column ange thickness
Fy specied yield strength of panel zone steel
In addition, the 1997 UBC 8.3.b, (8-2), requires a minimum panel zone thickness
tz
dz wz 34 12.6
0.518 in
90
90
(8-2)
102
As the column web thickness twc constitutes the panel zone thickness (no
doubler plates provided) and
twc tz
1.175 in. 0.518 in.
this provision is also met.

For a better load transfer of the rather concentrated beam ange reactions
impacting the column anges during cyclic sway of the frame, we will provide horizontal continuity plates between the column anges, top and bottom
of the panel zone, in line with the centerline of beam anges. It is good
practice to match the size of the continuity plates with the size of beam anges
rather than relying on column ange resistance to compensate for undersized
continuity plates. Earthquake damage survey recorded by the author involved
badly damaged column anges torn from the column web. It was a clear
manifestation that the column ange-to-web joint, in general, is not strong
enough to resist the large impacting forces of a wildly swaying joint. This
action delivers an impact reaction of the beam ange during dynamic,
earthquake-generated cyclic loading, not quasi-static laboratory cyclic loading.
To disperse the concentrated effect of horizontal beam-end reactions, we
will provide 5-in.-wide, 1-in.-thick continuity plates closely matching the
beam ange sizes. Figure 4.10 shows the horizontal continuity plates snugly
tted and welded to both column anges and column web.
Observation of the impact of the Northridge earthquake on SMRF structures revealed surprisingly extensive panel zone damage. In a signicant
number of cases tearing of the column ange occurred, especially where
continuity plates had not been provided.
It is common sense to spread the rather large and concentrated beam ange
reaction load among the individual column components: the inner and outer
column anges and the column web. It is also a fact that the dynamic impact
of the beam ange reaction caused by the cyclic sway of the frame at story
levels can be signicantly larger than predicted by the static force procedure
(Section 1630.2). A critical view and analysis of this problem are presented
in Chapters 1 and 12 of this book.
4.22
THIRD-FLOOR BEAM
The exural strength requirements are dictated by 1997 UBC, CHAP. 22, load
combinations (3-5) and (3-6), reected in our computer load combinations
[10] [11]. Member 5, which is the largest design moment, derives from load
combination (3-5) [10],
4.23
THIRD-FLOOR SHEAR TAB CONNECTION
103
Mu 313 kip-ft
As
Lp 7.8 ft Lb 9.0 ft Lr 22.4 ft
for the W24 68 braced at midspan, the full plastic moment capacity can
be obtained providing the following is satised: The moment capacity comes
from AISC LRFD equations (F1-2) and (F1-3),
Cb
2.5Mmax
12.5Mmax
3MA 4MB 3MC
12.5 313
2.23
2.5 318 3 173 4 28 3 117
(F1-3)
b Mn bCb[Mp BF(Lb Lp)]

0.9 2.23[478 12.1(9.0 7.5)] 923 kip-ft
but must be smaller than or equal to

b Mp 478 kip-ft
The exural capacity of the beam is

b Mp 478 kip-ft 313 kip-ft applied
Note. Beam size has been increased from W21 68 to W24 68 to meet
the 1997 UBC story-drift criteria (Sections 1630.9 and 1630.10). When the
drift criteria overrule the strength criteria, the moment capacity of the member
normally exceeds the demand. This is clearly illustrated in the preceding
example.
4.23
Design for vertical shear must satisfy requirements 8.2.a and 8.2.b of UBC
1997, CHAP. 22, DIV. IV.
104
Design Shear Tab for Vertical-Shear Vn Only
The 1997 UBC, CHAP. 22, DIV. IV, Section 8.2.a, gives three options for
determining the vertical shear at the beamcolumn joint:
(a) Design for the plastic bending moment capacity Mp applied at both
ends.
(b) Design for the moment resulting from the panel zone nominal shear
strength Vn as determined using Equation 8-1.
The result of these choices must be superimposed to the shear caused by 1.2D
0.5L 0.2S load combination.
(c) Provide design strength to balance the reactions resulting from 1997
UBC load combinations (3-7) and (3-8), which represent the amplied
frame deformation per UBC Section 1630.9 and 1630.10.
The design of the joint will be determined by the lesser of the above values.
Of these choices we have
b Mp
478
531 k-ft
b
0.9
2
3bctc
(b) Vn 0.6Fy dctp 1
dbdctp
(a) Mu
(LRFD Selection Table 4-18)
0.6 36 16.38 1.175 1

572 kips
3 16.0 1.892
23.73 16.38 1.175
By using internal lever arm 0.95db following the AISC recommendation (Commentary, p. 6-235),
Mu
572 0.95(23.73)
1075 k-ft
12
(c) Mu5 932 kip-ft and Mu6 1004 k-ft, where subscripts refer to the
joint number in member 5.
Item (a) represents the lesser of the choices allowed by 1997 UBC, Section
8.2.a, and will be used for the determination of the design shear. The 2Mu /L
component is given as
2Mu 2 531
56.8 kips
L
18.7
The gravity load component of the shear is given as
4.23
V (1.2D 0.5L 0.0S)
105
L
18.7
[1.2(0.6) 0.5(0.4)]
8.6 kips
2
2
Vu 8.6 56.8 65 kips

From the AISC LRFD, Volume II, Connections, Table 9-153, we select 5
3
34 325N standard bolts with 4 15 14 -in. nominal single plate with
16 -in.
llet weld (standard holes, Rigid Support Condition). However, we must
1
add a
16 -in. weld to each side of the plate to counteract the 20% unbalanced
moment of the web exural resistance. The total theoretical weld size is
3
1
1
t
16
16
4 in.
Provide a 14 -in. llet weld on each side of the shear tab. The reader will note
that the 14 in. nominal shear tab thickness was also increased to 12 in. The
formal proof of the adequacy of the shear tab to resist both the vertical and
0.2Mp,web forces will be left to the designer.
Experience from recent California earthquakes has veried that earthquakes
can cause larger than predicted forces on connections and that shear tabs are
quite vulnerable in an earthquake. In the course of inspections of moment
frame connections, the author observed numerous shear tabs that cracked and
split in the Northridge earthquake. Figure 4.11 shows the complete connection
detail.
Design Shear Tab Connection for Bending
0.7Mp
0.7(b Mp)
372 kip-ft
b
for W24 68 beam
36
b t(d t)Fy 8.965 0.585(23.73 0.585)
12 364 kip-ft
Therefore the beam web must be welded to the upper and lower ends of the
shear tabs to provide at least 20% of the web nominal exural strength. The
20% of Mp of the beam web is given as
36
Mp,web 0.415 (21.0)2 (
4 ) 1647 kip-in.
0.2Mp 0.2(1647) 329 kip-in.

Assuming a shear tab length of 18 in. and a 14 -in. llet weld for the moment
connection, the required llet weld length X will be found by using a basic
limit-state plastic moment of resistance equation for identical rectangular
tensioncompression zones having a 5.7276-kip/in. weld capacity:
106
Figure 4.11 Top: Third-oor beam-to-column connection. Bottom: Plan view of

cover plates.
X(5.7276)(18 X) 329 kip-in.

5.7276X2 103.10X 329 0
This reduces to
X2 18X 57.5 0
resulting in
X 4.15-in. weld length
say 4.5 in.
The llet weld provided for pure vertical shear for the shear tab-to-column
1
connection would also be increased by
16 in. on each side.
4.24
107
THIRD-FLOOR BEAM-TO-COLUMN MOMENT CONNECTION
1
Note. The
16 -in. weld must be added to the minimum llet weld size
derived previously under Design Shear Tab for Vertical Shear Vn Only.
4.24
THIRD-FLOOR BEAM-TO-COLUMN MOMENT CONNECTION
The reader is reminded that designing the beam and designing the beam-tocolumn moment connections are two distinctively different issues that need a
different design methodology. For moment connections, only the beam
anges, not the entire section, are welded to the column.
CHAPTER 22, DIV. IV, Section 8.2.a, of the 1997 UBC requires that the
moment connectionthe beam angecolumn connectionmust have a exural strength that is either
(a) Mp, the unreduced nominal strength of the beam, or
(b) the moment resulting from the panel zone nominal shear strength Vn.
That is:
b Mp 478.0
531.0 kip-ft 6374 kip-in.

b
0.9
3 16.0 1.892
(b) vVn (0.6)(0.75(36)(16.38)(1.175) 1
23.73 16.38 1.175
(a) Mp
429 kips
Mu Vn(d t)
429
(23.73 0.585)
0.75
13,239 kip-in. 6374 kip-in.
Therefore the exural resistance of the beam-to-column connection must be

at least 6374 kip-in.
The exural resistance of the full-penetration butt welds of the beam
anges to the column can be expressed as
M 0.9 2 36(8.96 0.585)
(23.73 0.585)
3931 kip-in.
2
Consequently the ange-to-column connection must be reinforced. One solution is to add top and bottom cover plate to the anges.
The moment to be resisted by the added cover plates is given as
108
Mu Mp M 6374 3931 2443 kip-in.

Assuming a lever arm of
La 24.0 in.
for added cover plates
and
b 8.0 in. for width of top plate
the required top-cover plate thickness is
tbUFy La Mp M
Mp M
2443
0.325 in.
FubULa
0.9 0.75 58 8 24
or
t
Mp M
2443
0.393 in.
FybLa
0.9 36 8 24
GOVERNS
say a 38 -in.-thick plate.

Use an 8-in.-wide, 38 -in. plate of length and taper similar to the cover plate
5
used for the second-oor connection. The required length of a
16 -in. llet
weld to attach the cover plate to the beam ange on both sides of the cover
plate is
L 0.9 36 8
0.393
7.38 in.
2 6.9
However, use a weld length and conguration similar to the one used for the
5
cover plate of the second-oor connection. Use two
16 -in. llet welds with
3
3
4 -in.-long end returns on both sides of the 8.0 8 tapered plate. Similarly a
5
10.0-in.-wide, 9.0-in.-long,
16 -in. bottom plate is welded to the bottom
1
ange with a 9.0-in.-long, 4 -in. llet weld applied to both sides of the plate.
Figure 4.11 shows the connection detail.
4.25
THIRD-FLOOR PANEL ZONE
The design shear is derived from load combinations (3-5) and (3-6) per the
1997 UBC, CHAP. 22, DIV. IV, Section 8.3.a. Of these load combinations,
(3-5), represented by [10], gives higher design load at joint 6, member 5:
4.26
DESIGN OF COLUMNS
109
Mu 313 kip-ft 3756 kip-in.

The horizontal ange reaction gives
Mu
3756
167 kips
0.95d 0.95 23.73
less the oor shear component carried by the column above,
S 27 kips
The design panel shear acting on the panel zone is given as
H S 167 27 140 kips vVn
0.75(572) 429 kips
In addition, the panel zone thickness tp must be equal to or larger than

tz
dz wz [(23.73) (2 0.625)] [(16.38) (2 1.89)]
90
90
0.39 in. 0.415 in.
Therefore 1997 UBC, CHAP. 22, DIV. IV, Section 8.3.b, is also met and the
panel zone meets the 1997 UBC requirements.
4.26
DESIGN OF COLUMNS
We now analyze the steps involved in our design of columnsand beam

columns connectionssubjected to bending and axial compression. The design typically involves:
(a) Designing the column for moments obtained by the moment-resisting
frame analysis
(b) Designing the column for the axial force component of the frame analysis
We will use the basic equations (H1-1a) and (H1-1b) of the AISC LRFD
Specication (the Specication), Volume I, Chap. H, for the analysis:
110
Muy
Pu
8 Mux
1.0
cPn 9 b Mnx b Mny
(H1-1a)
Muy
Pu
Mux
1.0
2c Pn
b Mnx b Mny
(H1-1b)
The entire procedure is summarized in the LRFD column design owchart

(see Figure 4.13). The formulas involve complex issues that will be discussed
next.
Issue of Bending
The external moments Mnt and Mlt have to be magnied due to the presence
of axial force according to Chap. C of the Specication. Moreover, following
Chap. F of the Specication, the moment of resistance of the column has to
be treated as the exural resistance of a beam subject to exural buckling.
Issue of Axial Force
The axial resistance of the column has to be evaluated for the worst slenderness ratio, that is, taking into account the effective length and radius of gyration with respect to major and minor axes. The 1997 UBC, CHAP. 22, DIV.
IV, Detailed Systems Design Requirements, must be followed for the internal moments and forces.
Dr. Gabor Kasinczy,5 a Hungarian engineer, introduced the basic principle
of the plastic behavior of structural steel as early as 1914. The Kasinczy
plastic theory was based on the concept that, if a steel element is bent under
extreme loadingtoday named limit loadit will undergo plastic deformation and yield. In yielding, the steel element would maintain a constant plastic
moment of resistance until point B was reached on the stressstrain diagram
(Figure 4.12). Beyond this point an increased moment of resistance would
occur as the metal enters the strain-hardening stage.
Dr. Kasinczy had thus found an ideal material that would remain friendly
when stretched to its yield limit and would give enough warning by large
Figure 4.12 Idealized stressstrain diagram.
4.26
DESIGN OF COLUMNS
111
permanent deformations rather than undergo sudden catastrophic failure. The

years that followed proved that the entire issue is far more complex and that
a beam stressed to its limit may evoke other less friendly mechanisms. What
are these mechanisms? We will look at the behavioral pattern of a compact
steel beam (Specication denition), a W or box section, when the laterally
unsupported span of the beam is increased.
Assume a simply supported beam as an example. Hold the ends rmly
against torsional rotation but leave the entire span L laterally unsupported.
Apply a large vertical external load that will cause the extreme bers of the
metal to reach the extreme of its elastic limit (point A, Figure 4.12) at a
specic critical section. If the unbraced (laterally unsupported) length L is
short, the overstressed section will develop a full plastic moment of resistance
to counter the overload and restore equilibrium. In fullling its fail-safe function, the beam will not collapse; however, it will display a permanent, unsightly deformation telling us that it has been subjected to an abnormal load
not meant for the normal use of the structure.
The AISC Specication fully recognizes the importance of this welldened unbraced length, calling it Lp (the subscript stands for plasticity).
Stated otherwise, if the unbraced lengththe distance of lateral supports to
the compression angestays within its limit Lp, the Specication allows use
of a full plastic moment of resistance Mp.
Now gradually increase the unbraced length. As we exceed Lp, we cannot
expect a full plastic moment of resistance at the most critically stressed and
strained crosssection but rather the in-between response of a partially plasticized section. The moment of resistance Mr belongs to a region that corresponds to an unbracedand laterally unsupportedlength Lr (Specication)
that can only guarantee a partially plasticized moment of resistance.
If we increase the unbraced length of the beam beyond Lr, the mechanism
of structural response will alter dramatically. The compression ange will act
like a column with a tendency to buckle when its slenderness ratio reaches a
critical value. Naturally, the phenomenon is complex, involving a number of
factors that include the interaction of the web and tensile chord of the beam.
When the compression ange reaches such a critical state, it will buckle rather
than promoting development of a plastic moment of resistance at the critically
bent section. Of course, because the tensile ange is not quite ready to buckle
with the compression ange, buckling will appear as a torsional type of failure.
We then consider zones that represent distinctive response patterns corresponding to short, medium, and long unbraced lengths. As stated before, the
boundaries of these zones are dened by Lp, Lr brace lengths, which are well
dened in the LRFD beam design tables, Part 3 of the Specication. Should
the actual unbraced length Lb fall between Lp and Lr, a transition stage is
reached and the resistance of the section needs to be modied between the
values Mr (corresponding to the Lr unsupported length) and Mp (full plastic
response). The LRFD equation (F1-2) of the Specication allows this transition for an intermediate value for b Mn (see also p. 4-11, Part 4):
112
b Mn Cb [Mp BF(Lb Lp)]
(F1-2)
where Lb is the actual unbraced length

BF
b(Mp Mr)
Lr Lp
Cb
12.5Mmax
2.5Mmax 3MA 4MB 3MC
Specification 4-11
LRFD equation (F1-3)
with MA, MB, MC the absolute values of moments at the 14 , 12 , and 34 points of
the unbraced beam segment, respectively.
In the LRFD equation (F1-3), equation Cb is a modication factor or modier that corresponds to the effective, rather than nominal, unbraced length,
and its value is inversely proportional to the effective unbraced length. That
is, the shorter the effective unbraced length, the larger the Cb moment of
resistance multiplier. For the function of Cb assume a simply supported beam
with end moments that cause a single curvature deformation. It is understood
that the ends of the beam are rmly supported in the lateral direction. Obviously the unsupported length is L. On the other hand, a beam with end
moments that will cause a double curvature corresponds to an effective unbraced length smaller than L.
While Cb is unity for the rst case, it is larger than 1 for the second case,
reecting allowance for a moment of resistance larger than allowed for case
1. Naturally, the limit is b M bFy Z. In other words, Cb is capable of
adjusting design parameters to the effective, rather than nominal, unbraced
length.
Having evaluated the above bending moment terms, the engineer is almost
ready for the LRFD interaction equations (H1-1a) and (H1-1b):
Muy
Pu
8 Mux
1.0
cPn 9 b Mnx b Mny
(H1-1a)
Muy
Pu
Mux
1.0
2cPn
b Mnx b Mny
(H1-1b)
As stated earlier, to account for the P effect, the applied moments Mnt, Mlt
must be augmented to
Mu B1Mnt B2Mlt
(C1-1)
where B1 Cm /(1 Pu /Pe1)

Mnt required exural strength in member, assuming no lateral translation of frame
4.26
DESIGN OF COLUMNS
113
B2 moment magnication factor per (C1-4) or (C1-5) of AISC

LRFD Manual
Mlt required exural strength in member as result of lateral translation of frame only
Pe1 Euler buckling strength evaluated in plane of bending
Pu required axial compressive strength for member
Cm 0.6 0.4M1 /M2
M1 /M2 ratio of smaller to larger end moment of member unbraced in
plane of bending, positive when member bends in reverse curvature
Alternatively, a nonlinear computer program that provides P analysis can be
used.
Axial Force Component
The second major term in interaction equation (H1-1a) of the Specication is

the axial force component Pu / Pn. We enter into the numerator the axial force
augmented by the addition of Ev, the vertical design earthquake component
per CHAP. 16, formula (30-1), and CHAP. 22, DIV. IV, formula (6-1) of the
1997 UBC.
Remember that an LRFD seismic design must contain the axial force components caused by both Eh and Ev superimposed to the axial loads corresponding to 1.2D 0.5L. In the denominator of (H1-1a) or (H1-1b)
equations, cPn can be obtained directly from the column design tables, Part
3, of the Specication using the smaller of the values corresponding to the
most critical slenderness ratio.
When the terms of the axial force components are dened, we are ready
to apply the LRFD interaction equation (H1-1a) or (H1-1b):
Muy
Pu
8 Mux
1.0
cPn 9 b Mnx b Mny
(H1-1a)
Code Requirements
To carry out the column design, we must adhere to 1997 UBC, CHAP. 22,
DIV. IV, Sections 2211.4.8.6 and 2211.4.8.7.a, as follows:
1. The columnbeam moment ratio by formulas (8-3) and (8-4) to ensure
that the SEAOC fundamental strong columnweak beam principle is
observed
2. Whether lateral support to column anges require lateral support only
at the level of the top anges of the frame beam or at the level of both
top and bottom beam anges [formula (8-3) or (8-4) must yield a ratio
1.25]
114
ColumnBeam Moment Ratio (UBC 2211.4.8.6)
The following will illustrate the importance of this 1997 UBC provision and
the consequences if the structure was designed based on compliance with the
strength and drift provisions only, ignoring the strong columnweak beam
issue.
Assume that both strength and drift criteria can be met by substituting a
weaker column instead of the W14 257 indicated for the second story.
Assume that instead of splicing the column above the third oor, as indicated
in the nalized design, we will splice above the second oor and have a W14
125 column for the second story. The following data were obtained from
the AISC Manual and previous work:
Zc
Zc
Zb3
Zb2
Ag
Ag
Fyc
Fyb
Puc
Puc
H
260 in.3
487 in.3
177 in.3
624 in.3
42.7 in.2
75.6 in.2
36.0 ksi
36.0 ksi
255 kips
485 kips
162 in.
Plastic modulus of W14 145 column above

Plastic modulus of W14 257 column below
Plastic modulus of W24 68 beam
Gross area of W14 145 column
Specified minimum yield strength of column
Specified minimum yield strength of beam
Required axial column strength, second story
Required axial column strength, rst story
Average of floor heights above and below joint
Zc(Fyc Puc /Ag)

0.768 1.0
ZbFyb
does not comply with (8.3)
as
Z F
c
yc
Puc
22,157 kip-in.
Ag
and
ZF
b
yb
28,836 kip-in.
An increased column size is needed to comply with 2211.4, Section 8.6.
4.27
4.27
Zc
Zc
Zb3
Zb
Ag
Fyc
Fyb
Puc
Puc
H
COLUMN FINAL DESIGN DATA
115
COLUMN FINAL DESIGN DATA
487 in.3
487 in.3
177 in.3
624 in.3
75.6 in.2
36.0 ksi
36.0 ksi
255 kips
494 kips
162 in.
Plastic modulus of W14 257 column above

Plastic modulus of W14 257 column below
Specified minimum yield strength of column
Specified minimum yield strength of beam
Required axial column strength, second-story column
Required axial column strength, rst-story column
Average of floor height above and below joint
Zc(Fyc Puc /Ag)

(36 494/75.6) (36 255/75.6)
487
ZbFyb
36 801
1.05 1.0
We have satised the 1997 UBC formula (8-3) requirements.

With regard to Section 2211.4.8.7.a, Beam-to-Column Connection Restraint, indicating that both column anges shall be laterally supported at
the levels of both top and bottom beam anges, because the derived ratio of
(8.3) was not greater than 1.25 (8.7.a.1.a), it cannot be proved that the column remains elastic when loaded with Load Combination 3-7.
The reader will note, without formal proof, that, for the upper oor connections, the ratios calculated using Equations 8-3 or 8-4 are greater than
1.25; therefore the requirement of column anges at a beam-to-column
connection require lateral support only at the level of top anges of the
beams is also satised.
The gravity load-carrying system of beams welded to the beamcolumn
joint orthogonal to the plane of the moment frame will be used as lateral
support at TOS (top of steel). Providing such practical lateral column support
might be an advantage over providing top and bottom lateral ange support,
which could be more costly and time consuming.
Having complied with 1997 UBC, Sections 2211.4.8.6 and 2211.4.8.7,
beamcolumn proportioning criteria and previously with formula (30-3) of
Section 1630.1.1 reliability/redundancythe criteriaa nal interstorydrift analysis is made by computer load combination [5] to limit the Maximum Inelastic Response Displacement of the oor, UBC Sections 1630.9
and 1630.10. Table 4.2 shows the results. All story drifts are less than the
0.025 times the story height requirement of UBC 1997 for structures having
a fundamental period less than 0.7 seconds, which is the case (1630.10.2).
116
TABLE 4.2 Maximum Inelastic Response Displacement of Frame and

Allowable Story Drift: Six-Frame Structural System, UBC 1997 Design
Story
1
2
3
4
Maximum Inelastic Response

Displacement,
M 0.7R s in. (30-17),
Computer Analysis Load
Combination [7]
M
M
M
M
3.72
2.94
3.97
3.29
Allowable Story Drift

(1630.10.2),
0.025 Story Height (in.),
T 0.7 s
ALLOWED 0.025 162 4.05
ALLOWED 4.05
ALLOWED 4.05
ALLOWED 4.05
A summary of the process is as follows:

1. Comply with the 1997 UBC formula (30-3) reliability/redundancy criteria.
2. Comply with the 1997 UBC Sections 2211.4.8.6 and 2211.4.8.7 beam
column proportioning criteria.
3. Comply with the 1997 UBC Sections 1630.9 and 1630.10 story-drift
limitation criteria.
Having satised the above requirements, we were ready for the nal computer
run. Figure 4.8 has shown us the member sizes established by the process
and used for the nal analysis.
4.28 FIRST-STORY COLUMN DESIGN FOR COMPRESSION:
MAJOR AXIS
We will use the 1997 UBC load combination (3-7), CHAP. 22, DIV. IV:
1.2D 0.5L 0.2S 0.4R E 1.2D 0.5L 0 3.4(Ev Eh)
(3-7)
as
Ev 0.5CaID (0.5)(0.44)(1.0)D 0.22D
After rearranging terms, the expression becomes
1.2D 3.4(0.22D) 0.5L 3.4Eh 1.948D 0.5L 3.4Eh
and likewise (3-8) can be expressed as
4.28
FIRST-STORY COLUMN DESIGN FOR COMPRESSION: MAJOR AXIS
0.9D 3.4(0.22D) 3.4Eh 0.152D 3.4Eh
117
for uplift
The above expressions are represented by computer load combinations [12]

and [13] in Computer Analysis, Part I.
As mentioned earlier, usage of (3-7) has certain advantages in simplifying
engineering design procedures; additional specic requirements need not be
applied and may be waived (Sections 8.2.a and 8.2.b) if this conservativeenough load combination is used. The maximum axial design force is
Pu 494 kips
coupled with Mu 1292 kip-ft bending moment for column 2 from computer
load combination [12].
Note. The UBC column strength formula (6-1) gives identical results because (6-1) may be considered as a derivative of (3-7) for maximum axial
force design.
The moment component that pertains to no lateral translation is
Mnt 12 kip-ft
caused by dead load plus live load and
Mlt 1280 kip-ft
the required exural strength component that corresponds to the lateral translation of the frame. However, instead of the theoretical values, only 85% of
these moments are effective on the column, following the moment gradient
drop at the bottom of the beam ange where the clear column span begins,
M Mnt Mlt 10 1097 1107 kip-ft moment
[12]
that must be modied for the P effect as required by Equation (C1-1) of

the Specication:
Mu B1Mnt B2Mlt
(C1-1)
Evaluation of the B1 and B2 coefcients yields

B1
where
Cm
1.0
1 Pu /Pe1
(C1-2)
118
M1
1.0
0.6 0.4
0.56
M2
10
Cm 0.6 0.4
(C1-3)
and
Pe1 with
Kl 1.0(144)
21.5
rx
6.71
620 75.6 46,872 kips
B1
From Table 8, Specification
0.56
0.567
1 494/46,872
B1Mnt 0.567 12 6.80
say 7.00 kip-ft
and
B2
1
1 Pu
B2
1 3245
B2
(C1-4)
oh
HL
3.72
(0.7R)(392)(162)
3.72
1 3245
(5.95)(392)(162)
1.033
Note. The story drift and base shear are expressed as 0.7R actual values.
Alternatively, use
B2
1
1 Pu / Pe2
(C1-5)
As the Specication allows the option of either B2 value,

B2Mlt 1.033 1097 1133 kip-ft
Mux B1Mnt B2Mlt 7 1133 1140 kip-ft
that is, the required exural capacity augmented by the P effect.
Effective length calculation in the plane of bending, as specically stated
in C1. Second Order Effects of the AISC Specication (6-41), yields
4.28
FIRST-STORY COLUMN DESIGN FOR COMPRESSION: MAJOR AXIS
119
Ic1 Ic2 3400 in.4

IB2floor 9700 in.4
47.2
LI 2 3400
144
c
Note that Lc is taken from the base to the beam centerline,

43.2
LI 9700
226
g
G2floor
47.2
1.10
43.2
From the alignment chart of the AISC Specication (6-186),

With Gbase 1.0 k 1.33
and the effective column length is
KxLx 1.33(13.5 1.5)
9.85 ft
rx /ry
1.62
The effective length of the column about its weak axis assuming full lateral
support at the centerline of the beam and K conservatively taken as unity
disregarding partial xity at the base is
Ky Ly 1.0(12.0) 12
GOVERNS
The value of Pn needs to be based upon the lesser capacity in either direction,
Pn 2170 kips
from the design axial strength table (3-18) of the AISC Specication,
Pu
494
0.231
Pn 2170
as
120
Pu
0.20
Pn
Equation (H1-1a) is valid and must be used for the interaction formula as
Lp 17.5 ft Lb 12 ft
the full plastic moment of resistance b Mp b Mnx can be utilized and
entered in the denominator of the second term of the expression for the W14
257 column:
b Mnx 0.9(Zx)(Fy)
0.9(487)(36)
1315 kip-ft
12
Pu
8 Mux
494
8 1140
0.998 1.0
Pn 9 b Mnx
2170
9 1315
Hence the column meets the most severe strength requirements of CHAP. 22,
DIV. IV, (6.1).
4.29
COLUMN DESIGN FLOWCHART
The simplied owchart in Figure 4.13 illustrates the column design procedure. Only the major steps are numbered in sequential order.
4.30
DESIGN OF THIRD-STORY COLUMN FOR COMPRESSION
The principles and methodology demonstrated for the design of the rst-story
column were applied to the third-story column design. Formal proof has been
omitted for brevity.
4.31
DESIGN OF THIRD-STORY COLUMN SPLICE
Note the change in column dimension above the third oor to compensate
for reduced forces at the upper levels. Effective connection will be achieved
by a pair of splice plates to counter uplift and by partial penetration weld
provided to butting column webs to resist moments.
The tensile resistance of the column does not have to be veried since the
column was designed for higher axial force and moment in compression. The
column splice, however, must be designed in compliance with CHAP. 22,
DIV. IV, 6.1.b, of UBC 1997; the splice will be designed for uplift resulting
from load combination (6-2) of CHAP. 22, DIV. IV:
121
Figure 4.13 Column design owchart.
122
Pmin 0.90PDL 0.4R PE tPn

where the subscript min refers to forces associated with maximum uplift. The
provisions call for a design that follows the applicable specic Detailed
Systems Design Requirements of CHAP. 22, DIV. IV, 6.1 and 6.2, of UBC
1997. The maximum tensile force in the column is determined by UBC formula (6-2) represented by computer load combination [13]; that is,
0.9D (0.4 R E) 0.9D 3.4(Ev Eh)
Because Ev represents a negative acceleration
0.5CaID 0.22D
the expression becomes

0.9D 3.4(0.22D) 3.4Eh 0.9D 0.748D 3.4Eh 0.152D 3.4Eh
Pmin 115 kips
from load combination [13]of the computer analysis.
We will attach splice plates to each side of the column web and design for
the uplift axial force. Partial penetration welds applied to the column anges
will be provided for the moment component acting on the splice, 40 in. above
the third-oor TOS level. Design of the welded ange connection will be left
as an exercise for the reader.
The partial penetration welds of the column anges must be able to resist
150% of the applied moment component with
w 0.8
and
Fw 0.6FEXX
From CHAP. 22, DIV. IV, 6.2.b.1
We start our splice design by determining dimensions of the splice plate

assuming
3
t
16 in. thick
and using the basic strength relationship

Pu
tFy Ag tFy t w (0.9)(36)(0.1875)w 6.075w
2
w
115
9.465 in.
2(6.075)
say 10-in.-wide plates that t within the column anges, T 1114 .
4.31
DESIGN OF THIRD-STORY COLUMN SPLICE
123
The AISC Specication requires that the strength of welded connection

plates be the lesser of the expressions (Section B.3)
Pu tFy Ag
where Ag is the gross section area and t 0.9 and
Pu tFu Ae tFuUAg
where Ae effective area
U reduction factor with respect to shear lag, stress concentration,
etc., and a function of L/W such as
When 1.5w L w
U 0.75
When 2w L 1.5 w
U 0.87
When L 2w
U 1.0
L weld length in the direction of stress
Assume U 0.75 will be selected for the reduction factor:
Pu 2tFuUAg 2(0.75)(58)(0.75)(0.1875)(10.0) 122 kips 115 kips
The plates have sufcient strength.
3
The two
16 10-in. plates will be welded, one to each side of the column
web. To obtain the required plate length, we need to design the weld. By
choosing a 18 -in. weld size, we will determine the required weld length L and
associated plate length. The design strength (across the throat) of a 18 -in. llet
weld in shear per 1-in. length is given by
0.707twFw 0.707t(w)(0.6FEXX) 0.707(1/8)(0.75)(0.6 70)

2.7838 kip-in.
where t is weld size. Thus the required weld length (four lengths to match
two splice plates) is
L
115
10.32 in.
4 2.7838
Figure 4.14 shows details of the column splice.
say 11 in.
124
Figure 4.14 Column splice.
4.32 REEXAMINATION OF PRE- AND POST-NORTHRIDGE MOMENT

CONNECTION RESEARCH AND LITERATURE
In the Recommended Lateral Force Requirements and Commentary, pp.

307308, 1996 Edition, SEAOC states: During the Northridge earthquake,
more than 100 buildings with welded steel moment-resisting frames suffered
beam-to-column connection failures. Observation of these buildings indicated
that, in many cases, fractures initiated within the connections at very limited
levels of inelastic behavior.
Pre-Northridge Research
How did research begin on these bearm-to-column connections? Perhaps the

rst report of experiments on welded moment connections was issued by
Popov and Stephen,6 followed by Bertero et al.7 in 1973.
Those reports described full-size joint tests up to W24 76 beams welded
to wide-ange columns under quasi-static cyclic loading. The results of the
4.32
REEXAMINATION OF PRE- AND POST-NORTHRIDGE MOMENT CONNECTION
125
test looked promising: inelastic joint behavior associated with a plastic joint
rotation close to 2 radians, and reassurance of plastic yielding of the panel
zone. As discussed in Chapter 12, this zone was considered rigid and unyielding in European literature, which referred to it as a rigid joint.
For a time research focused mostly on the beam-column interface, assuming that full plastic yielding of the beam can be achieved at the interface.
Additional reports based on nite-element analysis reassured us that even
the panel zone would be capable of full yielding under the shearing effect of
beam-ange reactions and would further increase inelastic joint rotation.
Based on such favorable recommendations from the academia the scenario
was set for widespread commercial application of the structural system without proof of specic experimental tests or further testing.
Numerous reports followed through the 1980s such as Popov and Tsai8
reporting results similar to the initial Popov et al. investigations. Occasional
brittle fractures mentioned in these reports received cursory treatment and
were not considered true representatives of joint behavior but rather freak
occurrences due to workmanship aws, among others. Had these fractures
received more attention they could have served as early warning of troubles
to come.
Additional research was conducted just before the Northridge earthquake
by Engelhardt and Husain9 on W18 and W24 beams with anges groovewelded to W12 136 column-beam webs bolted to shear tabs. The experiments revealed problems.
All specimens had been produced by competent steel fabricators using
certied welders and welds ultrasonically tested by certied inspectors. Surprisingly, some joint assemblies exhibited almost no ductile hysteretic behavior and fractured at the very beginning of cyclic loading. This was reported
on Specimen 4 by Engelhardt and Husain in 1993.
Similar disappointing joint failures were reported by Uang10 in 1995 and
Uang and Bondad11 in 1996 in their post-Northridge experimental tests of the
joint.
Post-Northridge Research
A number of solutions to the moment frame connection problem have been

proposed, likely to evolve further in coming years.1219
Two key strategies were developed to circumvent problems associated with
the pre-Northridge moment frame connection.
1. Strengthening the connection by means of cover plates, ribs, haunches,
and side plates.
2. Weakening the beam that frames into the connection, that is, the dogbone connection. The aim of this modication was that, by reducing
weakeningthe beam anges, the location of the plastic hinge could
126
be moved away from the critical beam-column interface.

Two reduced ange shapes were developed under this proposal: linear
prole and circular prole.
Among the strengthening alternatives:
(a)
(b)
(c)
(d)
Plate rib reinforcement welded to beam anges.

Haunch reinforcement welded to beam anges.
Cover plate reinforcement welded to beam anges.
Side plate reinforcement welded to beam.
Test data on some of the described alternatives revealed a percentage of brittle

fractures, such as those reported by Engelhardt and Sabol19 in 1996.
In July of 2000 FEMA issued the FEMA-353 Recommended Specications
and Quality Assurance Guidelines for Steel Moment-Frame Construction for
Seismic Applications18 that superseded their 1995 FEMA 267.13 Many of
the specication provisions contained in Part Iexplains FEMAare already
included in industry standard specication and building code requirements.
FEMA 2000 Recommendations pay particular attention to materialsthe
quality of steel, as well as welding methods and bolting procedures for seismic applications of steel moment-frame construction.
Welding
In the design examples of our project we used special E7018 or E70TG-K2

ux core electrodes for the beam-to-column moment connections. The AISC
Modication of Existing Welded Steel Moment Frame Connections for Seismic Resistance12 mentions in reference to Flange Weld Modications, that
Past tests on RBS (Reduced Beam Section) connections both for new construction and for modication of existing connections, have generally employed the self shielded ux cored arc welding process (FCAW), using either
the E70TG-K2 or E71T-8 electrodes. . . . and In addition, successful tests
on other types of connections have employed the shielded metal arc welding
(SMAW) process using an E7018 electrode . . .
FEMA-35318 recommends that All electrodes, uxes and shielding gases
should conform to the latest American Welding Society (AWS) A5-series
specications.
Chapters 12 and 13 in this book offer further discussion on the subject and
a view on new trends in seismic engineering developments.
REFERENCES
1. Erdey, C. K. 1999. Performance of Steel Moment Frames in an Earthquake.
Paper presented at Eurosteel 99, Second European Conference on Steel Structures, Prague.
REFERENCES
127
2. Erdey, C. K. 1999. Performance of SMRF and SCBF Structures Subjected to

Earthquakes, Paper read at the University of Bratislava.
3. Erdey, C. K. 1979. A New Load-Transmitting Medium to Measure Strength of
Brittle Materials. Journal of Testing and Evaluation. Vol. 7, No. 6, pp. 317325.
4. Erdey, C. K. 1980. Finite Element Analysis and Tests with a New LoadTransmitting Medium to Measure Compressive Strength of Brittle Materials. Materials and Structures, Vol. 13, No 74. pp. 8390.
5. McCormac, J. C. 2003. Structural Steel Design. Upper Saddle River, NJ: PrenticeHall.
6. Popov, E. P., and Stephen, R. M. 1972. Cyclic Loading on Full-Size Steel Connections. American Iron and Steel Institute (AISI), Bulletin No. 21, Washington,
D.C.
7. Bertero, V. V., Krawinkler, H., and Popov, E. P. 1973. Further Studies on Seismic
Behavior of Steel Beam-to-Column Subassemblages. Report No. UCB / EERC73 / 27. Earthquake Engineering Research Center, University of California, Berkeley.
8. Popov, E. P., and Tsai, K. C. 1989. Performance of Large Seismic Steel Moment
Connections under Cyclic Loads. Engineering Journal, American Institute of
Steel Construction (AISC), Vol. 26, No. 2, pp. 5160.
9. Engelhardt, M. D., and Husain, A. S. 1993. Cyclic-Loading Performance of
Welded Flange-Bolted Connections. Journal of Structural Engineering, ASCE,
Vol. 119, No. 12, pp. 35373550.
10. Uang, C. M. 1995. Dynamic Testing of Large-Size Steel Moment Connections,
VHS video of tests. University of California, San Diego.
11. Uang, C. M., and Bondad, D. M. 1996. Dynamic Testing of Full-Scale Steel
Moment Connections. Paper presented in the Eleventh World Conference on
Earthquake Engineering, Acapulco, Mexico. Division of Structural Engineering,
University of California, San Diego.
12. AISC, 1999, Modication of Existing Welded Steel Moment Frame Connections
for Seismic Resistance, Steel Design Series, No. 12.
13. FEMA, 1995, Interim Guidelines: Evaluation, Repair, Modication and Design of
Steel Moment Frames, FEMA-267, SAC 96-03, Washington, D.C., August. These
Interim Guidelines were later superseded by FEMA 353 of July 2000.
14. FEMA, 1997, NEHRP Provisions, Publication 302, Washington, D.C.
15. FEMA, 1998, Update on the Seismic Safety of Steel Buildings, A Guide for Policy
Makers, Washington, D.C.
16. FEMA, 1999, Seismic Design Criteria for New Moment-Resisting Steel Frame
Construction, January, 50% Draft.
17. FEMA, 2000 Recommended Seismic Evaluation and Upgrade Criteria for Existing
Welded Steel Moment-Frame Buildings, FEMA 351, July.
18. FEMA, 2000 Recommended Specications and Quality Assurance Guidelines for
Steel Moment-Frame Construction for Seismic Applications, FEMA 353, July.
19. Engelhardt, M. D., and Sabol, T. A. 1996. Reinforcing of Steel Moment Connections with Cover Plates: Benets and Limitations, Proceedings, US-Japan
Seminar on Innovation in Stability Concepts and Methods for Seismic Design in
Structural Steel, Honolulu, Hawaii.
CHAPTER 5
SEISMIC STEEL DESIGN:

BRACED FRAMES
5.1
INTRODUCTION
When conventional steel structures were adopted in seismic areas such as

California, the impact that strong ground movements would have on these
structures was practically unknown. Some earthquakes of relatively large
magnitude had occurred in scarcely populated areas where no modern steel
structures had been built. With the increase of population new areas were
developed along with the demand for large engineered steel structures
moment-resisting frames (MRF) and concentrically braced frames (CBF)
to meet the compelling needs of developing communities for ofce buildings,
hospitals, and other high-rise structures. At the onset of these developments
SEAOC led the efforts of the engineering community to adjust conventional
steel structures to earthquake impact. Of particular signicance is the 15 years
of analytical and experimental research conducted by SEAOC in collaboration
with the University of Michigan Department of Civil Engineering. Other institutions such as the University of California at Berkeley conducted parallel
research. Concentrically braced frames were subjected to cycling loading to
simulate earthquake-generated ground motions; structural response and areas
in need of improvement were noted and efforts made to enhance structural
resistance to earthquakes.
Coincidental with the research-and-development (R&D) work, a number
of strong ground motion earthquakes hit populated areas in California where
modern engineered steel structures, including CBFs, had been built. Valuable
information was gathered and analyzed by the FEMA-sponsored SAC joint
ventureStructural Engineers Association of California, Applied Technology
Council, and California Universities for Research in Earthquake Engineeringas well as by other researchers.
128 Earthquake Engineering: Application to Design. Charles K. Erdey
5.3
WIND ANALYSIS
129
Today, signicant improvement in earthquake-related design has been

achieved. It is chiey reected in the SEAOC Recommended Lateral Force
Requirements and Commentary, and in the 1997 UBC, which, as mentioned
earlier, can be considered the model Code in seismic design that opened the
road for its IBC successors.
5.2
PROJECT DESCRIPTION: FOUR-STORY LIBRARY ANNEX
The design presented here will use the LRFD method in accordance with the
provisions of the Load and Resistance Factor Design 1997 UBC and AISC
Manual of Steel Construction, Load and Resistance Factor Design, second
edition, 1998. The building will serve as annex to a main library and will be
used exclusively for reading rooms. The specications are as follows:
Concrete oors on metal deck
Ground and typical oor area: 104 104 10,820 ft2
Structural system:
Special concentrically braced frame: UBC 1997, Table 16-N
Steel: ASTM A36 and A500B
Total building height: 54 ft
Seismic zone: 4
Seismic source: type A (5 km from source)
Soil type: SC (very dense)
Basic wind speed: 85 mph, exposure D
Figures 5.1 and 5.2 show the structural layout of a typical oor and dimensions of the braced frame, respectively.
5.3
WIND ANALYSIS
We have already analyzed in detail the design wind pressures for buildings
and structures (1997 UBC, CHAP. 16) in Chapter 4 of this text when we
performed the design of a SMRF structure. Therefore we will go ahead with
the seismic design for the braced-frame project as we have demonstrated that
seismic forces govern.
Table 5.1 summarizes the wind pressure evaluation for the entire building.
Figure 5.3 shows the lateral wind pressure (psf) distribution per unit width of
the wall and Figure 5.4 the lateral wind force distribution (lb/ft) for the entire
braced-framed structure.
The total wind-generated base shear at strength level is given as
130
Figure 5.1 Structural layout of a typical oor.
V 199 1.3 259 kips 670 kips

Note that 670 kips is the base shear for the earthquake.
Earthquake design forces GOVERN.
5.4
EARTHQUAKE ANALYSIS
The plan and methodology recommended in Chapter 4 of this text for the
design of a SMRF structure, which consisted of six steps, apply to the seismic
design of a braced-frame structure. Hence we will omit it here for simplicity.
The braced frame in Figure 5.2 was designed per the LRFD Manual of
Steel Construction (2nd ed.), in accordance with the 1997 UBC CHAP. 16
seismic load distribution. However, the designer did not take into account the
special seismic Detailed Systems Design Requirements of CHAP. 22, DIV.
IV. Figure 5.7 in Section 5.12 of this text gives member sizes pertaining to
this incomplete design.
Our task will be to incorporate the special Detailed Systems Design Requirements of CHAP. 22, DIV. IV, of the 1997 UBC to produce a complete
code-complying seismic design.
5.4
EARTHQUAKE ANALYSIS
131
Figure 5.2 Typical project braced frame.
TABLE 5.1 Wind Pressure Evaluation for Building

Horizontal Wind Pressures
Story
Height (ft)
1
2
3
4
013.5
13.527.0
27.040.5
40.554.5
Wind Load Acting on

Building,
p width (lb / ft)
p CeCqqsIw (psf)
p
p
p
p
(1.39)(1.4)(18.6)(1.0)
(1.45)(1.4)(18.6)(1.0)
(1.58)(1.4)(18.6)(1.0)
(1.69)(1.4)(18.6)(1.0)
36.2
37.8
41.0
44.0
3765
3932
4243
4570
Wind Design Forces Acting at Floor Level

Roof (Fifth level)
Fourth level
Third level
Second level
Total base shear
(13.5 / 2 0.5)(4.5)
13.5(4500 4243) / 2
13.5(4243 3932) / 2
13.5(3932 3765) / 2
V
32.6 kips
59 kips
55.4 kips
52.0 kips
199 kips
132
Figure 5.3 Wind design pressures (psf).
Project Data
Unit weight
Roof deck
Floor deck
Weigh of roof
Weight of floor
Weight of building
Units expressed in service load level: load

factor 1.0
60 psf; includes weight of suspended ceiling, roof
insulation, ducts, etc.
90 psf; includes weight of suspended ceiling,
ducts, curtain walls, etc.
650 kips
973 kips
3570 kips
Figure 5.4 Wind forces (lb / ft).
5.4
EARTHQUAKE ANALYSIS
Base-Shear Calculations
Z 0.4
Soil SC
Table 16-J
Nv 1.6
Table 16-T
Cv 0.56Nv 0.56(1.6) 0.896
Table 16-R
Na 1.2
Table 16-S
Ca 0.4 Na 0.4(1.2) 0.48
Table 16-Q
R 6.4
Table 16-N
I 1.0
Table 16-K
Ct 0.020
Ts
Cv
0.896
0.747 s
2.5Ca 2.5 0.48
T Ct(hn)3 / 4 0.02(54)3 / 4 0.4 s Ts

V
CvI
W
RT
0.896 1.0
3570 1250 kips
6.4 0.4
The total need not exceed deisgn base shear

V
2.5CaI
W
R
2.5 0.48 1.0

3570 670 kips GOVERNS
6.4
but should not be less than

V 0.11 Ca I W
0.11 0.48 1.0 3570 188 kips
Also, for seismic zone 4, it should not be less than
133
134
(0.8Z Nv I
W
R
0.8 0.4 1.6 1.0

3570 286 kips
6.4
Note that V 670 kips is at strength level. When used in combination with
dead load and live load, these loads have to be brought up to strength level
as well, multiplying their respective values by the appropriate load factors
given in the 1997 UBC, 1612.2.1.
Lateral Force Distribution
V Ft
Ft 0
for T 0.7
Fx
(V Ft) wxhx
hi
F5
670 650 54
206 kips
650 54 974(40.5 27.0 13.5)
F4
670 974 40.5

232 kips
650 54 974(40.5 27.0 13.5)
F3
670 974 27
155 kips
650 54 974(40.5 27.0 13.5)
F2
670 973 13.5

77.3 kips
650 54 973(40.5 27.0 13.5)
Table 5.2 shows horizontal wind and earthquake forces acting on the typical
braced frame. Table 5.3 shows maximum inelastic response displacement
(1630.9.1 and 1630.9.2) and allowable story-drift values (1630.10.2) applicable to our project.
TABLE 5.2 Horizontal Wind and Earthquake Forces (Fi) Acting on Typical
Braced Frame (kips)
Level
Wind at Service Levela
Earthquake Force (Eh) at Strength Levela
5
4
3
2
9.8
17.7
16.6
15.6
62.0
70.0
46.6
23.3
Values include torsion and redundancy factor 1.0
5.6
RESPONSE OF BRACED FRAMES TO CYCLIC LATERAL LOADS
135
TABLE 5.3 Maximum Inelastic Response Displacement and Allowable

Story Drift
Story
1
2
3
4
M
M
M
M
Maximum Inelastic Response

Displacement,a
M 0.7Rs in. (30-17)
Allowable Story Drift (1630.10.2),

0.025 Story Height (in.),
T 0.7 s
ALLOWED
ALLOWED
ALLOWED
ALLOWED
0.064 12 0.77
(0.165 0.064) 12 1.21
(0.278 0.165) 12 1.36
(0.372 0.278) 12 1.13
0.025 162 4.05

4.05
4.05
4.05
Note: Displacement values are within UBC 1997 required values.

a
Results of computer analysis.
5.5
WIND AND EARTHQUAKE LOADS
As is normally the case for a great number of projects in UBC seismic zone
4, or even seismic zone 3, wind might not be an issue. However, evaluation
of both wind and earthquake loads is essential, particularly in high-wind areas,
to determine whether wind or seismic governs the design. Should wind govern, the engineer is still bound to comply with the seismic design and detailing
rules of the appropriate materials sections of the code. The actual design will
consist of two parts:
1. Establish loads and general rules per the 1997 UBC, CHAP. 16 (analysis
and preliminary design stage).
2. Carry out the actual design in compliance with the AISC Specication
and the Detailed Systems Design Requirements pertaining to the specic materials sections, 1997 UBC, CHAPS. 1823. The Design Standards for Load and Resistance Factor Design Specication for Structural
Steel Buildings are contained in CHAP. 22, DIVS. II and IV of the
code.
5.6
When the externally applied loading becomes complex, for example, time
dependent, resulting in stress reversals, recent research work14 indicates that
the rules of simple geometry no longer work and are replaced by more powerful laws such as compatibility of deformations and other factors.
The braced frame of this project is a split-braced frame; in a graphical
sense, the diagonal brace elements run between the rst and third oors and
then from the third to the fth level (roof). In other words, the brace system
connects the odd-numbered oors and crisscrosses at every even-numbered
oor (in our building, second and fourth oors). If we were to not connect
136
the crisscrossing joint to the even-numbered oors, these oors would be free
to displace laterally and cause the frame columns to bend considerably between the brace points of rst and third and the third and fth levels. It would
be a hybrid structure, partly braced frame, partly MRF, and the values of a
braced frame that provide economy and stiffness against displacement would
be lost.
What makes this a split-braced frame is that the crisscrossing points of the
diagonal braces are also tied into the second and fourth oors, which provides
sufcient stiffness to the system and lateral support to the columns at each
oor level. If the frame were subjected only to lateral static loads, the vertical
and horizontal force components of the braces would balance out between
each other and the externally applied load at each nodal point, including the
crisscrossing point.
If asked whether the brace reactions cause bending of the second-oor
beam connected to the diagonal bracings, a reader with structural background
would answer, without hesitation, that there will be no bending if the CGs of
the members intersect at the work pointour basic assumption for this project. However, the issue is complex in an earthquake because we are not
dealing with statically applied lateral loads. The earthquake causes serious
reversals of structural deformations, inertial loads, and internal forces.
As the ground movement at the base reverses rapidly, as much as two to
four cycles per second, the structure sways left and right with high-frequency
response. A picture of, say, the second oor taken with a sufciently sensitive
high-speed camera would demonstrate that the oor has displaced to the right
while the base of the structure has moved to the left and the structure is
leaning heavily on the right diagonal brace of the inverted V, putting the brace
in compression. Due to the tendency of a compressed member to buckle, the
brace will bow out under compression (Figure 5.5).
Tests on structures subject to similar cyclic loading showed a marked drop
in element stiffness in the compression brace as compared to the stiffness of
the corresponding diagonal tension brace of the inverted-V system. Because
of the marked difference in element stiffness, the diagonal tension brace picks
up a considerably larger share of the lateral inertial loads acting on the structure as compared to the compression brace.
Research has also proved that, because of the imbalance of axial loads in
the diagonal braces, a considerable unbalanced vertical-load component exists
at the oor-beam/diagonal brace connection. The unbalanced vertical reaction
causes bending of the connecting oor beam, a phenomenon that was not
envisaged under the purely theoretical concepts of braced frames subjected
to static loading. The bending of the beam intensies as the stiffness of the
compression brace deteriorates under cyclic loading.
If the oor beam is not properly engineered it might undergo local or
torsional buckling. Therefore it is imperative that
5.6
137
Figure 5.5 Deformation of a one-story brace frame module subjected to lateral

load.
(a) the brace-to-beam joint be laterally supported against buckling and

(b) the choice of beam be such that the section is compact and the laterally
unsupported length is equal to or smaller than Lp to allow a fully
plasticized moment response.
The special provisions of the 1997 UBC in CHAP. 22, DIV. IV, reect research results when calling for compact sections and a minimum strength for
lateral bracing to beam anges equal to 1.5% of the nominal yield strength
times the beam ange area to resist lateral buckling of the beam.
The above-described phenomena, demonstrated on one story of the structure, apply to all oor beams and diagonal braces. The bowing out of the
diagonal brace has other serious consequences such as stress reversals; these
are generated mostly in the diagonal bracings when the structure undergoes
repetitive cyclic loading. When the cross-bracing bows out under compression, the structure, subjected to reversals, displaces in the opposite direction,
inducing high tensile force into the diagonal member that was, an instant
before, in compression. Because of its relatively sluggish response to stress
reversals, the bowed-out member will not straighten out fast enough to respond to the high-tension demand of the force reversal. The result is a whiplash of dynamic impact prone to cause joint damage. This phenomenon was
observed in experimental tests on steel specimens as well as in structures
damaged by the Northridge earthquake.
138
The slenderer the diagonal brace element, the stronger the dynamic impact
and potential damage to the joint. Recent research work has veried this fact.
Consequently, the 1997 UBC, CHAP. 22, DIV. IV, special detailing provision
9.2.a, limits the slenderness ratio of the brace member to
L
720
r
Fy
In addition, test results and observation of earthquake-damaged buildings have
shown that slender components of brace members could undergo local buckling, resulting in brace damage. Thus the 1997 UBC does not allow slender
components that do not fall into the category of compact or noncompact
sections.
To avoid local buckling and subsequent brittle fracture, 1997 UBC, CHAP.
22, DIV. IV, 9.2.d, restricts the diameter-to-wall thickness and at-width-towall thickness ratios of structural pipes and tubing. In addition, the code
encourages the designer to increase the design strength of the brace member
. . . at least 1.5 times the required strength using Load Combinations 3-5 and
3-6 . . . [for] V and Inverted V type bracing (CHAP. 22, DIV. IV, 9.4.a.4).
These load combinations are similar in nature to formulas (12-5) and (12-6)
of CHAP. 16, 1612.2.1. When increasing the brace member design strength
by 50%, UBC 1997 clearly asks the designer to compensate for the dynamic
impact on deected shape and for the stress reversals normally not taken into
account in structural calculations.
5.7
1997 UBC PROVISIONS
The code recognizes the limitations of analytical methods (static force

method, response spectrum analysis) used to predict the actual forces that will
act on the structure during an earthquake as well as numerous unknown factors related to a specic earthquake. To compensate for limitations and unknown factors the 1997 UBC provides added strength requirements in
CHAPS. 16 and 22.
When using the static force method remember that you are substituting
static for dynamic forces. Dynamic forces produce time-dependent structural
oscillations inuenced by a number of factors such as relative frequency
of ground motion versus natural frequencies and inherent damping of the
structure. These factors are capable of causing signicant amplication to
vibration-related structural deformations and inertial forces.
There are other unknown causes that will impact the structure, such as the
nature of the earthquake; its magnitude, frequency, and superimposed vibrations carried by the spectrum of p and s waves that determine the intensity
5.8
RULES APPLICABLE TO BRACING MEMBERS
139
of ground shaking; and duration of the earthquake: The longer it works on

some inherent structural weaknesses, the more it is likely to hurt the structure.
These considerations should forewarn the engineer to adhere to the 1997 UBC
requirements, which are based on the experience and knowledge gained from
actual earthquakes.
Some specic provisions of the Detailed Systems Design Requirements
of CHAP. 22, DIV. IV, of the 1997 UBC are reproduced on the following
pages as a reference.
5.8
RULES APPLICABLE TO BRACING MEMBERS
CHAPTER 22, DIV. IV, of the 1997 UBC, Seismic Provisions for Structural
Steel Buildings states:
9.2 Bracing Members
9.2.a. Slenderness: Bracing members shall have an
L
720
except as permitted in Sect. 9.5.

r
Fy
9.2.b. Compressive Design Strength: The design strength of a bracing member
in axial compression shall not exceed 0.8c Pn.
9.2.c. Lateral Force Distribution: Along any line of bracing, braces shall be
deployed in alternate directions such that, for either direction of force parallel
to the bracing, at least 30% but no more than 70% of the total horizontal force
shall be resisted by tension braces, unless the nominal strength, Pn, of each brace
in compression is larger than the required strength, Pu, resulting from the application of the Load Combinations 3-7 or 3-8. A line of bracing, for the purpose
of this provision, is dened as a single line or parallel lines whose plan offset
is 10% or less of the building dimensions perpendicular to the line of bracing.
9.2.d. Width-Thickness Ratios: Width-thickness ratios of stiffened and unstiffened compression elements in braces shall comply with Sect. B5 in the Specication. Braces shall be compact or non-compact, but not slender (i.e., p).
Circular sections shall have an outside diameter to wall thickness ratio not exceeding 1,300 / Fy; rectangular tubes shall have a at-width to wall thickness not
exceeding 110 / Fy unless the circular section or tube walls are stiffened.
In addition, the 1997 UBC requires that bracing members be designed to at

least 1.5 times the required strength. A summary of the provisions in Section
9.4.a, V and Inverted V Type Bracing, is as follows:
1. The design strength of the brace members should be at least 1.5 times
the required strength using load combinations 3-5 and 3-6.
140
2. The beam intersected by braces should be continuous between columns.

3. A beam intersected by V braces should be capable of supporting all
tributary dead and live loads assuming the bracing is not present.
4. The top and bottom anges of the beam at the point of intersection of
V braces should be designed to support a lateral force equal to 1.5% of
the nominal beam ange strength (Fy bt).
For the strength of bracing:
9.3.a. Forces: The required strength of bracing joints (including beam-to-column
joints if part of the bracing system) shall be the least of the following:
1. The design axial tension strength of the bracing member.
2. The force in the brace resulting from the Load Combinations 3-7 or 3-8.
3. The maximum force, indicated by an analysis, that is transferred to the brace
by the system.
For net area:

9.3.b. Net Area: In bolted brace joints, the minimum ratio of effective net
section area to gross section area shall be limited by:
Ae 1.2P*u
Ag
t Pn
(9-1)
where:
Ae Effective net area as dened in Equation B3-1 of the Specication.
P*u Required strength on the brace as determined in Sect. 9.3.a.
Pn Nominal tension strength as specied in Chapter D of the Specication.
t Special resistance factor for tension 0.75
Fraction of the member force from Sect. 9.3.a. that is transferred across
a particular net section.
For Gusset plates:

9.3.c. Gusset Plates:
1. Where analysis indicates that braces buckle in the plane of the gusset plates,
the gusset and other parts of the connection shall have a design strength equal
to or greater than the in-plane nominal bending strength of the brace.
2. Where the critical buckling strength is out-of-plane of the gusset plate, the
brace shall terminate on the gusset a minimum of two times the gusset thickness from the theoretical line of bending which is unrestrained by the column
or beam joints. The gusset plate shall have a required compressive strength
to resist the compressive design strength of the brace member without local
buckling of the gusset plate. For braces designed for axial load only, the bolts
5.10
141
or welds shall be designed to transmit the brace forces along the centroids
of the brace elements.
5.9
COLUMN STRENGTH REQUIREMENTS
In addition to load combinations (12-1)(12-6) of CHAP. 16 and the above

quoted special load combinations of CHAP. 22, the 1997 UBC requires:
6.1. Column Strength:
When Pu / Pn 0.5, columns in seismic resisting frames, in addition to complying with the Specication, shall be limited by the following requirements:
6.1.a. Axial compression loads:
1.2PD 0.5PL 0.2PS 0.4R PE c Pn
(6-1)
where the term 0.4R is greater or equal to 1.0.

Exception: The load factor on PL in Load Combination 6-1 shall equal 1.0
for garages, areas occupied as places of public assembly, and all areas where
the live load is greater than 100 psf.
6.1.b. Axial tension loads:
0.9PD 0.4R PE t Pn
(6-2)
However, the 1997 UBC says:

6.1.c. The axial Load Combinations 6-1 and 6-2 are not required to exceed either
of the following:
1. The maximum loads transferred to the column, considering 1.25 times the
design strengths of the connecting beam or brace elements of the structure.
2. The limit as determined by the foundation capacity to resist overturning uplift.
5.10
The rst step is to evaluate , the reliability/redundancy factor, which controls

formula (30-1). As stated before, is a function of rmax.
In CHAP. 16, DIV. IV, 1630.1.1, the 1997 UBC denes:
rmax the maximum element-story shear ratio. For a given direction of loading,
the element-story shear ratio is the ratio of the design story shear in the most
heavily loaded single element divided by the total design story shear. For any
142
given Story Level i, the element-story shear ratio is denoted as ri. The maximum
element-story shear ratio rmax is dened as the largest of the element story shear
ratios, ri, which occurs in any of the story levels at or below the two-thirds
height level of the building.
For braced frames, the value of ri is equal to the maximum horizontal force
component in a single brace element divided by the total story shear.
The maximum horizontal force component for the braced frame is 101
kips. This is the vector component of the force induced by the design earthquake in brace 3, represented by computer analysis load combination [3]. The
largest story shear is the base shear for the building:
V 670 kips
rmax
101
0.15075
670
20
2
0.724 1.0
(0.15075)(104)
(30-3)
Because the value of is less than 1, following the 1997 UBC restriction
shall not be taken less than 1.0 and need not be greater than 1.5 (CHAP.
16, DIV. IV, 1630.1.1), 1.0 will be used in our computations for the code
basic formula
E Eh Ev
(30-1)
As 1.0 for the project, it will have no augmenting effect on the lateral
earthquake forces applied to the structure. Table 5.2 shows values of lateral
wind and earthquake forces with unity.
5.11
STRATEGIES FOR BRACE MEMBER DESIGN
The rst step is to select member sizes for the diagonal brace system (Figure
5.6). Notice that there is an ordered pair of internal forces for each pair of
diagonal braces.
When one brace is in compression, the other is in tension.
Earthquake forces are reversible. As the ground motion reverses in rapid
succession, each diagonal brace is subjected to an internal axial compression
force followed by a tensile force of similar magnitude. This cyclic loading
lasts until the vibration of the structure stops. The bottom line is that each
diagonal brace must be designed for both tensile and compressive axial forces
and associated secondary effects, moments, and shear. However, in a braced
5.11
STRATEGIES FOR BRACE MEMBER DESIGN
143
Figure 5.6 Braced-frame computer model with seismic loads.
structure, for practical reasons the value of the secondary effects might not
be signicant. For instance, for the rst-story braces we obtain a maximum
design force of 245 kips tension for component 2 and 275 kips axial compression for component 3. We will design each brace for a set of complementary compressive and tensile forces obtained by analysis assuming
single-direction oriented lateral forces. We are using this approach with the
knowledge that earthquake forces are reversible and the structure is symmetrical.
This approach as well as some forthcoming restrictive brace design regulations may appear unfamiliar to readers well acquainted with the design of
structures subjected to static forces; however, the 1997 UBC static force procedure in 1630.2 is only an alternative to the more complex dynamic analysis
procedures in (1631); therefore, when using the static force procedure, we
need to bear in mind that:
1. We are not dealing with static forces but vibration induced by dynamic
forces and hence we need to make necessary design adjustments.
2. We should adhere to all code provisions for analysis, design, and detailing.
144
Convention: The width of structural tubing is 10 times the actual size.

1
Wall thickness is expressed in
16 in. to t the required input of the computer
program.
5.12
BRACE MEMBERS 2 AND 3
The governing load combinations for the design are

(1.5)(1.2D 0.5L 1.0 E)
From 9.4.a.1, CHAP. 22, DIV. IV
(1.5)(0.9D 1.0E)
From 9.4.a.1, CHAP. 22, DIV. IV
The internal member forces thus obtained should be

Pu 0.8c Pn
t Pn
for compression*
for tension
From CHAP. 22, DIV. IV (Bracing Members), 9.2.b. Compressive Design Strength: The design strength of a bracing member in axial compression
shall not exceed 0.8c Pn. For the design of connections:
Compression:
1.2PD 0.5PL 0.4R PE cPn
Implied by (3-7)
Tension:
0.9PD 0.4R PE t Pn
Implied by (3-8), CHAP. 22, DIV. IV, 3.1
Figures 5.7 and 5.8 show the resulting member sizes.

5.13
BRACE MEMBERS 3 AND 2: FIRST STORY
Brace 3: Design for Compression
Load combination [9] of the computer analysis produces the 1.5 times magnied axial compression in the member per CHAP. 22, DIV. IV, 9.4.a.1:
Pmax 275 kips
KL 13.5 ft
The member compressive strength per (9.2.b) is

* The 0.8 multiplier of cPn is from 9.2.b, Bracing Members, CHAP. 22, DIV. IV.
5.13
145
Figure 5.7 Member sizes not complying with 1997 UBC, CHAP. 22, DIV. IV.
0.8c Pn Pmax
To use the column table of the LRFD Specication, we must divide the above
equation by 0.8 to obtain
Pu c Pn
Pmax
0.8
275
344 kips
0.8
From Part 3, column design tables of the Specication, we obtain the sizes
of the square structural tubing with KL 13.5 ft that provide an axial strength
equal to or larger than Pu:
5
1
8 8 38 (37.69) and 10 10
16 (40.35) 7 7
2 (42.05)
Although the design convention would utilize the lightest sections, that is, 8
5
8 38 (37.69) and 10 10
16 , such choices would be at fault.
146
Figure 5.8 Final member sizes in compliance with 1997 UBC seismic regulations,
including CHAP. 22, DIV. IV.
Clearly CHAP. 22, DIV. IV, 9.2.d, calls for a at width-to-wall thickness
ratio not exceeding
110
110
16.22
Fy
46
The 8 8 38 structural tubing has a ratio of
8 3(83 )
38
18.3 16.22
5
and the 10 10
16 structural tubing a ratio of
5.13
9.06
5
16
147
32 16.22
Thus none of these options is acceptable per CHAP. 22, DIV. IV, 9.2.d.
The next lightest structural tubing to meet the above criteria is the 7 7
12 section with a compressive strength Pu 375 kips which, in addition,
has a thicker wall that allows a stronger weld. This will in turn reduce the
size of connection and the gusset plate. The 7 7 12 section has a at
width-to-wall-thickness ratio of
7 3(12 )
12
11 16.2
The 1997 UBC requires that bracing members have

L
720
720
106
r
Fy
46
L
12
13.5
62 106
r
2.62
Brace 2: Design for Tension
The maximum axial tensile force in brace 2 is

Pu 245 kips
given by 1.5(0.9D 1.0E) load combination [10] of the computer analysis,
that is, basic load combination (3-6) augmented 1.5 times, per CHAP. 22,
DIV. IV, 9.4.a.1.
Two steps are involved in proving that the tensile resistance of the brace
is larger than Pu:
1. Pu t Fy Ag (with t 0.9)
2. Pu t Fu Ae t Fu (UAn) (with t 0.75)
where Ag gross sectional area
An sectional net area
U 1 X /L, Equation (B3-2), Section B3 of the Specication
For complex and buildup sections see also Section B3 of the Commentary of
the Specication. To establish U we must know the length of the weld and
148
hence the length of the connection, L. This is determined in the next step,
discussed in Section 5.14 below.
Using the recommendations in the Commentary of the Specication, the
tubing section will be considered as made up of four equal angles (right-hand
side of Figure 5.9) of 3 312 -in. legs, 12 in. thick. The shorter legs grip the
(assumed) 1-in.-thick gusset plate. Final design will actually produce a 34 -in.
gusset plate. Carrying out the required computations yields
X 3.0 0.9 2.1 in.
Assuming a connection length L 14 in. veried by the weld design,
U1
2.1
0.85
14
Therefore
(a) Pu t Fy Ag (0.9)(46)(12.4) 513 kips
(b) Pu t Fu Ae t Fu (U)(An) (0.75)(58)(0.85)(12.4) 458 kips
245 kips
5.14
DESIGN OF FILLET WELD CONNECTION
The llet weld connection will be designed for the maximum brace reactions
transmitted to the connections by components 2 and 3 in this bay, bound by
the external columns and by the rst- and third-oor levels.
The design of the connection is controlled by Section 9.3.a, CHAP. 22,
DIV. IV, of UBC 1997, which calls for the lesser value of the following:
1. Design axial strength of bracing member
2. Force in brace resulting from load combinations (3-7) or (3-8) calling
for 0.4R 2.56 times the magnied earthquake load:
1.2D 0.5L 0.4R E
(3-7)
0.9D 0.4R E
(3-8)
or
3. Maximum force indicated by analysis that is transferred to the brace by
the system
Among the three options, we will use the design forces given by (3-7) and
(3-8) for the design of the connection.
5.15
DESIGN OF GUSSET PLATE: FIRST AND SECOND STORIES
149
Note that options 1 and 3 would produce forces larger than option 2, which
represents the lesser value of the three options. Option 1 produces 458 kips,
and option 3, which includes the vertical component of the earthquake, Ev,
produces 453 kips axial force [12]. The design axial force is 450 kips given
by formula (3-8), computer analysis load combination [14].
Assuming a 38 -in. llet weld, the effective throat thickness is
0.707 0.375 0.2651 in.
The capacity of the weld is given as
Fw (0.75)(0.6 70)(0.2651)(1.0) 8.35 kips/in.
Having four equal-length welds connecting the gusset plate to the slotted
tubing, the required weld length is
L
450
13.5 in.
4 8.35
13.5 in. 14 in. provided
Use 14-in. llet welds with end returns per (J2-2b) of the Specication. The
reader is reminded of llet weld terminations at the end of the section, which
refers also to cyclic loading.
5.15
We will design gusset plates for the maximum brace reactions transmitted to
the connections by components 2 and 3 in this bay bound by the external
columns and rst- and third-oor levels. Figure 5.9 shows the geometry of a
typical brace-to-column gusset plate.
Design for Compression
The maximum axial compression load is given as

Pu 450 kips
Computer analysis load combination [14]
The length of the theoretical (unrestrained) line of bending is 24 in. (CHAP.

22, DIV. IV, 9.3.c.2). The compression strength of the 34 -in. plate is
Pu c Fy Ag (0.85)(36)(24 0.75) 550 kips 450 kips
150
Figure 5.9 Detail of gusset plates. Dimensions at roof level are shown in parentheses.
Design for Block Shear
The design strength of a connection is not always controlled by the strength

of the weld connecting the brace to the gusset plate or by the tensile or
compressive strength of the plate of a specic boundary. It may instead be
controlled by block shear, as described below. Failure may occur by tearing
out a portion (block) of steel from the gusset plate. This situation occurs when
the load in the attached brace member increases and a potential failure surface, marked a, b, c, d in Figure 5.9, is created weak enough to promote
block shear failure.
Mechanism of Block Shear Failure
There are two modes of block shear failure (J4.3), Part 6 of the Specication:
1. When the applied brace force is sufciently large, it may cause tension
yielding along bc if this area is relatively small compared to ab and cd
areas subjected to shear. The reader will note that such is the case for
the gusset plates of the project. Following tension yielding along bc a
sudden shear fracture failure will occur along the sheared areas represented by lines ab and cd.
2. Should the sheared areas ab and cd be small and the tensile area bc be
relatively large, shear yielding along ab and cd will occur rst, followed
by tension fracture along bc.
5.15
151
The LRFD Specication provides a test equation: If 0.6Fu Anv Fu Ant, we

have tension yielding and shear fracture (case 1) and the following LRFD
equation should be used:
Rn [0.6Fu Anv Fy Agt] LRFD equation (J4-3b), Specification
where Agv
Agt
Anv
Ant
gross area subjected to shear

gross area subjected to tension
net area subjected to shear
net area subjected to tension
0.75
If Fu Ant 0.6Fu Anv, we will have shear yielding and tension fracture and, in
this case, we should use LRFD equation (J4-3a) of the Specication:
Rn [0.6Fy Agv Fu Ant]
We will now apply the above outlined procedures to the gusset plate design.
The maximum tensile force applied to the connection per formula (3-8) of
the 1997 UBC, calling for a (0.4)R 2.56 Eh earthquake force magnication,
is
Pu 0.9D (0.4)RE 430 kips
Computer load combination [15]
In our case
Agv Anv 2 (14 0.75) 21.0 in.2
Agt Ant (7.0)(0.75) 5.25 in.2
The Test
0.6 Fu Anv (0.6)(58)(21.0) 731 kips (58)(5.25) 304 kips

Tension yielding will occur coupled with shear fracture; thus we must use
Equation (J4-3b) of the Specication:
Rn (0.75)[(0.6)(58)(21.0) (36)(5.25)] 690 kips 430 kips applied
The connection is safe against block shear.

Figure 5.9 shows the dimensions of the gusset plates connecting the brace to
the column. Gusset plates at the base are similar but reversed. Figure 5.10
shows details of the brace-to-beam gusset plate connections.
152
Figure 5.10 Gusset plate detail at second oor.
5.16
BRACE MEMBER 13: THIRD STORY
The maximum axial load per 9.4.a.1, CHAP. 22, DIV. IV, results from load
combination [9] of the computer analysis:
1.5(1.2D 0.5L 1.0E) 1.8D 0.75L 1.5E
that is, from 1.5 times the magnied forces represented by load combination
(12-5), 1612.2.1, of UBC 1997:
Pmax 176 kips
According to CHAP. 22, DIV. IV, 9.2.b, the design strength of a bracing
member in axial compression shall not exceed 0.8c Pn 0.8Pu. Thus the
relationship gives
Pu
Pmax 176
220 kips
0.8
0.8
From the column design tables of Part 3 of the Specication with KL 13.5
ft, we have the following choices for the lightest square tubing that ts this
load:
5.16
BRACE MEMBER 13: THIRD STORY
153
6 6 38 (27.48) with a capacity of 225 kips

5
7 7
16 (27.59) with a capacity of 250 kips
8 8 14 (25.82) with a capacity of 231 kips

Of these, only the 6 6 38 tubing qualies for the 1997 UBC at-width
wall thickness ratio of
110
Fy
16.2
(9.2.d)
Using the 3t deduction rule of 2.2.1.b of the Specication for the design of
steel hollow structural sections of the AISC (April 15, 1997), [6 3(38 )]/(38 )
13 16.2.
Finally, we have to comply with the member slenderness provisions of
UBC 1997:
L
720
106
r
Fy
As r 2.27 for the 6 6 38 tubing and L 13.5 ft,
L
12
13.5
72 106
r
2.27
The 6 6 38 brace complies with the 1997 UBC.
Design for Tension
The maximum tensile force per CHAP. 22, DIV. IV, 9.4.a.1, of the 1997 UBC:
Pu 157 kips
As stated, the governing equations of the Specication are
(a) Pu t Fy Ag
(b) Pu t Fu(U)(Ae)
where
[10]
154
U1
X
1.82
1
0.86
L
13
with
X 1.82 in.
L 13.0 in.
and the area of the 6 6 38 structural tubing is

Ag Ae 8.08 in.2
From Table 3-41 of Specication
Thus
(a) Pu (0.9)(46)(8.08) 334 kips
(b) Pu (0.75)(58)(0.86)(8.08) 302 kips 157 kips applied
The 6 6 38 structural tubing has adequate design strength
in both tension and compression.
5.17 FILLET WELD DESIGN: THIRD- AND FOURTH-STORY

GUSSET PLATES
We will design the llet weld connection for the maximum brace reactions
transmitted to the connections by components 12 and 13 in this bay bound
by the external columns, third oor, and roof (CHAP. 22, DIV. IV, 9.3.a.2).
The maximum load for the connection design is
Pu 288 kips
corresponding to the 1997 UBC special load combination of

1.2D 0.5L 0.4RE 1.2D 0.5L 2.56E
(3-7)
The capacity of a 14 llet weld/in. is 5.567 kips/in. with four sides of the
tubinggusset plate contact welded. The required length of llet weld is
L
288
12.94 in.
4 5.567
say 13 in.
5.18
5.18
GUSSET PLATE DESIGN: THIRD AND FOURTH STORIES
155
GUSSET PLATE DESIGN: THIRD AND FOURTH STORIES
We will design the gusset plates for the maximum brace reactions transmitted
to the connections by components 12 and 13 in this bay bound by the external
columns, third oor, and roof.
The maximum compressive force is

Pu 288 kips
The length of the theoretical line of bending (5.9) as dened by 9.3.c.2,

CHAP. 22, DIV. IV, is
L 24 in.
Assuming a 12 -in. plate, the area of resistance is
A 0.50 24.0 12 in.2
The compressive strength of the plate is
Pu c FeAg c Fy Ag (0.85)(36)(12) 367 kips 288 kips
The plate is safe in compression.
Design for Block Shear
The maximum tensile force acting on the connection following formula (38), CHAP. 22, DIV. IV, which calls for a 256% increase in lateral seismic
load, is
Pu 275 kips
The potential failure surfaces are shown in Figure 5.9 with

ab 13.0 in.
bc 6.0 in.
cd 13 in.
156
The Test
With
Anv 2(13)(0.5) 13.0 in.2
Ant (6.0)(0.5) 3.0 in.2
0.6Fu Anv (0.6)(58)(13.0) 452 kips Fu Ant (58)(3.0) 174 kips

tension yielding and shear fracture will occur. Therefore we must use Equation (J4-3b):
Rn 0.75[(0.6)(58)(13) (36)(3.0)] 420 kips 275 kips
The plate is safe for block-shear failure.
5.19
VERTICAL COMPONENT
So far we have not addressed the vertical component of the design earthquake,
Ev. For ASD design, Ev is not taken into consideration and may be taken as
zero (1630.1.1). Not so when you are doing LRFD steel design. In that basic
formula
E Eh Ev
Ev 0.5CaID
(30-1)
Per 1630.1.1, item 4
Caution. The component Ev is the tributary dead load acting on the frame.
It would be inappropriate to include the weight of some other portions of the
building in Ev, which applies to the individual frame because:
1. A large portion of the building mass is carried by the internal gravity
load-resisting system.
2. The internal gravity load-resisting system consists of simple beams and
girders that are attached with a pivoting mechanism to the lateral-forceresisting system [special concentrically braced frams (SCBFs)] that provides support to them in the lateral direction only, that is, against the
horizontal component of the earthquake, Eh.
3. The gravity-resisting structural components on the [special concentrically braced frames (SCBFs)] are free to move up and down in an
earthquake without absorbing any appreciable vertical inertial loads
coming from the gravity load-resisting system.
4. Only the dead load representing the weight of the braced frame structure
and portions of oor attached to it will contribute to the Ev component
acting on the structure.
5.20
5.20
COLUMN DESIGN
157
COLUMN DESIGN
As stated before, the column requirements are given in CHAP. 22, DIV. IV,
under 6.1, Column Strength:
6.1.a. Axial compression loads:
1.2PD 0.5PL 0.2PS 0.4R PE c Pn
(6-1)

Exception: The load factor on PL in Load Combination 6-1 shall equal 1.0
for garages, areas occupied as places of public assembly, and all areas where
the live load is greater than 100 psf.
6.1.b. Axial tension loads:
0.9PD 0.4R PE t Pn
(6-2)

of the following:
Before applying (6-1) or (6-2) let us reect on the following:

PE means the axial load induced by both lateral Eh and vertical Ev components of the earthquake.
The effect of Eh itself is magnied by . In our case equals unity.
The Ev is dened as Ev (0.5CaI)D. For our project:
Ca 0.48
D
I1
From our project earthquake analysis.

Tributary dead load on structure
Seismic importance factor (per Table 16-K)
Thus the coefcient for Ev, in parentheses is

(0.5CaI) (0.5)(0.48)(1.0) 0.24
According to formulas (6-1) and (6-2), both horizontal and vertical earthquake
components of Pe must be magnied by the 0.4 R 0.4 6.4 2.56
158
magnication factor. The earthquake force magnication has been taken care
of in computer analysis load combinations [12] and [13].
Note that 1.2D (2.56)(0.24)D 1.8144D applied to load combination
[12] and formula (6-1), CHAP. 22, DIV. IV, 6.1.a, can be written as
1.8144PD 0.5PL 2.56PEh c Pn
where PEh indicates the axial component caused by the lateral (horizontal)
earthquake load. Similarly, formula (6-2) of CHAP. 22, DIV. IV, can be rewritten as
0.9PD (0.4 6.4)0.24PD 2.56PEh t Pn
0.2856PD 2.56 PEh t Pn
Design of First-Story Column for Compression (Structural
Component 4)
(a) Design of W12 96 for Combined Axial Force and Bending about
Major Axis The maximum axial compression complying with CHAP. 22,
DIV. IV, formula (6-1), is
Pu 691.0 kips
coupled with
Mu 16.0 kip-ft
The column is bent in single curvature so that
Cm 1.0
For both major and minor axes, KL 13.5 ft 162 in., with
Mnt 16.0 kip-ft
The design parameters of the W12 96 are
Ag 28.2 in.2
rx 5.44 in.
Zx 147 in.3
Using the LRFD equation (C1-1) the magnied moment is

Mu B1Mnt
5.20
COLUMN DESIGN
159
where B1 is given by the LRFD equation (C1-2),*

B1
Cm
1 Pu /Pe1
where Pu is the maximum limit axial load and Pe1 2EI/(KL)2, the Euler
buckling strength. Values of Pe1 /Ag can be determined from Table 8 of the
Specication, then multiplied by Agross to obtain Pe1.
KLx
162
29.78
rx
5.44
(KLx must be modied as the tables are built for the minor axis)
Pe1
B1
1.0
1.082
1 691/9108
Pe1
A (323)(28.2) 9108 kips
Ag g
Mu 1.082(16) 17.3 kip-ft

Since Lp 12.9 ft Lb 13.5 ft Lr 61.4 ft,
b Mp 397 kip-ft
b Mr 255 kip-ft
and BF 2.91 (load factor design selection table 4-18, Part 4 of the Specication). Applying the LRFD equations (F1-2) and (H1-1a) yields
b Mnx Cb [b Mp BF(Lb Lp)]
1.0 [397 2.91(13.5 12.9)] 395 kip-ft
Having evaluated the moment term for the LRFD equation (H1-1a), the axial
force component c Pn needs to be determined from the column design tables
of Part 3 of the Specication. To achieve this, the value of KLx obtained above
must be modied as the tables are constructed for the minor axis. The modication factor is
* The presence of axial force coupled with bending will give rise to secondary moments that
augment the initially applied bending moment Mnt. The magnication factor to account for the
overall effect is B1. The reader will recognize that the secondary moment is caused by axial force
times the eccentricity (P effect) represented by the deected elastic curve caused by the initial
bending Mnt.
160
rx
1.76
ry
Therefore we will enter the column table with an effective KL:
KL
KLx
1.0(13.5)
7.67 ft
rx /ry
1.76
c Pn 823 kips
Using the LRFD equation (H1-1a) from the Specication,
Pu
8 Mux
691 8 17.3
0.878 1.0
c Pn 9 b Mnx
823 9 395
(b) Design of Column about Minor Axis
3-24, Part 3 of the Specication,
From the column design table
c Pny 747 kips 691 kips applied
The column has adequate strength to counter the maximum

compressive design loads about the principal axes.
Design of Third-Story Column for Compression (Structural
Component 14)
(a) Design of W12 40 Column for Combined Axial Force and Bending
about Major Axis The maximum axial compression complying with CHAP.
22, DIV. IV of the 1997 UBC, formula (6-1), gives
Pu 128 kips
with end moments

M1 25 kip-ft
M2 32 kip-ft
The column is bent in double curvature. By the LRFD equation (C1-3),
Cm 0.6 0.4
M1
25
0.6 0.4
0.287
M2
32
Note that the ratio of moments is positive if beam and column are bent in
double curvature. The design parameters of the W12 40 are
5.20
Ag 11.8 in.2 rx 5.13 in.
COLUMN DESIGN
161
Zx 57.5 in.3
From Table 8 of the Specication with KLx /rx 162/5.13 31.58,

Pe1 287.2 (11.8) 3389.0 kips
B1
Cm
0.287
0.298 1.0
1 Pu /Pe1 1 128/3389
Use B1 1, the magnied moment by the LRFD equation (C1-1),

Mux B1Mnt (1.0)(32.0) 32.0 kip-ft
Since Lp 8.0 ft Lb 13.5 ft Lr 26.5 ft,
b Mp 155 kip-ft
b Mr 101 kip-ft
and BF 2.92 (load factor design selection table 4-19, Part 4 of the Specication). Thus
b Mnx Cb[b Mp BF(Lb Lp)]
Because the moments cause a reversed deformation curvature, we will use

the LRFD equation (F1-3) to determine Cb:
Cb
12.5 Mmax
2.5Mmax 3MA 4MB 3MC
12.5(32)
1.09
2.5(32) 3(30) 4(29) 3(27)
where MA, MB, MC are moment values at the 14 , 12 , and 34 points of the segment.
Thus
b Mnx 1.09[155 2.92(13.5 8.0)] 151 kip-ft
For the LRFD interaction equations we need the value of c Pn. To obtain
this value from the column design tables of Part 3 of the Specication, we
will enter a modied KL value into the table:
KL
Thus
KLx
1.0(13.5)
5.08 ft
rx /ry
2.66
162
c Pn 340 kips
By the LRFD interaction equation (H1-1a), we obtain
Pu
8 Mux
128 8 32
0.565 1.0
c Pn 9 b Mnx
340 9 151
The column has adequate strength for the combined axial
compression and bending about the major axis.
(b) Design of Column About Minor Axis In this step no moment is coupled with the axial compression. From column design table 3-25, Part 3 of
the Specication,
ePny 249 kips 128 kips applied
The column has adequate strength to resist the maximum design

loads about the principal axes.
Design of Columns for Tension
At this point the reader is encouraged to review the concepts and steps outlined in Section 4.26, Design of Columns. Our next step is to design the
columns for tension; this will involve structural elements 1 and 21 of the
mathematical model of the computer analysis. The same LRFD equations
(H1-1a) and (H1-1b) presented for compression design will apply for tension.
No P effect, and hence no magnication factor such as B1, will be used
because, due to cyclic reversals caused by earthquakes and unlike in the case
of axial compression, any initial postbuckling or moment-induced crookedness will be reduced, if not eliminated, by the tensile force, which tends to
straighten out the deected chord under tension (See Figures 5.11, 5.12, and
5.13.)
Figure 5.11 Control points of the idealized stressstrain diagram.
5.20
COLUMN DESIGN
163
Figure 5.12 Deformed beam shapes determining unsupported length design parameters.
Design of First-Story Column for Tension (Structural Component 1)
(a) Design of W12 96 for Combined Axial Force and Bending about Its
Major Axis (Ag 28.2 in.2) The maximum axial tensile force, mandated by
formula (6-2) of CHAP. 22, DIV. IV, 2211.4, UBC 1997, is Pu 636 kips,
load combination [13] of the computer analysis, which includes vertical uplift
component Ev 0.5CaID, formula (30-1), CHAP. 16, DIV. IV, of UBC 1997,
associated with 16.0 kip-ft bending moment:
1. Bending component term of the interaction equation:
Lp 12.9 ft Lb 13.5 ft Lr 61.4 ft
b Mp 397 kip-ft
From LRFD selection table 4-18, Part 4
b Mr 255 kip-ft
BF 2.91
Figure 5.13 Postbuckled deformed shapes: (a) under compression; (b) under tension.
164
Moment connection corresponding to Lp Lb Lr:

b Mnx Cb[b Mp BF(Lb Lp)] bFy Z
b Mnx 1.0[397 2.91(13.5 12.9)] 395 kip-ft
2. Axial force term of the LRFD interaction equation:

t Pn t Fy Ag (0.9)(36)(28.2) 914 kips
Pu
636
0.70 0.2
t Pn 914
Use Equation (H1-1a)
Using the Specication interaction equation (H1-1a) yields
Pu
8 Mux
8 16.0
0.70
0.74 1.0
t Pn 9 b Mnx
9 395
(b) Design for Tension about Minor Axis (No Moments Present) To evaluate t Pn, two conditions must be checked:
1. t Pn t Fy Ag
with t 0.9
t Pn (0.9)(36)(28.2) 914 kips 636 kips GOVERNS
2. t Pn t FuUAg
with t 0.75
t Pn (0.75)(58)(0.9)(28.2) 1104 kips 636 kips
The column is safe against uplift-caused tension.
Design of Third-Story Column for Tension (Structural Component 21)
The maximum design axial tensile force, mandated by CHAP. 22, DIV. IV,
2211.4, formula (6-2), is represented by computer analysis load combination
[13]. Two issues will be addressed:
(a) Combined Axial Force and Bending about Major Axis The maximum
axial tensile force is
Pu 106 kips
associated with
Mux,max 18.0 kip-ft
Mux,min 15.0 kip-ft
5.20
Cb
COLUMN DESIGN
165
12.5 Mmax
2.5Mmax 3MA 4MB 3MC
12.5(18.0)
1.07
2.5(18.0) 3(17.3) 4(16.5) 3(15.8)
The properties of the W12 40 column are

Ag 11.8 in.2
rx 5.13 in.
ry 1.93 in.
Lp 8.0 ft Lb 13.5 ft Lr 26.5 ft

b Mp 155 kip-ft
b Mr 101 kip-ft
BF 2.92
The moment correction corresponding to

b Mn Cb[b Mp BF(Lb Lp)]
b Mn 1.07[155 2.92(13.5 8.0)] 149 kip-ft
Using the Specication interaction equation (H1-1a) yields

Pu
106
0.278 0.2
t Pn 382
Pu
8 Mux
8 18.0
0.278
0.385 1.0
t Pn 9 b Mnx
9 149
(b) Design of Column for Tension about Minor Axis In the absence of
bending moment,
Pu 106 kips
The following capacity equations apply:
t Pn t Fy Ag
with t 0.9
t Pn t FuUAg
with t 0.75
t Fy Ag 0.9(36)(11.8) 382 kips GOVERNS

t Fu Ag (0.75)(58)(0.9)(11.8) 462 kips
166
The balance of this calculation yields

t Fy Ag 382 kips 106 kips applied
The column has adequate tensile resistance about the principal axes.
Note: Detailed design presentation of the second- and fourth-story columns
(structural elements 9 and 19) is not included since it can be veried that
these components are less critically stressed than their counterparts beneath
at the corresponding lower story. For instance, while size of the second-story
column was kept unchangedas was the rst-story columnthe reader will
note a dramatic drop in the member force as compared to the column below.
Reducing column size at each oor was avoided because frequent splicing
would increase cost and slow down construction.
5.21
COLUMN SPLICE DESIGN: THIRD FLOOR
Note the change in column dimension above the third oor to compensate
for reduced forces at the upper levels. A pair of splice plates to counter uplift
will achieve effective connection. Partial penetration weld will be provided
to butting column webs to resist moments. In compliance with CHAP. 22,
DIV. IV, 6.1.b, of UBC 1997, we will design the splice for uplift resulting
from load combination (6-2) of CHAP. 22, DIV. IV:
Pmin 0.90PDL 0.4R PE t Pn
where the subscript min refers to forces associated with maximum uplift. The
provisions call for a design to follow the applicable specic detailed systems
design requirements of CHAP. 22, DIV. IV, 6.1 and 6.2 of UBC 1997.
Assume Pmin 109 kipsfrom load combination [13], computer analysis,
and the associated moment at the splice40 in. above oor level (TOS)
(CHAP. 22, DIV. IV, 6.2.b):
Mx 4.75 kip-ft
However, the partial-penetration welds of the column anges must be able to
resist 150% of the applied force/moment with w 0.8 and Fw 0.6FEXX
(CHAP. 22, DIV. IV, 6.2.b.1). Therefore the magnied moment is
Mux 1.5 4.75 7.20 kip-ft
We start our design by determining the dimensions of the splice plate.
3
Assuming a thickness t
16 in. and using the basic strength relationship,
5.22
BEAM DESIGN
167
12 Pu t Fy Ag t Fytw (0.9)(36)(0.1875)w 6.075w
106
8.73 in.
2(6.075)
say 9-in.-wide plate
Pu 2t FuUAg 2(0.75)(58)(0.75)(0.1875)(9.0) 110 kips 106 kips

The plates have sufcient strength.
3
The two
16 9 plates will be welded, one to each side of the column web.
To obtain the required plate length, the weld needs to be designed. By choosing a 18 -in. weld size, we will determine the required weld length L and
associated plate length. The design strength of the weld across the throat of
an 18 -in. llet weld in shear per 1-in. length is given by
0.707twFw 0.707t(w)(0.6FEXX) 0.707(81 )(0.75)(0.6 70)

2.7838 k/in.
where t weld size. Therefore the required weld length with four lengths to
match two splice plates is
L
106
9.52 in.
4 2.7838
say 10 in.
The induced moment, magnied by 150%, will be counteracted by a 38 -in., 8in.-long partial-penetration weld (the width of the upper column) with a exural strength over 10 times larger than applied.
It was felt necessary to provide a weld size of 38 in. larger than mandated
by strength considerations. The reader is reminded that the column ange
thickness of the lower column is 0.9 in. and that specifying a too-small weld
might result in a brittle, unsafe weld on account of the cooling-off effect of
the mass of the column ange. Table J2.3, Part 6 of the Specication, gives
5
3
a minimum weld size of
16 in. for a thickness of
4 1 in. Figure 5.14 shows
details of the column splice.
5.22
BEAM DESIGN
Design of Second-Floor Beam
Following the provisions of CHAP. 22, DIV. IV, 9.4.a.3: A beam intersected
by V braces shall be capable of supporting all tributary dead and live loads
assuming the bracing is not present. The beam will be designed as a simply
168
Figure 5.14 Column splice.
supported beam with L 19.0 ft to resist said load. Furthermore and following CHAP. 22, DIV. IV, 9.4.a.4, we will provide fully effective lateral support
to the beam at half of its span, that is, the point of intersection with the V
braces. With careful design selection,
Lb 9.5 ft Lp 10.7 ft
the full plastic moment of resistance Mp can be expected from the beam.
Factored gravity loads acting on the beam are
Dead load:
1.2D 1.2(0.8) 0.96 kip-ft
Live load:
1.6L 1.6(0.7) 1.12 kip-ft

2.08 kip-ft
However, per CHAP. 22, DIV. IV, 9.4.a.1: The design strength of the brace
members shall be at least 1.5 times the required strength using Load Com-
5.22
BEAM DESIGN
169
binations 3-5 and 3-6. We will multiply both moment and axial force in the
brace member by 1.5. The maximum simply supported bending moment is
Mu 1.5
wL2
2.08 19.02
1.5
141 kip-ft
8
8
The maximum associated axial force acting at the centerline of the beam is
given as
Px 15 kips
From load case [3], computer analysis
Pux 1.5(15) 22 kips

The beam will be designed for combined bending and axial force about the
major axis with
KL 9.5 ft
and for pure axial load about the potential out-of-plane buckling about its
minor axis. Going back to the LRFD equations (H1-1a) and (H1-1b) and the
LRFD moment magnication equation (C1-5), the properties of the W10
54 are
Ag 15.8 in.2
rx 4.37 in.
KLx 9.5 12
26
rx
4.37
ry 2.56 in.
KL
44.5
ry
with
Pu
22
0.05 0.2
c Pn 465
Use the LRFD equation (H1-1b).
From Table 8 of the Specication with KL/rx 26,
Pe1Ag 423.4 kips
B1
Cm
1.0
1.055
1 Pu /Pe1 1 22/423.4
Mux 1.055 141 149 kip-ft
From LRFD equation (C1-5)
By applying the LRFD interaction equation (H1-1b) with
170
Lb 9.5 ft Lb 10.7
full plasticity is achieved and
b Mp 180 kip-ft
From LRFD selection table 4-19,

Part 4, Specication
c Pn 465 kips
Remember that c Pn comes from the column design table 3-27 of the Specication but with a KLx modied by the rx /ry factor for the major axis.
The beam is safe in carrying the factored gravity loads
without support from the braces.
Magnitude of Postbuckling Effect
Figures 5.9 and 5.10 illustrate the design-detailing requirements for the outof-plane buckling of the brace.
The next issue is the design of beams for inverted-V or chevron bracing.
In this structural system the braces intersect at the midspan of the oor beam.
There are two important aspects for consideration:
1. The 1997 UBC clearly reiterates C707.4.1 of the SEAOC Recommended Lateral Force Requirements and Commentary that the beam
should be capable of supporting both dead and live loads without the
help of the brace system in the event of a loss in brace capacity. The
1997 UBC provisions for safeguarding such an event state: The beam
intersected by braces shall be continuous between columns (CHAP.
22, DIV. IV, 9.4.a.2), A beam intersected by V braces shall be capable
of supporting all tributary dead and live loads assuming the bracing is
not present (CHAP. 22, DIV. IV, 9.4.a.3), and The top and bottom
anges of the beam at the point of intersection of V braces shall be
designed to support a lateral force equal to 1.5 percent of the nominal
beam ange strength (Fy bct) (CHAP. 22, DIV. IV, 9.4.a.4).
2. At the postbuckling stage, when the internal compressive force in the
compression brace element will be smaller than the tensile force in the
stiffer tensile brace, the unbalanced vertical component will impact on
the horizontal connecting beam, which could cause a plastic hinge and
large vertical beam deformation at the intersection.
Unlike the 1994 UBC, the 1997 edition is silent about the magnitude
of such unbalanced force and beam stiffness/strength requirement to
counter such unbalanced force. In reviewing research data the issue
appears complex.
5.22
BEAM DESIGN
171
Among important parameters impacting on one another are the driving

function of the earthquake (frequency, magnitude, relationship between p and
s waves), the relative stiffness of brace and beam elements, and the slenderness ratio of the braces.
A rough and somewhat simplied picture of the mechanism is as follows:
A marked deterioration of compression brace member stiffness develops after
a number of cycles. The stiffness/resistance of the compression brace can
drop as low as 30% of the initial stiffness of the brace. A great number of
researchers and the SEAOC Recommendations agree on this value (C708.4).5
There is a consensus among researchers and design engineers that the
tensile brace retains, during the postbuckling phase, a stiffness and resistance
greater than the compression brace. However, there seems to be less agreement over quantitative determination of the exact value of the tensile force
in the tensile brace that is coupled with a reduced compression in the corresponding compressive brace.69
Some options for the analysis are as follows:
(a) Energy methods.
(b) Compatibility analysis based on inelastic deformations.
(c) Strength evaluation taking into account the maximum moment of resistance Mp of the beam at the brace intersection. What makes this
option viable and relatively easy to apply in an actual design is that
researchers and SEAOC agree on a 30% compression brace resistance
as the lower bound.
We will apply method (c) to the oor beams of our project.
Assume the story drift is still small in relation to the dimensions of the
structure. Then the unknown force in the diagonal tension brace and its vertical component can be calculated from the relationship
Mp 14 (T sin 0.3Pn sin )L 14 [sin (T 0.3Pn)L]
where is the angle measured from the horizontal to the centerline of the
inclined brace, T is the axial force developed in the tension brace, and Pn is
the nominal strength of the compression brace before postbuckling.
Applying the method for the second-oor beam of the SCBF prototype of
our project,
sin
128
0.79
162.6
The nominal compression strength of the 7 7 12 structural tubing is

derived as
172
Pn
Pu
375
441 kips
c 0.85
From column design table 3-27, Part 3,

Specication
0.3 0.3(441) 132.5 kips

The nominal plastic moment of resistance Mp of the W10 54 beam (LRFD
selection table 4-19, Part 4, Specication) is
Mp
b Mp 180
200 kip-ft
b
0.9
L 18.94 ft
(clear span between columns)
Therefore the maximum tensile force that can develop in the tensile chord
simultaneous to postbuckling of the compression brace and full plastic yielding of the connecting beam is
T 132.5
4Mp
4(200)
53.5
(sin )(L) (0.79)(18.94)
T 53.5 132.5 186 kips

and the vertical unbalanced component impacting at the midspan of the beam
is given as
P
sin T 0.3 u 0.79(186 132.5) 42.2 kips
c
The reaction by the relatively light dead and live loads on the still functioning
braces was ignored.
It is worth noting that:
1. Full lateral support to beam anges has been provided for the value of
0.015 Fy bt at the midspan of the beam where the CG of braces intersects the CG of the beam.
2. By proper choice of the beam the unsupported length of the W12 54
beam Lb 9.5 ft Lp 10.7 ft, full development of plastic moment
Mp can be expected at the beambrace intersection, facilitating formation of a true plastic hinge.
The results of research work aimed at identifying weaknesses in the
conventional CBF design and developing a much improved SCBF
adapted to strong ground motion seismic areas have been briey described earlier in this chapter in Section 5.10.
5.22
BEAM DESIGN
173
Associated with the research activities, studies have also been conducted
about the magnitude and nature of internal forces induced in the family of
the conventional inverted-V braced frame under static loading.10
Six congurations were studied involving different brace arrangements plus
the addition of vertical struts at intersecting points of the brace. Among these
are the arrangements termed STG and its ZIP variant, a zipper type of
conguration. (See Figures 5.15a, b, and c.) The magnitude of the internal
forces was smaller than those carried by its cousins, in particular the V-braced
frame, named VREG (conventional V CBF).
Despite modest savings achieved using the STG or ZIP, the problem of
energy dissipation remains at the anchor points of the structure where an
elastic medium, the steel structure, meets a virtually innitely stiff medium
concrete footings or basement walldemanding a high concentration of energy dissipation. The sudden change in stiffnessslender steel members
meeting large masses of unyielding concretewill cause even a welldesigned structure to undergo brittle fracture failure.
Such was the case for the Oviatt Library at the California State University
in Northridge, where 4-in.-thick steel base plates of the concentrically braced
frame structure shattered in brittle fracture, in addition to other visible damage: bending of 134 -in. anchor bolts and punching, shear-type failure cracks
around the perimeter of columns solidly welded to base plates. This was most
likely due to lack of sufcient energy dissipation at the crucial anchor points
in an otherwise conservatively designed structure.
This brings us to a new eld of development: energy-dissipating mechanisms. The purpose of these is to improve energy dissipation of the structure.
Following the Loma Prieta and Northridge earthquakes it became evident that,
contrary to general belief, steel structures possess relatively small inherent
damping unless heavynonengineered architectural or engineered stiff elements such as concrete or masonry wallshelp in reducing the prolonged
swaying and time-dependent story drifts that occur during an earthquake11:
During the Loma Prieta earthquake (M 7.1), the East Wing of the 13-story
Santa Clara Civic Center Ofce Building exhibited strong, prolonged building
Figure 5.15 Variations of concentric braced frame (CBF).
174
response. Results from a study conducted after the earthquake showed a lack of
inherent damping to be the primary cause for the buildings poor dynamic behavior. . . . researchers determined the building had very low inherent damping
(1%) and that bracing alone would not solve the problem experienced during
the Loma Prieta Earthquake. One unusual feature was the long duration of strong
vibration (available records measured response in excess of 80 seconds with
little sign of decay and a torsional beat measured at 100 seconds). [From ref.
12.]
Although the consensus among engineers is still 23% inherent critical

damping, researchers involved with the evaluation of the dynamic response
of structures during an earthquake believe that the actual inherent damping
of steel structures having only light curtain walls built in the last decades is
considerably lower and seldom exceeds 12 %. The general thought about the
causes for such low actual damping values is the successful elimination of
massive internal and external masonry and concrete architectural walls, stiff
features to reduce the mass and impurity of structural response in modern
earthquake engineering. It seems paradoxical that such commendable engineering effort leads to another issue: how to provide added damping to deprived structures. In Chapter 13 of this book we will discuss some of the new
trends in engineering and project design.1315
5.23
COLUMN BASE-PLATE DESIGN
The design discussed here involves two issues:

1. Design the base plate for maximum axial compression. The maximum
axial design force is 690 kips [12], derived from formula (30-1), CHAP.
16, DIV. IV, 1630.1.1 of the 1997 UBC:
E Eh Ev
(30-1)
Therefore it includes both lateral and vertical earthquake force components.

The reader will recall that we had to multiply PE, generated by Eh
and Ev earthquake components, by 0.4R to obtain the maximum column
design load. Because the column transfers the same axial load to the
base plate, we are obliged to design the base plate for an increased
earthquake design force (0.4R)PE added to factored dead and live loads,
per formula (6-1), CHAP. 22, DIV. IV.
Because the foundation is part of the load path system, it must safely
transfer all gravity and seismic loads to the ground.
2. Design the base platefooting connection for maximum uplift. The minimum column reaction will be the governing force for the column base-
5.23
175
plate design against uplift. The maximum uplift force is based on

formula (30-1) and, instead of using the fundamental load combinations
of 1612.2.1, the formula is derived from the special load combinations
of formula (6-2), CHAP. 22, DIV. IV. Formula (6-2) also increases the
seismic-caused uplift, 0.4R 2.56 times. Only the tributary dead load
carried by the frame itself was entered in formula (6-2).
The computed uplift is
Pu 634 kips
Computer analysis load case [13]
This is an extremely large uplift force demanding an equally large foundation

capacity to counteract it, which might not prove practicable. However, CHAP.
22, DIV. IV, 6.1.c, states:
of the following:
The uplift limit for the foundation capacity for this project is Pu 500 kip/
footing. We will use this value for maximum uplift in the column base-plate
design.
Design of Base Plate for Compression
Design Parameters
Size of footing
Strength of concrete
Steel plate
Bolts
10 ft 10 ft
c 3.0 ksi
A36
A490
Procedure We will follow the procedure outlined in Design of Axially
Loaded Base Plates, Part 11, Volume II of the LRFD Specication. Following
is a brief review of the basic issues.
The compressive strength of both concrete and soil is considerably smaller
than the strength of steel. The c of concrete used for footing is 3.04.0 ksi
1
as compared to 3650 ksi of structural steel, that is just about
10 th. The
function of the base plate is to spread the highly concentrated column load
over a sufciently large area to keep the footing from being overstressed. Two
176
types of concrete design strength apply depending on the relative geometric

relationship of base plate and footing:
(a) Unconned: LRFD equation (J9-1)
(b) Conned: LRFD equation (J9-2)
When the base plate covers the entire concrete support area, we refer to the
uniaxial strength of concrete, and the resisting force is expressed as
Pu c Pp c(0.85 cA1)
From LRFD equation (J9-1)
where A1 contact area

c 0.60 for bearing on concrete
from which
A1
Pu
c0.85c
On the other hand, the conned strength of concrete is activated if the loadreceiving concrete areathe top surface of the footingis larger than the A1
contact area. The gross concrete area A2 A1 surrounding the contact area
gives lateral connement to the concrete in contact with the base plate. The
correction factor to allow increase in bearing strength is given as
AA by the Specication
2
Limited to maximum value of 2
The design strength includes the effect of connement:
AA
c Pp c(0.85 cA1)
From LRFD equation (J9-2)
Then
AA
A1 Pu / c(0.85 c A1)
2
1
where
AA 2
2
1
For the actual computation we refer to the procedure outlined by W. A. Thornton16 and adopted by the Specication:
5.23
Notation
d, b
B
N
t
m, n
l
X
Pp
Depth and flange width of column

Width of base plate
Length of base plate
Required thickness of base plate
Cantilever overhang dimensions of base plate (Figure 5.16)
Maximum value of m, n, or n
4db
Pu
2
(d b) c Pp
Design strength of concrete bearing area
X
2
1
1 1 X
db /4
The thickness of the plate is determined by
0.9F2P BN
tl
Steps to Design Column Base Plate of Braced Frame
1. Compute A2.
2. Compute A1 from LRFD equation (J9-2).
3. Select B and N.
Figure 5.16 The LRFD design dimensions of the base plate.
177
178
4. Determine values of m, n, and n.

5. Determine the required plate thickness:
A2 1202 14,400 in.2
A1
690
226 in.2
0.6(0.85)(3.0)(2)
Note that A2 /A1 2; we are using the value of 2.

The selection of B and N is also determined by geometric considerations to
accommodate connection requirements for uplift:
B 13.0 in.
and
N 18.0 in.
are chosen with

A1 234 in.2 226 in.2
Note that by selecting 13 in. for B, some conventional, although not sacred,
rules of the construction industry which favor an even number of inches for
plate dimension have been bypassed. However, plate sizes as chosen above
can be ordered and delivered to the project site without difculties.
m
N 0.95d 18.0 (0.95 12.71)
2.96 in
2
2
B 0.8b 13.0 (0.80 12.16)
1.64 in.
2
2
4db
4(12.71)(12.16)
Pu / c Pp
690/716 0.963
2
(d b)
(12.71 12.16)2
2X
1 1 X
db
tl
20.963
1 1 0.963
1.646
1.646(12.71)(12.16)
5.12 in GOVERNS
4
2(690)
2.18 in
0.9F2PBN 5.12 0.9(36)(13.0)(18.0)
u
Provide a 13 18 214 base plate.
5.23
179
Design of Base Plate for Uplift
We will provide four A490 bolts. The design tensile strength of four 112
A490 bolts using Table 8-15, Volume II of the Specication, is
t Pu 4(150) 600 kips 500 kips applied
Figure 5.17 shows the disposition of the bolts.

The required plate thickness to resist bending caused by the pair of bolts
on each side of the column ange is determined as
14 (0.9)(Fy)(B)(t)2 21 Pu(I)
where I is the lever arm in inches. Then

t
2P I
2(500)(1.5)
1.887 in. 2.25 in.

0.9F
B (0.9)(36)(13)
u
Provided
Provide two L5 3 58 (4 in. long) to act as reinforcement welded to

the base plate. This will supply the extra strength needed to improve the
response of conventionally designed base plates (as experience has taught us)
against stress reversals caused by strong ground motion. The base-plate dimensions, bolts, and connections are shown in Figure 5.17.
Figure 5.17 Base-plate dimensions, bolts, and connections.
180
5.24
SUMMARY OF DESIGN PROCEDURES
It would be appropriate to compare, once again, the results of the two different
designs illustrated in Figures 5.7 and 5.8 to emphasize the importance of
complying with all relevant provisions of the 1997 UBC. Figure 5.7 shows
results of a design that, although applying the provisions for load combinations and lateral force analysis of CHAP. 16, did not incorporate the detailed
systems design requirements of CHAP. 22, DIV. IV, for a 1997 UBC acceptable seismic design. The reader will note that the structural member sizes
thus obtained are underdesigned as compared to the frame member sizes
shown in Figure 5.8, synthesis of a structural design that takes into consideration the detailed systems design requirements of 1997.
5.25
SEAOC BLUE BOOK AND THE CODE
The SEAOC Blue Books Recommendations strongly inuenced the UBC and
IBC provisions and continued to be a determining factor in guiding the engineering community on the design of better and safer structures in California
and other seismic zones. The Recommendations contain design principles
based on lessons learned from Northridge as well as extensive empirical research. The results of experimental research on braced frames in particular
were primarily based on over 20 years of tests on braced frames subjected to
cyclic loading. The Recommendations also summarize the results of the
FEMA/SAC joint venture work on steel moment frames reinitiated after
Northridge.
Apart from the above considerations the reader is reminded that, while
containing recommendations that will eventually be part of the IBC, the Blue
Book is not per se a legally binding document. The IBC editions, in turn,
become a binding document when adopted regionally by local legislators.
Steel is quoted in the Recommendations as one of the most efcient engineering solutions to counter earthquakes and with regard to CBFs: Since
their adoption into seismic design codes, improvements have been made to
CBFs with emphasis on increasing brace strength and stiffness, primarily
through the use of higher design forces that would minimize inelastic demand. The emphasis is on better brace performance and stiffness achieved
by higher component design forces required by the special detailing requirements of the 1997 UBC (CHAP. 22, DIV. IV). The requirement for increased
brace member stiffness goes well with research ndings showing that insufcient brace stiffness promotes global buckling and leads to pinching
reductionof the area of hysteresis envelope, a measure of the energy
absorption of the system.
More recently, the Blue Book Commentary adds, ductility as an essential ingredient distinguishing lateral force resisting systems in seismically active areas, has been applied to the design of CBFs. Ductility equates to
5.25
SEAOC BLUE BOOK AND THE CODE
181
potential energy absorption of the structural system and is one of the most
promising trends in engineering to improve structural response and minimize
earthquake damage.
To maintain sufcient brace stiffness, the SEAOC Recommendations limit
the brace slenderness of the SCBF to
KL 1000
r
Fy
(C708.2)
As a further renement, the 1997 UBC subsequently restricted the brace slenderness to
KL
720
r
Fy
From CHAP. 22, DIV. IV, 9.2.a
The Recommendations truly reect results of over 15 years of research work

conducted chiey at the University of Michigan as discussed earlier in this
chapter. As stated in C708.1 of the Recommendations:
Actual building earthquake damage (including the 1994 Northridge earthquake)
as well as damage of CBFs (Concentrically Braced Frames) observed in laboratory tests have generally been caused by limited ductility and brittle failures.
These brittle failures are most often observed as fracture of connection elements
or brace members. Lack of compactness in braces results in severe local buckling
of the brace, which leads to high concentrations of exural strains at these
locations, and reduces their ductility. . . . Extensive analytical and experimental
work performed by Professor Subhash C. Goel and his collaborators has shown
that improved design parameters, such as limiting width / thickness ratios (to
prevent local buckling), closer spacing of stitches, and special design and detailing of end connections greatly improve post-buckling behavior of CBFs. A
new system reecting these developments, referred to as special concentrically
braced frames (SCBFs), has been added to these requirements.
Indeed the 1997 UBC limits the widththickness ratio of brace elements
(CHAP. 22, DIV. IV, 9.2d):
Braces shall be compact or non-compact, but not slender (i.e. r). Circular
sections shall have an outside diameter to wall thickness ratio not exceeding
1,300 / Fy, rectangular tubes shall have a at-width to wall thickness not exceeding 110 / Fy unless the circular section or tube walls are stiffened.
Also reecting test results, the SEAOC Recommendations, C708.3, Bracing

Connections, states:
When brace buckling is in the plane of a gusset plate, the plate should provide
exural strength that exceeds that of the brace. This will ensure that plastic
182
hinges will form in the brace, rather than in the plate. . . . When brace buckling
is out of plane of a gusset plate, the length needed to allow restraint-free plastic
rotation is twice the plate thickness. This mode of buckling may lead to preferable inelastic behavior.17
REFERENCES
1. Black, R. G., Wenger, W. A., and Popov, E. P. 1980. Inelastic Buckling of Steel
Struts Under Cyclic Load Reversal, Report No. UCB / EERC-80 / 40. Berkeley:
Earthquake Engineering Research Center, University of California.
2. Bruneau, M., and Mahin, S. A. 1990. Ultimate Behavior of Heavy Steel Section
Welded Splices and Design Implications. Journal of Structural Engineering, Vol.
116, No. 18, pp. 22142235.
3. Goel, S. C. 1992. Cyclic Post Buckling Behavior of Steel Bracing Members.
In Stability and Ductility of Steel Structures under Cyclic Loading. Boca Raton,
FL: CRC Press.
4. Goel, S. C., and Hanson, R. D. 1987. Behavior of Concentrically Braced Frames
and Design of Bracing Members for Ductility. In SEAOC Proceedings. Sacramento, CA: Structural Engineers Association of California.
5. SEAOC. 1996. Recommended Lateral Force Requirements and Commentary, Seismology Committee, 6th ed. Sacramento, CA: Structural Engineers Association of
California.
6. Goel, S. C. 1992. Earthquake-Resistant Design of Ductile Braced Steel Structures. In Stability and Ductility of Steel Structures Under Cyclic Loading. Boca
Raton, FL: CRC Press.
7. Hassan, O., and Goel, S. C. 1991. Seismic Behavior and Design of Concentrically Braced Steel Structures, Report No. UMCE 91-1. Ann Arbor, MI: Department of Civil Engineering, The University of Michigan.
8. Tang, X., and Goel, S. C. 1987. Seismic Analysis and Design Considerations of
Braced Steel Structures, Report No. UMCE 87-4. Ann Arbor, MI: Department
of Civil Engineering, The University of Michigan.
9. Whittaker, A. S., Uang, C. M., and Bertero, V. V. 1987. Earthquake Simulation
Tests and Associated Studies of a 0.3-Scale Model of a Six-Story Eccentrically
Braced Steel Structure, Report No. EERC 87 / 02. Berkeley, CA: Earthquake Engineering Research Center, University of California.
10. Khatib, I. F., Mahin, S. A., and Pister, K. S. 1988. Seismic Behavior of Concentrically Braced Steel Frames, Report No. UCB / EERC-88 / 01. Berkeley, CA:
Earthquake Engineering Research Center, University of California.
11. Erdey, C. K. 1999. Performance of Steel Structures in California Earthquakes.
Paper presented at the Eurosteel 99 Symposium, Prague.
12. Crosby, P. 1994. Seismically Retrotting a Thirteen-Story Steel Frame Building.
SEF Structural Engineering Forum.
13. Hanson, R. D. 1997. Supplemental Energy Dissipation for Improved Earthquake
Resistance. Ann Arbor, MI: Department of Civil & Environmental Engineering,
University of Michigan, assignment with FEMA.
REFERENCES
183
14. Kareem, A., and Tognarelli, M. 1994. Passive & Hybrid Tuned Liquid Dampers.
SEF Structural Engineering Forum, October.
15. Perry, C., and Fierro, E. A. 1994. Seismically Upgrading a Wells Fargo Bank,
SEF Structural Engineering Forum, October.
16. Thornton, W. A. 1990, Design of Base Plates for Wide Flange ColumnsA
Concatenation of Methods. Engineering Journal, Vol. AISC 27, No. 4, pp. 173
174.
17. Astaneh, A., Goel, S. C., and Hanson, R. D. 1986. Earthquake-Resistant Design
of Double-Angle Bracing, AISC Engineering Journal, Fourth Quarter.
CHAPTER 6
IBC SEISMIC DESIGN OF

SMRF STRUCTURES
6.1
IBC SETUP OF SEISMIC DESIGN FORCES
The procedure presented here demonstrates how to set up seismic design

forces for a six-story SMRF according to IBC 2000. This procedure is also
applicable to the successor code 2003, which uses essentially the same
method. Once the seismic forces are set up, the design of the structure is very
much the same as outlined in our seismic design example in compliance with
the 1997 UBC. This is the reason why a detailed study of a SMRF by the
1997 UBC is so strongly recommended to the reader. Tables for IBC 2000
code requirements have been reproduced from the special structural design
seminar held by the Arizona Building Ofcials, Fall Education Institute in
Phoenix, Arizona, Fall 2000.
6.2
DESIGN EXAMPLE
Project Data
Six-story moment-resisting frame

Roof deck: 60 psf
Floor deck: 80 psf; includes weights of suspended ceiling, ducts, external
curtain wall
Partitions: 10 psf; treated as dead load by IBC 2000
Soil type: D
Weight of roof: 650 kips
6.2
DESIGN EXAMPLE
185
Weight of oor: 973 kips

Acceleration parameters:
Ss 160% g
Fa 1.0
SMS FaSs 1.0 1.6 1.6 g
From IBC 2000, Table 1615.1.2-1
S1 70% g
Fa 1.5
SM1 FaS1 1.5 0.7 1.05 g
From IBC 2000, Table 1615.1.2-2
The 5% damped design spectral response acceleration:

SDS (32 )SMS (23 )1.6 1.066 g
SD1 (32 )SM1 (32 )1.05 0.70 g
Period of structure (IBC 2000, 1617.4.2-2):

Ta 0.1 6 0.6 s
Construct design response spectrum:

Ts
SD1
0.7
0.656 s
SDS 1.066
Design spectral response acceleration with Ta Ts:

Sa SDS 1.066 g
Seismic response coefcient:

Cs
From IBC 2000, 1615.1.4.2
SaI SDSI (1.066)(1.0)
0.13325
R
R
8.0
Seismic base shear:

V CsW 0.13325 5515 735 kips
186
Vertical distribution of seismic forces:

Fx CvxV
From IBC 2000, 1617.4.3-1
where Cvx is the vertical distribution factor,

Cvx
wxhkx
wh
n
k
i i
i1
where k 1.1 by interpolation (IBC 2000, 1617.4.3). Assume
CvR
650 81
0.221
973(13.5k 27.0k 40.5k 67.5k) 650 81k
Cv6
973 67.51.1
0.270
370,702
Cv5
973 54.01.1
0.211
370,702
Cv4
973 40.51.1
0.154
370,702
Cv3
973 27.01.1
0.098
370,702
Cv2
973 13.51.1
0.946
370,702
Vertical distribution of seismic forces:

Froof CvRV 0.221 735 162 kips
F6 Cv6V 0.270 735 198 kips
F5 Cv5V 0.211 735 155 kips
F4 Cv4V 0.154 735 114 kips
F3 Cv3V 0.098 735 72 kips
F2 Cv2V 0.046 735 34 kips
6.3
IBC BUILDING CATEGORIES
187
Note the signicant rate of increase in the vertical distribution of forces

due to the exponent of hx (IBC 2000, 1617.4.3).
The increase in the magnitude of applied lateral seismic forces with increased height is a signicant change in the seismic force distribution as
compared to the 1997 UBC seismic provisions. The contrast in the vertical
distribution of seismic forces becomes even more emphasized as the structures
become taller. Note the inuence of height in the exponent as k 2.0.
6.3
At this stage we must determine the following requirements for the building*:
(a) Seismic use group (SUG)
(b) Occupancy importance factor
(c) Seismic design category
The 2000 IBC, 1616.2, states: Each structure shall be assigned a Seismic
Use Group and a corresponding Occupancy Importance Factor. Table 6.1
shows the SUGs in a simplied manner. Table 6.3 is based on short-period
response accelerations. Table 6.4 is based on 1-s period response acceleration.
Our project is an ofce building that belongs to SUG I. The occupancy
importance factor allocated to this group is IE 1.00, as noted in Table 6.2.
The seismic design category is based on the seismic use group and the Design
spectral response acceleration per IBC 2000, 1615.1.3. According to Tables
6.3 and 6.4 (SDS 0.5 g, SDI 0.2 g), the building ts into seismic design
category D. The occupancy importance factor enters in the base-shear calculation (Cs is a function of IE) and is inuential in determining the magnitude
of the base shear and earthquake design lateral forces applied to the structure.
The seismic design category determines the type of structure and the height
limitation that can be built on the site and, equally important, has overall
control over structural component design and its connections. Table 6.5 provides a short list of structures pertaining to moment-resisting frame systems.
TABLE 6.1 Seismic Use Groups, IBC 2000, 1612.2

Use
Use
Use
Use
group
group
group
group
I
II
III
IV
Ordinary buildings: not assigned to SUG II or III

High-occupancy buildings: substantial hazard to human life
Essential facilities: emergency facilities / hospitals, police stations
Low hazard to human life: agricultural / temporary / storage
* Seismic use group has been replaced by occupancy category in IBC 2006, issued at the
time of this writing.
188
TABLE 6.2 The Seismic Importance Factor IE,

IBC 2000, 1616.2 amplies design forces to control
damage and achieve enhanced performance in
SUGs II and III
Seismic Use Group
IE
I
II
III
IV
1.00
1.25
1.50
1.00
The rst column in Table 6.5 indicates the type of structure, the second
column the detailing reference section, and the third column the response
modication coefcient R that enters in the Cs seismic response coefcient
calculation. The coefcient is inuential in determining the V base shear. The
fourth column contains the 0 system overstrength factor that controls element design. The fth column is the deection amplication factor CD. If
complied with, this value ensures that the interstory drift is within acceptable
limits due to dynamic amplication, which is intended to rectify the static
effect of the assumed Equivalent (Static) Lateral Force Procedure for Seismic Design of Buildings (IBC 2000, 1617.4). The last column gives system
and building height limitations by seismic design category.
It can be seen that ordinary steel moment frames, for instance, cannot be
used for our project because the height of the structure is over 80 ft and the
height of the ordinary moment frame is limited to 35 ft in seismic design
category D. Note that ordinary moment frames would have been allowed if
the project were located in a zone of lesser earthquake spectral response
acceleration. Note also that an intermediate steel moment frame could be used
up to a maximum height of 160 ft. Our choice, however, was the special steel
moment frame with R 8. Should we have opted for an intermediate steel
moment frame, the value of the response modication coefcient would have
been less favorable: R 6.
TABLE 6.3 Seismic Design Categories, IBC 2000, Table 1616.3-1a

Design Category
Value of SDS
SDS 0.167 g
0.167 g SDS 0.33 g
0.33 g SDS 0.50 g
0.50 g SDS
SUG I
SUG II
SUG III
A
B
C
Da
A
B
C
Da
A
C
D
Da
a
For structures located on sites with spectral response acceleration at 1-second period, Sl, equal
or greater than 0.75 g, IBC 2000 allocates Seismic Design Category E to SUG I and II structures,
and Category F to SUG III structures.
6.3
189
TABLE 6.4 Seismic Design Categories, IBC 2000, Table 1616.3-2a

Design Category
Value of SDI
SDI 0.067 g
0.067 g SDI 0.133 g
0.133 g SDI 0.20 g
0.20 g SDI
SUG I
SUG II
SUG III
A
B
C
Da
A
B
C
Da
A
C
D
Da
a
For structures located on sites with spectral response acceleraton at 1-second period, S1, equal
or greater than 0.75 g, IBC 2000 allocates Seismic Design Category E to SUG I and II structures,
and Category F to SUG III structures.
The next major step for the design is to pass the checkpoint of the redundancy coefcient . The purpose of the provision is to safeguard the structural
system from a potential breakdown initiated by insufcient number of forceresisting components. The failure of such components, without a redundant
backup system, could trigger the chain reaction of a progressive overall structural system failure. For instance, take a oor plan that contains only one pair
of moment frames, one on each side of the building to counteract earthquake
forces in their major direction. If one fails, a single frame would not be able
to resist the seismic lateral load alone. Its reaction, now eccentric, would not
be able to generate a reaction in line with the opposing earthquake forces.
For this, not to mention torsional effect, a minimum of two frames is needed.
This simplied example proves the need for redundancy. The reliability/
redundancy test is to ensure that there is enough structural redundancy for
the task:
i 2
20
rmaxi Ai
From IBC 2000, 1617.2-2a
where rmaxi is the ratio of the design story shear resisted by the most heavily
loaded single element in the story to the total story shear for a given direction
of loading. Furthermore IBC 2000 (1617.2.2) states: The redundancy coefcient shall be taken as the largest of the values of calculated at each
story i of the structure. The 2000 IBC sets a limit of
1.25
for moment-resisting frames and

1.5
for other systems in seismic design category D. If the limit is exceeded, it

will warn the designer that the basic safety features for sufcient redundancy
have been overlooked.
TABLE 6.5 Moment-Resisting Frame System Category

190
Basic Seismic-Force-Resisting
System
Detailing
Reference
Section
Response
Modication
Coefcient,
R
OverStrength
Factor,
0
Deection
Amplication
Factor, CD
System and Building. Height Limitations

(ft) by Seismic Design Category
per Section 1616.1
A or B
Moment-Resisting Frame Systems

Special steel moment frames
Special steel truss moment
frames
Intermediate steel moment
frames
Ordinary steel moment
frames
Note k(9)
Note k(12)
8
7
3
3
512
512
NL
NL
NL
NL
NL
160
NL
100
NL
NP
Note k(10)
NL
NL
160
100
NP
Note k(11)
312
NL
NL
35
NP
NP
Dual Systems with Special Moment Frames

Steel eccentrically braced
frames, moment-resisting
connections, at columns
away from links
Steel eccentrically braced
frames, non-momentresisting connections at
columns away from links
Special steel concentrically
braced frames
Ordinary steel concentrically
braced frames
Note k(15)
212
NL
NL
NL
NL
NL
Note k(15)
212
NL
NL
NL
NL
NL
Note k(13)
212
612
NL
NL
NL
NL
NL
Note k(14)
212
NL
NL
NL
NL
NL
Note k. AISC Seismic Part II and Section number.

NL not limited; NP not permitted.
Source: IBC 2000, Table 1617.6
CHAPTER 7
MASONRY STRUCTURES
7.1
INTRODUCTION
How did masonry buildings fare in the Northridge earthquake? The City of
Los Angeles assessment of building damage listed 350 tilt-ups/masonry that
suffered moderate damage with 200 partial roof collapses and 213 unreinforced masonry with 6 partial roof collapses within the commercial group of
structures. It was also noted that, while overall damage to reinforced masonry
buildings was not as extensive as for tilt-ups, there was severe damage to
many reinforced masonry buildings:
The collapses that occurred in pre 1976 tilt-ups and reinforced masonry buildings
were due in most cases to the lack of an adequate anchorage system of the walls
to the roof and oor diaphragms, and due to the omission of an adequate pilasterto-girder connection considering the wall panel between pilasters to be supported
on 4 sides. The collapses in post 1976 of tilt-ups and reinforced masonry structures were primarily due to the following:
1. The failure of wall anchorage and sub diaphragm continuity tie connectors,
where their ultimate capacity was about half of the amplied force level
in the diaphragm;
2. Excessive elongations of the anchoring system that caused purlins / subpurlins to lose their vertical support from hangars and plywood / strap
anchor nails to lift out of the connecting members;
3. The failure of eccentric and twisted connectors with gross eccentricities.
Also, quality control was a major factor in the failure of TU / RM structures, as
it was in all low-rise construction.
The city implemented emergency measures that affected all building permits, including repair and retrot permits issued after November 1994.
191
192
MASONRY STRUCTURES
It is noteworthy that the City of Los Angeles acknowledged that part of

the damage to masonry structures was the result of design shortcomings and
inadequate quality control rather than inherent weaknesses in the type of
structure.
The growth of reinforced masonry design as we know it in modern masonry
times has been continuous from its 1933 Long Beach earthquake birth pains.
. . . It devastated a jurisdiction of the Uniform Building Code, which had been
organized earlier to disseminate Code improvements and uniformity in the western United States, along part of the Pacic Ring of Fire, a line of great seismic
activity around the Pacic tectonic plate edge. The UBC was developed by the
Pacic Coast Building Ofcials Conference, organized for building code uniformity, and was functioning well, with a regular pattern of review, improvement
and updating in cooperation with professional building design profession. Hence,
distribution of new methods was wide and prompt. The name was later changed
to the International Conference of Building Ofcials (ICBO) as its inuence
spread internationally from the Pacic Coast jurisdictions.1
Figure 7.1 Unreinforced masonry buildings do not fare well in earthquakes. The
photo shows the collapsed House of Bread in the city of Paso Robles, California
during the 6.5-magnitude San Simeon earthquake of December 2003. The Old Clock
Tower, symbol of Paso Robles, built in 1892 in the corner of the same building was
also destroyed when the second story of the structure collapsed onto the street during
the earthquake. (Courtesy of the University of California Berkeley Library. Photo:
Janise E. Rodgers.)
7.2
7.2
CASE 1: RETAINING WALL SYSTEM
193
Seismic: Moderate Seismicity region

The engineering calculations for this project comply with the provisions
of the 1997 UBC, Section 2107, Working Stress Design of Masonry,
applicable to moderate- to high-seismicity areas. The 1997 UBC specically notes in 2107.1.3: Elements of masonry structures located in
Seismic Zones 3 and 4 shall be in accordance with this section. Soil
bearing pressure is 2500 psf per soil report investigation. Soil prole:
SC. Because in our project the elevation of the retained ground varies,
so does the height of the retaining wall system. (See Figures 7.2, 7.3,
and 7.4.) We investigated the following clear heights of retained earth:
10 ft, 13 ft, and 15 ft. Clear height distance between top of wall and
top of footings.
ASSUMPTIONS
Assuming a 15-in.-deep toe and heel depth for the 10-ft wall and 18in. depth for the 13- and 15-ft walls, the overall depth for overturning
effect will be 11.25, 14.5, and 16.5 ft, respectively. The lateral active
Figure 7.2 AA 10-ft retaining wall.
194
MASONRY STRUCTURES
Figure 7.3 BB 1113-ft, 8-in. retaining wall.
soil pressure given by the soil report was 35 psf for each foot of depth
acting as an equivalent lateral uid pressure. The retaining walls consist
of a top portion of reinforced-concrete masonry wall of variable thickness and a 4.06.0-ft-high, reinforced-concrete stem wall to which the
top reinforced CMU (concrete masonry unit, type S mortar) portion is
attached, sharing continuous vertical reinforcement. The engineering design parameters of the CMU are
m 1500 psf
n
Em 750 1500 1,125,000 psi
Es
29,000
26
Em
1125
Allowable bending stress (no special inspection required) is
7.2
195
Figure 7.4 CC 1415-ft, 4-in. retaining wall.
Fb 12 (0.33)m 250 psi

Allowable tensile stress in steel reinforcement is
Fs 0.5y
or 24,000 for deformed bars
24,000 psi
1997 UBC minimum reinforcing requirements for concrete masonry are

found in 2106.1.12.4:
Minimum horizontal reinforcement: 0.0007 Ag
196
MASONRY STRUCTURES
0.0007 7.625 48 0.256 in.2

0.0007 11.625 32 0.26 in.2
#4 @ 48 in. for 8 in. CMU

#4 @ 32 in. for 12 in. CMU
DESIGN OF 10.0-FT-HIGH WALL
Design lateral pressures are derived as

pmax 10.0 35 350 psf
H 350 10.0/2 1750 lb
For the overturning moment about point A
Mo 1750(4.58) 8020 lb-ft
at toe based on 1.0-ft strip of wall
MR (300 600) 6.5 1.25 150 8.52 /2 10.0 110

1.5 7.75 25,410 lb-ft
The factor of safety is
FS
25,410
3.17 1.5
8020
OK
The retaining wall consists of a 4.0-ft-high reinforced-concrete stem and

a 6.0-ft portion of 12-in. reinforced CMU (concrete masonry unit). The
maximum moment acting on the masonry wall at the concretemasonry
interface is determined as
M12 16 (0.035 6.03) 1.26 k-ft 15.12 k-in./12-in. wall length
32
M 15,120(
12 ) 40,320 lb-in. for 32-in. wall length
Try #4 at 32 in. OC vertical reinforcement:
7.2
197
0.2
0.0006377
32 (11.62 1.82)
n 26(0.0006377) 0.01658
2n 0.03316
(n)2 0.000275
k (n)2 2n n 0.16627
j1
(7-33)
k
0.944576
3
jd 0.944576 9.8 9.26 in.

The exural compressive stress induced on the masonry is derived as
b

M
bd 2
2
40,320
jk
32 9.82
166 psi 250 psi
2
0.94457 0.16627
OK
M
40,320
21,770 psi 24,000 psi

As jd 0.2 9.26
OK
However, we will use #4 at 24 in. OC to match stem wall reinforcement.
DESIGN OF 4.0-FT-HIGH CONCRETE STEM WALL
Load factor for lateral earth pressure: 1.6H (1997 UBC, 1612.2.2)
Maximum bending moment at stem-to-footing xed-end connection:
Mu 1.6
0.035 10.03
9.33 k-ft
6
112.0 k-in./12-in. wall length
Area of vertical reinforcement required with 2-in. cover (1997 UBC,

1907.7.1):
Ast
112.0
0.22 in.2
0.9 0.95 9.75 60
Use #4 @ 12 in. OC vertical.
198
MASONRY STRUCTURES
Design Toe of Footing
The resultant of the vertical force from A without the earth pressure
moment is
x
900 6.5 1594 8.5/2 1485 (8.5 0.75)

6.06 ft
900 1594 1486
The resultant will be pushed toward the toe by the eccentricity caused
by earth-pressure-generated eccentricity:
e
8020
2.00 ft
900 1594 1485
The distance of the resultant from A due to vertical loads and earth
pressure is
t 6.06 2.0 4.06 ft
8.5
2.83 ft
3
Therefore:
1. The resultant lies within the kern limit of the section.
2. The entire footprint of the footing will be under compression.
3. The classical formulas of elasticity hold.
The maximum bearing stress at A under service loads is determined by
B
P Mo 3.98
8020
6 1.47 ksi
A
S
8.5
8.52
1.47 ksi 2.5 ksi allowed by soil report

Bearing pressure OK.
The bearing pressure at the stem wall with
I
8.53
51.17 ft4
12
and distance from the section neutral axis of
7.2
199
8.5
6.0 1.75 ft
2
is
B,stem
3.98
8.02
1.75 0.194 ksf

8.5
51.17
The strength-level bearing pressures are as follows

At the toe A
pA 1.6 1.47 2.35 ksf
At the stem wall
pST 1.6 0.194 0.31 ksf
The bending moment at the footing-to-stem-wall connection at strength
level is
Mu
0.31 6.02 2.04 6.0
9.66 k-ft
2
3
The area of steel required is

Ast
9.66 12
0.95 11.75 60 0.196 in.2 /ft
0.9
Use #4 @ 12 in. OC bottom.
DESIGN OF 13.0-FT-HIGH RETAINING WALL
The lateral force and its lever arm to A of the earth pressure are
H
0.035 13.02
2.95 k
2
Le 4.83 ft
Mo 2.95 4.83 14.25 k-ft

Assuming a 7.0-ft toe in front of the 12-in.-thick wall, the restoring
moment is determined:
200
MASONRY STRUCTURES
Weight of
CMU
Weight of RC
wall
Weight of
9.5-ft-wide
footing
Weight of
ground on
heel
5.33 0.103 4.0 0.058 0.78 k 7.5 5.85

4.37 0.15 0.66 k 7.5 4.95
1.50 9.5 0.15 2.14 k 4.75 10.16
1.5 13.0 0.11 2.15 k 8.75 18.81
R 5.73 k
MR 40.0 k-ft
The restoring moment is larger than the overturning moment. The factor
of safety is
FS
40.0
2.8
14.25
OK
The location of the vertical resultant from A is:

(a) Without lateral pressure
(b) With lateral pressure
40.0
6.98 ft
5.73
14.25
t 6.98
4.50 ft
5.73
9.5
4.50 ft
3.16 ft
3
x
Formulas of elasticity apply. The maximum toe pressure under service

load is
B
p M 5.73(4.75 4.5) 6
0.70 kip/ft2
A
S
9.52
OK
The factored toe pressure causing the bending moment is

pt 1.6 (0.70 0.225) 0.76 ksf at strength level
The factored bearing pressure at the footing-to-wall connection causing
the moment with
I
is
9.53
71.4 ft4
12
and
yw 4.75 7.0 2.25 ft
7.2
pw 1.6
201
5.73 5.73(4.75 4.50) 2.25
0.225
9.5
71.4
0.53 ksf at strength level
The moment is evaluated at the footingwall connection:

Mu
0.53 7.02 (0.76 0.53) 7.02
18.62 k-ft
2
3
223 k-in. at strength level
As
223
0.296 in.2 0.31 in.2
0.9 0.95 14.69 60
Use #5 @ 12 in. OC bottom.
DESIGN OF RC STEM WALL
The maximum bending moment at the RC wallfooting connection due

to lateral pressures is
2.95 13.0
20.4 k-ft 245 k-in.
3
Mu 1.6
Provide an 18-in.-thick wall:

d 18.0 2.0 0.30 15.7
As
245
0.30 in.2 0.31 in.2
0.9 0.95 15.70 60
Use #5 @ 12 in. OC
The maximum moment induced to the 12-in. CMU wall attached to the
top of the RC wall for a 16-in.-long wall segment is
M 1.33
0.035 (13.0 4.37)3

5.0 k-ft
6
60 k-in./16-in. length
Try #5 at 16 in. OC vertical reinforcement:
202
MASONRY STRUCTURES
0.31
0.001977
16 (11.62 1.82)
n 26(0.001977) 0.0514
2n 0.1028
(n)2 0.0026423
k (n)2 2n n 0.27332
j1
(7-33)
k
0.90889
3
jd 0.90889 9.8 8.907 in.

The exural compressive stress induced on the masonry is given as
b

M
bd 2
210 psi 250 psi
2
60,000
jk
24 9.82
2
0.90889 0.27332
OK
M
60,000
As jd 0.31 0.90889 9.8
21,730 psi 24,000 psi
OK
12-in. CMU OK with #5 @ 16 in. OC vertical reinforcement

DESIGN OF 8-IN. CMU WALL ATOP THE 12-IN. CMU WALL
The height is 13.5 9.70 3.8 ft, say 4.0 ft. The maximum moment
for a 48-in.-long wall segment is
M 4.0
0.035 3.83
1.280 k-ft 15.4 k-in./48-in. length
6
Assuming #5 at 48 in. OC vertical reinforcement,
0.31
0.0011135
48 (7.62 1.82)
n 26(0.0011135) 0.02895
2n 0.05790
(n)2 0.00083817
k n2 2n n 0.2134
(7-33)
7.2
j1
203
k
0.92886
3
jd 0.9288 5.8 5.3874 in.

b

M
bd 2
2
15,400
jk
48 5.82
96.3 psi 150 psi
0.9288 0.2134
OK
M
15,400
As jd 0.31 5.3874
9222 psi 24,000 psi
Allowed
OK
#5 @ 48 in. OC vertical OK, however, use #5 @ 32 in. OC.
DESIGN OF 15.0-FT-HIGH RETAINING WALL
The wall consists of three wall segments: The bottom portion is a 6-fthigh, 18-in.-thick reinforced concrete wall. The middle portion is a 5ft-high 16-in.-thick CMU. The upper portion is a 4-ft-high, 8-in.-thick
CMU. The footing is 9.5-ft-wide, 18-in.-thick reinforced concrete with
a 7-ft toe and an 18-in. heel in the back. The overturning moment about
A is
Mo
0.035 15.02
(5.0 1.5)
2
25.6 k-ft per 12-in. wall length.
The weights of wall components and restoring moment are as follows:

8-in. CMU
12-in. CMU
18-in. RC wall
Footing
4 0.058
5 0.103
6 1.5 0.15
9.5 1.5 0.15
0.23
0.55
1.35
2.14
k
k
k
k
7.5
7.5
7.75
4.75
1.73
4.12
10.46
10.16
Weight of ground on heel

1.5 15.0 0.11 2.47 k 8.75 21.66
6.74 k
48.13 k-ft
The factor of safety for overturning is
204
MASONRY STRUCTURES
FS
48.13
1.90
25.6
OK
The resultant of the vertical forces measured from A is

t
48.13 25.6
3.34 ft 3.16 ft
6.74
6.74
The entire footprint is under compression. The bearing pressure is of

triangular distribution. The toe pressure is
B
2 6.74
1.42 ksf 2.5 ksf
9.5
Allowed
OK
The factored toe pressure is

pT 1.6 1.42 2.27
The factored bearing pressure at the toewall interface is
p 0.6 ksf
The following maximum moments are applied to wall segments:
8-in. CMU: 21.4 k-ft. See previous pages.
12-in. CMU:
M 1.33
0.035 9.03
5.65 k-ft
6
68.0 k-in. per 16-in. length of wall
18-in. RC Wall:
Mu 1.6
0.035 15.03
31.5 k-ft 378 k-in.
6
Reinforcement Design
8-in. CMU: #5 at 48 in. OC. See previous pages.

However, use #5 @ 24-in. OC vertical to match rest
of wall reinforcement.
7.2
205
12-in. CMU: Try #6 at 16 in. OC:
0.44
0.002806
16 (11.62 1.82)
n 0.072959
2n 0.0972
(n)2 0.005323
k (n)2 n n 0.31594
j1
k
0.8947
3
jd 0.911 9.8 8.77 in.

b
(7-33)
68
16 9.82
0.895 0.3159
0.31 ksi 250 psi
Allowed
Must use 16-in.-thick CMU.
The effective depth of reinforcement is
d 13.8 in.
Try #6 at 24 in. OC:
0.44
0.001328
24 13.8
0.03454
2n 0.06908
(n)2 0.001193
k (n)2 2n n 0.2306
j1
k
0.923
3
jd 12.74 in.
b
102
24 13.82
0.923 0.2306
210 psi 250 psi
(7-33)
OK
M
102
18.2 ksi
As jd 0.44 12.74
18,200 psi 24,000 psi
OK
0.21 ksi
206
MASONRY STRUCTURES
Design of 18-in. RC Wall
Mu 378 k-in.
Try #6 at 12 in. plus #6 at 24 in. OC alternating:
As 12 (0.6 0.44) 0.52 in.2
Mn 0.9 0.52 60 (0.875 15.62)
392.0 k-in. 378 k-in.
OK
Design the footing at strength level:

Mu
0.6 7.02 (2.27 0.6) 7.02
42.0 k-ft 503 k-in.

2
3
The amount of reinforcement provided is as follows:

From concrete stem wall: #6 @ 12 in. OC
From 16-in. CMU: #6 @ 24 in. OC
0.6 in.2
0.3 in.2
0.9 in.2
Mn 0.9 (0.9 60) (0.875 14.62)

622.0 k-in. 503 k-in.
7.3
OK
CASE 2: SEISMIC VERSUS WIND
Seismic: Low to Moderate Seismicity area

The following engineering calculations were done for a real project.
Despite comparatively high winds in a relatively low seismicity area,
seismic governed over wind in this case study.
PROJECT DESCRIPTION
The subject structure is a reinforced masonry hangar (Figures 7.5 and

7.6).
7.3
207
Figure 7.5 Partial view of the hangar during construction.
Figure 7.6 Partial roof plan of the masonry hangar with continuous tie at centerline
of building.
208
MASONRY STRUCTURES
DESIGN CRITERIA
Wind 70 mph; exposure C; 1997 UBC

Soil prole: SC
Allowable bearing pressure 1000 psf
Dimensions: 50 50-ft, 8-in.-thick walls, 12-in. piers at front entrance
Plate height 14 ft
Ridge height 20 ft
Roof: wood trusses provided by truss manufacturer
Mortar: type S, m 1500 psi, n 26, Fb 250 psi
The reinforced-concrete masonry walls are supported top and bottom
with a 14.0-ft simply supported clear span:
m 1500 psi
n
Em 750 1500 1,125,000 psi
Es
29,000
26
Em
1125
The allowable bending stress (no special inspection required) is

Fb
1
0.33 m
250 psi
2
The allowable compressive stress with partial xity at bottom and effective height of
h 0.70(168) 118 in.
h
118
46 99
r
2.53
(7-11)
is
1
h
Fa
(0.25)m 1
2
140r
167 psi
The allowable shear stress in shear walls without shear reinforcement,

for M/Vd 1.0, is
Fv 1.5m 75 psi
The allowable tensile stress in steel reinforcement is
7.3
209
Fs 0.5y or 24,000 deformed bars

24,000 psi
REINFORCEMENT REQUIREMENTS
Minimum vertical reinforcement

0.2 in.2 or #4 bar continuous at each side of opening and at each
corner [2106.1.12.3 (2)]
8-in. walls, 0.0015Ag 0.0015 7.625 24.0 0.275 in.2
0.31 in2 @ 24 in. OC
Provided by #5 vertical @ 24 in. OC.
Horizontal reinforcement
0.0015 0.0006 0.002 [2106.1.12.4 (2.3)]
(1) #4 horizontal to be placed at top and bottom of wall as well
as in lintels, top and bottom, minimum embedment 24 in., Lb
24 in.
MASONRY WALLS
Wind and Seismic Loads Acting on Wall

1. Wind (projected area method), UBC 1997, (20-1), Tables 16-F,
16-G, and 16-H:
p CeCqqsI
qs 12.6 psf
Ce 1.06
Cq 1.3
Exposure C
Structures 40 ft or less in height
p 12.6(1.06)(1.3)(1.0) 17.4 psf

2. Seismicacting out of plane of wall. The lateral load for the 12ft-wide wall is
210
MASONRY STRUCTURES
Fp
apCaIp
Rp(1 3hx /hr)Wp
that is,
(1.0)(0.24)
17.9 psf
3.0[1 3(1.0)]56
Seismic GOVERNS.
Next, we complete our calculations for the design of the hangar structure. The maximum moment acting at midheight on a 24-in.-wide strip
of wall is
M
wL2
2 17.9(14.02) 1.5 10,525 lb/in.
8
Try #5 at 24 in. vertical reinforcement:

0.31/24(7.62 1.82) 0.00223
n 26(0.00223) 0.058
2n 0.1158
(n)2 0.00335
k (n)2 2n n 0.287
j1
k
0.9
3
jd 0.9(5.8) 5.22 in.

b

M
bd 2
2
10,525
2
jk
24 5.8 (2/0.9 0.287)
101.0 psi 250 psi
OK
M
10,525
jdAs 0.31 5.22
6500 psi 24,000 psi
OK
(7-33)
7.3
211
COMBINED AXIAL AND BENDING ON 24-IN.-WIDE WALL

SUPPORTING TRUSSES AT 2.0 FT OC
The reaction of the main roof on the 8-in. CMU wall will be derived
from the following loads:
DL of rooftwo-ply roong felt, 12 -in. OSB/trusses @ 24 in. OC
DL 10.0 psf
LL 16.0 psf
Total 26.0 psf
With a 50-ft roof span the end reaction for a 2.0-ft slice of roof is given
as
2 26 50.0
1300 lb
2
The reaction of a roof truss on a 24-in.-wide strip of wall is
P 1300 lb/24 in.
The weight of the wall is derived as
2 14.0 56 1568 lb/24 in.
a 1300
1568
21.0 psi
24.0 5.8
21.0 101.0
b
0.53 1.0
Fa Fb
167
250
Combined bending and axial force.
DESIGN OF MASONRY PIER AT ENTRANCE
Total Seismic Load/Building

Weight
Weight
Weight
Weight
of
of
of
of
roof (concrete tiles): 22 50 50 55,000 lb

side wall: 2 14.0 50 56 78,400 lb
rear wall: 14 50.0 56 39,000 lb
12-in. front piers: 2 3.0 14.0 90 7600 lb
OK.
212
MASONRY STRUCTURES
Total weight of building: 180,000 lb

Using the 1997 UBC static force procedure (1630.2) gives
V
2.5 CaI
2.5 0.24 1.0
W
180 24.0 k
R
4.5
Ca 0.24
(soil prole SC)
R 4.5
The horizontal force acting at the top of each pier is
Hu
24.0
6.0 k
4
at strength level
Using working stress design, divide H by 1.4 per UBC 1997, 1612.3,
Allowable Stress Design,
H
6.0
4.28 k/pier
1.4
The moment caused by horizontal force H applied at plate elevation is

M 4.28 14.0 60.0 k/ft 720 k-in.
The reaction of the front roof truss above the entrance is as follows:
2.0 42 46.0
1940 lb
2
20 46.0
PD
460 lb
2
Total 2400 lb
PT
For roof D L
For weight of door
Each end
The weight of the pier at midheight is

3.0 7.0 90 1890 lb
The total vertical load on the pier is 4300 lb.
say 1900 lb
7.3
213
Design Pier for Combined Axial and Bending
Assume
Fa 167 psi
b 250 psi
The actual working compressive stress is derived as follows:

P
4300
10.3 psi
A 11.625 36.0
a
10.3 25.5
b
0.163 1.0
Fa Fb
167
250
Pier OK in compression
s
M
720
4.3
24.2 ksi
jdAs (30.7)(0.88) 2 0.88
Pier reinforcement OK
Design Continuous Footing for Side and Rear Walls
Roof reaction
Weight of 8-in. CMU
12 (10.0 16.0)50.0 650 lb/ft

14.0 56 785 lb/ft
Total 1435 lb/ft
Bearing pressure
P
1435
956 psf 1000 psf
1.5
Footing OK.
Design Footing for 12-in. 3.0-ft Piers at Front Entrance
From the pier calculations the maximum moment transferred to the footing by the pier is
M 60.0 k/ft
The moment is resisted by the 18-in.2 grade beam connecting the footings of the two individual piers. The reinforcement of the grade beam
is comprised of 3 #7 continuous top and bottom bars. The factored
applied moment is
214
MASONRY STRUCTURES
Mu 1.5 60 90.0 k/ft 1080 k/in.

The resistance of the 18-in.2 beam is supplied by the 3 #7 main
reinforcement:
Effective depth: 18.0 3.0 0.44 14.56 in.
Mu 0.9 3 0.6 60 (0.8 14.56)
1132 k/in. 1080
Therefore a uniformly distributed bearing pressure can be expected between the footing and soil. The pressure with 4300 lb total vertical load
per pier is
P
4300
240 psf 1000 psf allowed
3.0 6.0
OK
7.4 CASE 3: DESIGN OF CMU WALL AND PRECAST

CONCRETE PLATE
Seismic: Moderate- to High-Seismicity Area

PROJECT DESCRIPTION
Precast concrete circular plate for a new sewer well and a reinforced
masonry, 6-ft wall.
ANALYSIS OF STRESSES AND STRAINS
The following analysis is based on R. J. Roarks2 Formulas for Stress

and Strains.
LL 150 psf
DL 75 psf
The maximum load acting on top of the circular concrete lid at strength
level is
[1.4(0.15) 1.7(0.075)] 0.3375 ksft
say 0.34 ksft
q 0.034 ksft
The thickness of the plate is t 6 in. The modulus of elasticity is
7.4
CASE 3: DESIGN OF CMU WALL AND PRECAST CONCRETE PLATE
215
E 3 106 psi
Poissons ratio v for concrete is 0.32 and
D
3(106)(6.03)
60 106
12(1 0.322)
15.0
7.5
2
Mmax
qa2 (3 0.32)
3.97 k-ft 47.6 k-in.
16
With 112 -in. bottom cover the effective depth is

6.0 1.75 4.25 in.
and
Ast / radial
47.6
0.244 in.2 /ft width
0.9 4.25 (0.85) 60
0.244 0.31 in.2

To compensate for the local, weakening effect of two 3.0-ft manhole
openings, we provided a 5 #5 bar bundle to be placed in the diagonal
direction at the bottom next to each opening and 3 #5 bottom in the
cross direction.
FOOTING DESIGN
Total DL LL acting on the lid, working stress design:

P r2q 7.52 (0.15 0.075) 39.76 kips
Linear reaction of lid on footing:
w
r2q
0.85 k/ft
2r
say 40.0 kips
216
MASONRY STRUCTURES
Required footing width with 1.0 ksf allowable soil bearing pressure:
b
0.85
0.85 1.0 ft
1.0
Provided by a ring foundation with a minimum footing

depth of 18 in.
OK.
SEISMIC DESIGN OF 6-FT-HIGH, 8-IN. CMU WALL
Using the UBC 1997 seismic provisions for cantilevered walls with a
unit weight of 60 psf, fully grouted:
ap 2.5
Rp 3.0
Ip 1.0
Ca 0.33, seismic zone 3, soil prole SC

Wp 6.0 60 360 lb
Fp 2.5(0.33)(1.0) 1 3
0
6.0
99 lb/linear foot of wall
360
3.0
say 100 lb
The maximum overturning moment is
Mo 0.1
6.0
1.5 0.45 k-ft
2
The restoring moment with a 2.0-ft-wide 12-in-deep footing is

Mr
0.15(2.02)
0.36(1.66) 0.9 k-ft 0.45 k-ft
2
The factor of safety is

FS
0.9
2.0
0.45
OK
OK
7.5
CASE 4: RETAIL STORE, MASONRY AND STEEL
217
Reinforcement Design: Working Stress Design
Lateral force F
0.099
0.0707
1.4
M 0.0707
Ast
6.0
0.5 0.247 k-ft 2.96 k-in.
2
2.96
0.046 in.2 0.23 in.2
0.85 3.75 20.0
7.5
Seismic: Low-to-Moderate Seismicity area

Our task was the analysis and engineering design of a reinforced masonry building in Mesquite, Nevada. Despite being a low- to moderateseismicity area, seismic forces governed in this case study, as shown
in the structural calculations.
PROJECT DESCRIPTION
Structural conguration of building: rectangular with approximately

17,500 total square footage (Figure 7.7)
Reinforced masonry walls, split-face CMU
Soil prole SD
Metal roof joists: VULCRAFT 22K 10 at 6.0 ft OC
5
Steel columns: HSS (Hollow Structural Section) 8 8
16 with 122
5
in. 8 base plates and column head plate at centerline of store
sales room
Figure 7.7 Front elevation of structure.
218
MASONRY STRUCTURES
Pad footing for HSS 8 8 column: 6.0 ft2 18 in. with 7 #5

reinforcement bars bottom each way
Architectural design by Thistle Architecture, Henderson, Nevada
WIND ANALYSIS
Basic formula:
P CeCqqsI
(UBC 1997 20-1)
75 mph, exposure C
qs 12 (12.6 16.4) 14.5 psf (UBC 1997 16-F)
Ce (UBC 1997 16-G):
At 15.0 ft: 1.06
At 25.0 ft (average 2025): 1.16
Cq:
Below parapet/roof connection: 0.8, method 1, 1997 UBC, 16-H
For parapet: 0.8 0.5 1.3, method 1
Wind pressures on component, service level (load factor 1.0):
015 ft p 14.5 0.8 1.06 1.0 12.3 psf External wall
1524.5 ft p 14.5 0.8 1.16 1.0 13.5 psf External wall
Parapet p 14.5 1.3 1.16 1.0 21.9 psf Parapet wall
SEISMIC DESIGN FORCES
Basic formula:
Fp

apCaIp
Rp
13
hx
Wp
hr
(32-2)
where
Ca 0.28
(16-Q)
External wall:
ap 1.0
Rp 3.0
Unbraced parapet:
ap 2.5
Rp 3.0
Ip 1.0
(16-O)
7.5
219
First term of Equation (32-2):

External wall:
1.0 0.28 1.0
0.0933
3.0
0.196
But 0.7 Ca
GOVERNS
Parapet:
2.5 0.28 1.0
0.2333
3.0
Second term of Equation (32-2):
External wall:
1
12.25
3 1.0 1.5 2.5
24.5
Parapet:
1
25.75
3 1.0 3.15 4.15
24.5
Seismic pressure on component:

Wp 68 psf
8-in. CMU, fully grouted
External wall:
Fp 0.196 2.5 68 33.3 psf
at strength level
Parapet:
Fp 0.233 4.15 68 65.7 psf
at strength level
Seismic pressure on component:

External wall: Fp 33.3/1.4 23.8 psf at service level (ASD)
Parapet wall: Fp 65.7/1.4 46.9 psf at service level
Seismic GOVERNS.
220
MASONRY STRUCTURES
Figure 7.8 Seismic pressure on external wall and parapet.
Vertical roof reaction on wall, span 88.0 ft:

wD 21 (14.0 88.0) 616 lb/ft at service level
DL:
DL LL: wDL 12 (14.0 16.0)88.0 1320 lb/ft at service level

Total axial loads include the weight of the wall:
Parapet:
1320 180 1500 lb/ft
DL LL
Wall (midheight):
1320 1000 2320 lb/ft
DL LL
Figure 7.9 View of the masonry wall on the east elevation of the building.
Maximum bending moment:

0.024 24.52 1.5 21.6 k-in./ft
Check stresses in CMU wall:
m 28.8 k-in./16-in. strip
7.5
221
Try 8-in. CMU with #5 at 16 in. OC:
0.31
0.00334
16 (7.62 1.82)
n 26(0.00334) 0.08685
2n 0.1737
(n)2 0.007543
k (n)2 2n n 0.3389
j1
k
0.887
3
jd 0.887 5.8 5.1448

jk 0.30
b
(m/bd 2)2
2 28.8
357 psi 250 psi

jk
16 5.82 0.3
The stress is too high for CMU without special inspection. Try #5 at
8 in. OC:
0.00668
n 0.1737
2n 0.34736
(n)2 0.03016
k (n)2 2n n 0.4407
j 0.853
jd 4.947
jk 0.376
b
2(10.8)
0.213 ksi 250 psi
8 5.82 0.376
OK without special inspection.
m
10.8
7.04 ksi
As jd 0.31 4.947
222
MASONRY STRUCTURES
Try #5 at 24 in. OC for 8-in. CMU with special inspection, m

1500 psi:
0.31
0.002227
24 5.8
n 0.0579
2n 0.1158
(n)2 0.003353
k 0.28729
j 0.904
jd 5.243
jk 0.256
b
2(43.2)
0.418 ksi 418 psi 0.33
24 5.82 0.256
m 500 psi
s
2 21.6
26.58 ksi
0.31 5.243
Bending component only
The axial stress in the bar caused by roof DL weight of wall at

midheighteach half of wall receives one half axial force:
26
616 1000
600 psi
2.9 24
stotal 26,580 600 25,980 psi 24,000 psi allowed

Reinforcement is overstressed when #5 is placed at 24 in. OC. Try
#5 at 16-in. OC:
s
28.8
0.31 5.145
18.0 ksi 24.0 ksi allowed
Bending only
7.5
223
Figure 7.10 Structural details of the project.
VULCRAFT JOISTS
Maximum span 44.0 ft

Maximum spacing 6 ft, 4 in.
Maximum DL LL:
12 3.0 (joist) 20.0 35 psf wDL 6.33 35 221 lb/ft
From the SJI load table, page 11, supplied by NUCOR/VULCRAFT,
Phoenix, Arizona, a 22K10 has a safe load-carrying capacity of
272 lb/ft of the K series with a depth of 20 in.
224
MASONRY STRUCTURES
Figure 7.11 Joist girder-to-column connection.
HSS STEEL COLUMN
Carries a tributary roof area of 44.0 48.0 2112 ft2

Maximum DL LL on column, maximum column spacing 48 ft OC:
0.035 2112 0.04 (girder weight) 48.0
75.8 k
say 76.0
OK
5
From the AISC load tables, an HSS 8 8
16 has a safe loadcarrying capacity of 141 k 76.0 k with KL 25 ft.
5
HSS 8 8
16
BASE PLATE
Assume 12-in.2 58 -in. plate.

Maximum bearing pressure under plate:
76,000
528 psi
12.02
Effective plate span: 3.0 0.625 2.355 in.
Maximum bending moment per inch of slice:
12 (0.528 2.3552) 1.463 k-in.
OK.
7.5
225
Figure 7.12 Base plate and column-to-footing connection.
Sreq.
1.463
0.054 in.3
27.0
or
t 6 0.054 0.57 in. 0.625 in.
Provided by 58 -in. plate.
A 12-in.2 58 -in. base plate with 443 -in. A307, 12-in.
embedment.
OK.
FOOTING DESIGN
Strip Footing
To support external CMU walls

Maximum DL LL vertical load at top of footing:
From roof
(14.0 0.6 20)88.0/2 1144
Weight of wall
26.5 68 1802
2946
say 2950 lb/ft
Minimum required footing width using 2000 psf allowable soil bearing pressure (per soil report):
b
2950
1.48 ft 1.5 ft
2000
However, use 24-in. 15-in. continuous footing.
226
MASONRY STRUCTURES
Figure 7.13 CMU walls continuous footing.
Pad Footings
Under the most loaded column, carrying 40-ft 46-ft tributary area,
Maximum DL LL 72.0 k column load
Using square footings, the minimum width b with 2.0 ksf allowable
bearing pressure is
b
6.0 ft
72.0
2
From the CRSI footing design tables, the minimum footing thickness
with 10-in. 10-in. plate is 14 in. and a reinforcement 7 #5 each
way, grade 60.
Use 6.0-ft2 18-in. deep footing with 7 #5 bottom each way.
REFERENCES
1. Schneider, R. R., and Dickey, W. L. 1994. Reinforced Masonry Design. Upper
Saddle River, NJ: Prentice-Hall.
2. Roark, R. J. 1975. Formulas for Stress and Strains, 5th ed., McGraw-Hill, Kogakusha: Tokyo.
CHAPTER 8
8.1
INTRODUCTION
Historically, wood-framed buildings (type-V timber design) emerged as one

of the best structures to resist earthquakes.
Past performance of wood structures indicates wood to be a safe, durable and
economical building material when it is used properly [ref. 1, p. xiv].
Wood frame dwellings and similar small wooden structures performed excellently [in the Alaskan earthquake of 1964] as a class of construction when
located in an area not subjected to land movement. Also, in many cases, wood
frame dwellings behaved remarkably well in areas that were subject to land
movement [ref. 2, p. 212].
The design of wood-framed buildings was based on sound principles: a stiff

concrete main wall attached to a lightwood framing so that the rigidity of the
concrete was combined with the resilience of the wood framinga sound
concept, an ideal formula. How such a formula was put into practice can be
appreciated by the damage suffered by residential wood buildings during the
Northridge earthquake of 1994.
At the time of the Sylmar (San Fernando) earthquake of 1971 the general
public and the engineering and construction communities in highly populated
areas had enjoyed a seismic break and were under the impression that much
time would elapse until another major event would happen. Lessons from the
San Fernando earthquake were not fully utilized. Although relatively not a
major earthquake, it had seriously damaged buildings, bridges, underground
pipes, and other installations.
227
228
The seismic chasm was shorter than expected. Sixteen years later we were
hit by Whittier Narrows, Loma Prieta, Upland, Sierra Madre, Big Bear, Landers, and Bishop and less than 25 years after San Fernando by a more destructive earthquake roughly in the same populated area.
8.2
NORTHRIDGE LESSON
Before Northridge it was presumed that the construction industry knew

enough to meet the earthquake challenge. The information available had been
mostly gathered from the Long Beach earthquake of 1933, and the experience
was mainly based on the behavior of unreinforced masonry buildings, leaving
other type of structures virtually without scrutiny.
The City of Los Angeles alone reported 2280 failures of wood-framed
buildings during the 1994 Northridge earthquake. Of these, 1650 were homes
that suffered moderate to severe damage, including partial or total collapse.
The remaining 630 were apartment houses, hotels, and condos, 40 with severe
damage that involved leaning or partially collapsed structures.
The 2003 IBC contains provisions for general design requirements for
lateral-force-resisting systems in Section 2305: Structures using wood shear
walls and diaphragms to resist wind, seismic and other lateral loads shall be
designed and constructed in accordance with the provisions of this section.
Next we analyze the type of failures found in wood-framed structures damaged during the Northridge earthquake. The author gathered the information
and took the photographs during his inspection of homes located near or
relatively close to the epicenter of the earthquake.
Crawl Spaces
Crawl spaces are most revealing to show the response of wood-framed buildings under seismic loads. Unlike the rest of the type-V structure, concealed
under architectural rendering, structural wood members in the crawl space
are fully exposed to visual inspection.
Many contemporary residential buildings, either single or tract houses, are
built on a concrete slab, but a very large number of older properties in California were constructed over a crawl space, generally a very shallow minibasement where a number of posts and piers support the interior of the
timber structure. Thus the crawl space plays a pretty important role.
A view of a typical crawl space would show supports consisting of 4 4
posts (some even 2 4) resting on relatively small pyramid-shape piers. In
some cases the truncated pyramid piers were replaced by equally small cylindrical footings, typically cast in place. The piers in general were not wide
enough or did not go deep enough into the ground; thus they were rather
unstable to resist an earthquake; prone to wobble, the piers denied a good
rm support to the oor above.
8.2
NORTHRIDGE LESSON
229
Typically all elements of the assembly were separated, that is, individual
pieces were not connected by structural strong-tie or other metal straps, anchors, or saddles. Before the January 1994 Northridge earthquake, little attention was paid to these internal supports regardless of the vital role they
play in holding up the building. Their adequacy was seldom questioned, taking for granted that the entire assembly would respond to satisfaction.
Among numerous buildings inspected after the Northridge earthquake none
appeared to be engineered; apart from architectural design and layouts, the
structure was unresolved. The entire responsibility for putting the building
together rested on the framer. Common earthquake-caused damage found in
crawl spaces consisted of leaning and tilted posts, displacement of posts relative to the support, some to the point of collapse, beams and girders pulled
off the support, and footings too small to support the structure (Figures 8.1,
8.2, and 8.3). During inspections of earthquake-damaged buildings the author
found posts squashed against the beam as a consequence of bearing failure
of an overstressed structure. Some posts were merely 2 4 nailed together
in a T assembly that could have buckled at any time without a seismic event.
It made one wonder what would have happened had the earthquake lasted 30
seconds longer.
Framing Connections
Engineered metal connectors are a must to join individual wood elements into
a structural unit. Although engineered metal connectors had been around for
many years, only a few buildings had metal straps which, in most cases, were
merely plumber straps (Figures 8.4 and 8.5). What was then used to connect
the individual wood elements to meet a violent earthquake is called toenailingseveral nails driven in at the edge of the wood: joist, beam, or girder
(Figure 8.6). Generally the nails end up at the edge of the post and often
splinter the wood.
Stucco and Wood Frame Assembly
Destructive inspections to expose damages concealed under architectural renderingstucco and drywallsrevealed that the severe vibrations caused by
the earthquake had separated the stucco from the wood frame. This is a serious impairment to the seismic resistance of the structure because the two
major components, the stucco and wood frame, should work together to resist
seismic forces that are mostly lateral.
Cripple Walls
A 16-ft-high wall in the living room of a residential building rocked severely

during the Northridge earthquake and continued to do so afterward (Figure
8.7). Destructive inspection revealed that the wall was constructed of two
230
Figure 8.1 Wooden block in a crawl space crushed by the 1994 Northridge earthquake.
panels nailed together at joining plates in what is known as cripple wall

construction. A cripple walltwo panels nailed togetheris commonly used
where extra ceiling height is needed (higher than the regular 9-ft-tall wall).
Because in a cripple wall the upper panel does not form a monolithic unit
with the rest of the assembly, the assembly tends to perform badly against
seismic forces.
Cripple wall construction is an accepted practice under the umbrella of the
building codes but not from an engineering standpoint. The assembly is not
sufciently stable to resist lateral forces caused by winds or earthquakes. The
joint created by nailing two separate panels tends to pivot and fall apart even
under moderate seismic activity. In structural engineering it would constitute
a hinged joint that provides poor lateral resistance to the wall.
8.2
NORTHRIDGE LESSON
231
Figure 8.2 Dangerously unstable support to the oor above.
Figure 8.3 Rough-and-ready workmanship. Wood wedges inserted under the support
assembly.
232
Figure 8.4 Inspection of damaged buildings found plumber straps in lieu of engineered metal connectors to join individual wood elements.
Figure 8.5 Properly engineered metal connector used to join individual wood elements in the retrotting of an earthquake-damaged residential building.
8.2
NORTHRIDGE LESSON
233
Figure 8.6 Toenailing, an unsafe practice to face a violent earthquake, which pulled
out the nails.
Figure 8.7 Cripple wall damaged during the Northridge earthquake.
234
Garages
Type-V garages were perhaps one of the most neglected structures. With very
few exceptions, those inspected after the Northridge earthquake appeared to
lack sound engineering design and displayed poor workmanship (Figure 8.8).
In most cases garages showed a downgrade in workmanship as compared to
the dwelling portion of the building, which received better attention from the
framer.
Most garages share a major weakness: a relatively large opening created
in the front that leaves no wall surface to resist earthquakes. In the absence
of any structural provision to stabilize the front, garages are at the mercy of
earthquakes and high winds. One of the solutions the author adopted for the
retrotting of damaged garages was to provide a steel portal frame along with
adequate footings to resist lateral seismic loads.
Vaulted Ceilings
Most property owners love space and extra story-height. The trouble with
such a choice is lack of workmanship to support it and, above all, lack of
engineering to back up the style with a sound structure. When inspecting
some earthquake-damaged cathedral-type ceilings the author found ridge
beams with only a thin metal anchor to connect beam and post, which resulted
Figure 8.8 Common sight in earthquake-damaged garages coupled with poor workmanship.
8.2
NORTHRIDGE LESSON
235
in a girder twisted by the earthquake. Obviously, the connection was entirely

insufcient to hold the heavy girder that was holding most of the roof in
place.
Chimneys and Fireplaces
Earthquake-damaged chimneys became a familiar sight in the San Fernando

Valley area of California after the Northridge earthquake (Figures 8.9 and
8.10). A general belief is that, if an unreinforced chimney and replace can
be made stronger against seismic forces, the problem is solved. In the authors
opinion, masonry chimneys, reinforced or unreinforced, are incompatible with
the relatively frail framework of a wood construction building.
Construction Defects and Earthquake Damage
Consideration of construction defects versus earthquake damage is not always

clear-cut:
Case 1 It had to be established whether sagging of the roof was the result
of earthquake-caused damage. Inspection of the loft found large wood
knots at a critical location in two adjacent roof rafters. The wood defect
had reduced by about 40% the load-carrying capacity of the rafters.
Figure 8.9 Two-story stone replace that collapsed during the Northridge earthquake.
236
Figure 8.10 One of the numerous poorly built replaces damaged by the Northridge
earthquake.
Being adjacent to each other, no load transfer could take place between
the rafters. This was a true construction defect.
Case 2 The insured claimed that his vaulted ceiling was sagging due to
earthquake damage. The problem appeared similar to case 1. When the
author examined the exposed structure it turned out that a minor horizontal crack caused by the earthquake had split the rafter lengthwise.
The crack had propagated from a sizable wood knot at the critical point
of support, attracting maximum shear force and stresses. The insurance
company ruled that this was earthquake damage because the earthquake
had aggravated an initial construction defect. The roof was of the asphalt
shingle type and had to be entirely replaceda costly operation to replace one faulty structural element.
In case 1 a trained engineering eye helped avoid expensive reroong. The
entire matter is complexa lot depends on individual judgment and the skill,
knowledge, and experience of the inspector to make the difference between
a less costly repair and an expensive replacement.
Revisiting the crawl spaces, images of leaning posts, and disintegrating
support elements, one would ask: Are these truly earthquake-caused damages
or could they have been avoided by better construction? As mentioned earlier,
had the connections been strapped by proper metal hardware, the entire assembly would have performed far better in the earthquake. Leaving connec-
8.3
CASE 1: STEEL-REINFORCED WOOD-FRAMED BUILDING
237
tions loose without proper metal straps is a serious construction deciency.

Depending on the knowledge and the experience of forensic engineers and
inspectors in the matter of safety issues, some may not rule such cases as
construction defects. The 1994 UBC was not specic on the issue of strapping
of wood elements, leaving it to the discretion of plan examiners and city
inspectors. Next we analyze design examples of wood-framed structures in
various seismic zones.
8.3
Seismic: Low- to Moderate-Seismicity Area

The structure is located in a relatively moderate seismicity zone near a
higher seismicity region. We provided steel frames to resist seismic and
wind forces (Figures 8.118.15).
PROJECT DESCRIPTION
The project is an 8400-ft2 wood-framed residential building consisting

of a partial underground basement of reinforced masonry construction
and two-garage-and-shop, 1900-ft2 attached structure.
WIND ACTING ON THREE-STORY STEEL FRAME ON GRIDLINE

1 (EASTWEST DIRECTION)
At roof plate level

20.0(8.0 8.0/2) 14.0
1680 lb 1.68 k
2
At second-oor level
Hr
19.0 3.0 (14.0 8.0)

630 lb 0.63 k
2
At rst-oor level
H2
H1
17.4 3.0 14.0

580 lb 0.58 k
2
These loads were input into a computer analysis, Two-Story Front M

Frame, combined with roof and oor dead loads,
238
Figure 8.11 View of the three-story north elevation. As the terrain slopes down
sharply toward the riverfront, the north elevation became three stories high. (Architectural design by SM Designs, Inc.)
wr 0.50 k/ft
w2 w1 0.15 k/ft
and
respectively, and roof and oor live loads,

wrL 0.44 k/ft
w2L w1L 0.50 k/ft
and
WIND ACTING ON STEEL FRAME, GRIDLINE 2
Hr 20.0 3.0 7.0 8.5
8.0
2
21.0
2
3046 lb 3.046 k
8.3
239
Figure 8.12 Plan view of the three-story steel frame at the north elevation showing
the horizontal steel beams and the HSS 6 4 38 steel columns.
Figure 8.13 First stages of erection of the steel frames that will provide additional
support against wind and seismic forces to the type-V building.
240
Figure 8.14 View of the second and third oors of the north elevation with the steel
frame in place.
H2 19.0 3.0 7.0
14.0 8.0
2
21.0
2
2600 lb 2.60 k
combined with oor dead and live loads as

w2D 0.25 k/ft
w2L 0.86 k/ft
Figure 8.15 Plan view of the steel frame that supports the two-story structure at the
south elevation.
8.3
241
STEEL FRAME ANALYSIS AND DESIGN, GRIDLINE 1
1. Design of Beams
Largest beam moment for the entire structural system:
16.55 k-ft 198.6 k-in. for beam 16, loading case 5
Allowable stress for the W8 24:
with
Lu 15.2 ft
Fb 22 ksi
Required section modulus:

Sreq.
198.6
9.02 in.3 18.2 in.3
2
Provided by W8 24.
OK.
2. Design of Columns
6 4 38 HSSstructural tubing.
The worst load combinations are for column 10.
The maximum moment is caused by dead plus 0.75 live plus 0.75
wind, 1997 UBC load combination (12-11), our computer load
combination 5. See Appendix at the end of this chapter.
Mmax 12.32 k-ft 147.8 k-in.
Axial:
P 6.30 k.
Design 6438 HSS (AISC ASD design):

L 10.0 12 120
Sectional properties, Table C-50, AISC Manual:
A 6.58 in.2
Sx 9.90 in.3
KL 1.0 120
78
ry
1.54
ry 1.54
Fa 15.6 ksi
242
Maximum allowable bending stress:

Fb 0.75 Fy 0.75 46 34.0 ksi
fb
147.8
14.92 ksi
9.9
fc
6.3
0.96 ksi
6.58
14.92 0.96
c
0.5 1.0
Fb Fc
34
15.6
OK
Design Beam-to-Column Plate and Bolts
Maximum axial tension in the two 78 -in. bolts:

V Mmax /lever arm to centerline of compression edge of HSS.
Lever arm 6.0 1.5 7.5 in.:
V
147.8
19.7 k 2 26.5 53.0 k
7.5
53.0 k is the capacity of two 78 -in. A325 bolts
(AISC ASD Table I-A, Part 4).
OK.
Maximum moment acting on the beam-to-column plate at the face

of HSS 6 4 column:
19.7 1.25 24.6 k-in.
Attach 2-in-wide, 2-in-deep triangular haunch to support beam-tocolumn bearing plate. Static moment about the top surface of the
T assembly:
4.5 0.5 0.25 0.562
2.5 0.5 1.00 1.250
1.812 in3
Area 4.5 0.5 2.5 0.5 3.50 in.2:
8.3
243
yT 1.812/3.50 0.518 in.

I1-1 31 (4.5 0.53 0.5 2.53) 2.792 in.4
ICG 2.792 (3.50 0.5182) 2.792 in.4
Sbott 2.792/(2.5 0.52) 1.41 in.3
Maximum stress in bracket:
b
24.6
17.5 ksi 27.0 ksi
1.41
OK
DESIGN OF BEAMS, GRIDLINE 2
The largest moment occurs in beam 9, from #5 computer load combination:

Mmax 14.75 k-ft 177 k-in.
Sreq.
177.0
8.0 in.3 18.2 in.3
22.0
Provided by W8 21.
OK.
LATERAL ANALYSIS AND DESIGN: GARAGE
Wind is acting in the eastwest direction.

Forces on Front Shear Walls
Total length: 3 4 12.0 ft

Tributary wind area (47.0/2) (18.0 9.5) 223 sqft
Wind force on three-shear-wall system: V 17.4 223 3884 lb
Linear shear: v 3884/12.0 324 lb/ft 380 lb/ft
Provided by 38 -in. OSB with 8d nails at 3, 3, 12-in. OC.
(1997 UBC, Table 23-II-I-1)
Note. OSB: oriented strand board wood panel.
244
Overturning/Hold-Down Bolts
Mo
3884
18.0 23,000 lb-ft 23.0 k-ft
3
Weight of roof and wall on shear wall:

w
8 2.0 40.0
4 18.0 12 1184 lb
2
Net uplift:
T
23.0
1.18 4.95 k 5.51 k
3.75
Provided by Simpsons HD6A
OK.
Footing Design
Each shear wall pier will be:

1. Provided by 2.5 6.0 2.0-ft deep footing
2. Connected by an 18-in.2 continuous grade beam
The grade beam serves to counteract the base moment caused by the
wind. The factored base moment per shear wall is
Mu
1.3 23.0
10.0 k-ft 120.0 k-in.
3
The resistance of the 18-in.2 beam with two #6 longitudinal reinforcements is

Mn 0.9 (2 0.44) 60.0 0.80 (18.0 3.375) 556 k-in.
Larger than 120 k-in. applied.
OK
Glued Laminated Beams (Glulam, GLBs) to Support Garage Roof

(Figure 8.16)
Maximum span 22.0 ft

Unit weights: DL 8.0 psf
LL 20.0 psf. Total 28.0 psf
Mmax 0.56 22.52 1.5 283.5 k-in.
w 0.028 20 0.56
8.3
245
Figure 8.16 Glued laminated beams to support garage roof and door.
Tributary width 20.0 ft using 24 DF/DF (Douglas r) grade

283.5
118 in.3 192 in.3
Sreq.
2.4
Provided by 518 15 GLB.
OK.
GLB Header Over 16.0-ft Garage Door, Span 16.5 ft.
DL 2.0 8 6 10 15 91 lb/ft
LL 2.0 20 40 lb/ft. Total 131 lb/ft 0.131 k/ft
Mmax 0.131 16.52 1.5 53.4 k-in.
Sreq.
53.4
22.3 in.3 123 in.3
2.4
OK
GLB to Support Second Floor Over Kitchen (Figure 8.17)
Tributary width: (21.0 7.0)/2 14.0 ft. Maximum span 14.5 ft

DL 12 psf
LL 40 psf, Total 52 psf
246
Figure 8.17 GLB to support second oor over kitchen.
wDL 0.052 14.0 0.73 k/ft

Say 0.75 k/ft
2
Mmax 0.75 14.5 1.5 236.5 k-in.
Sreq. 236.5/2.4 98.6 in.3 123 in.3
OK.
max (5/384)(0.75 14.5) 14.53 123 /738 1800 0.56in. L/240 0.72 in.
OK.
6 6 Posts
Consider two maximum loads:

1. Garage: Pmax 12.0 20.0 0.032 7.8 k/9.0 ft high
2. Kitchen/living room: Pmax 9.0 14.0 0.052 6.6 k with
13.0-ft height
GOVERNS
Fc 1.2 ksi
Effective length factor: Le /d 13.0 12/5.5 28 26
Slender, use Fc 0.3E/(Le /d)2 0.3 1600/282 0.61 ksi
Capacity of column: P 0.61 5.52 18.5 k 6.6 k
applied
OK
6 6 post OK.
Garage Foundation
Footing under 6 6 post supporting roof GLB

Tributary area: 12.0 20 240 sqft
8.4
CASE 2: WOOD-FRAMED TWO-STORY HOME
247
Pmax (0.012 0.02) 240 7.68 k

Minimum footing size: 7.68/1.0 2.77 ft
Provide 4-ft, 6-in.2 15 in. with 5 #4
bottom each way reinforcement.
Footing for 6 6 Post in Kitchen
Pmax 6.6 k
Minimum footing size: b 6.6/1.0 2.57 ft
But provide 3-ft, 6-in.2 15 with 4 #4
bottom each way reinforcement.
8.4
PROJECT DESCRIPTION
The structure comprises living quarters at ground level and a game room
and portion of a balcony at the second level. Building total length is
94.0 ft measured along its centerline. The footprint of the building forms
a V shape; the lower roof and second oor act as a continuous diaphragm that activates all the shear walls resisting wind or seismic. A
three-car garage attached to the wing of the building will be treated as
separate entity for lateral forces.
Roof LL 20 psf; oor LL 40 psf; external balcony LL 60 psf
Soil prole SC
Wind 75 mph, exposure C
UBC 1997 design provisions were followed.
SEISMIC ANALYSIS
Mass of First-Story Structure
Second-oor and balcony weight

10.00(18 20.5 18 30) 8.0[12.0(19.5 14.5)] 12,600 lb
Lower roof
248
22.0(46 7.33 30 17 9 30 10 8 15 16
25 20) 42,600 lb
Upper roof
22.0(18.5 50) 6 (12 33) 22,800 lb
Weight of walls impacting lower roof/second-oor diaphragm
First-story walls
8,000 lb
Second-story walls
3,000 lb
Second-story walls impacting upper roof
3,000 lb
Mass impacting second-oor/lower roof diaphragm
Mass impacting upper roof diaphragm
Total mass
66,200 lb
25,800 lb
92,000 lb
Longitudinal Analysis
T Ct(hn)3 / 4 0.02(19.0)0.75 0.182 s

Ca 0.33
Ts
Cv 0.45
Cv
0.45
0.545 s 0.182 s
2.5Ca 2.5 0.33
To 0.2Ts 0.110 s
Use upper plateau of Fig. 16.3, UBC 1997, Vol. 2 (Figure 8.18)
V 2.5(0.33)
1.0
5.5
92 0.15(92) 13.8 k
GOVERNS
Wind is not a determining factor in the longitudinal direction at its base

shear:
(1.4) (5.9) 8.3 k 13.8 k
Between the two longitudinal shear walls the inner (rear) shear wall
carries a larger unit shear:
v
13,800
258 lb/ft 260 lb/ft allowed
2 26.67
By 38 -in. OSB/Plywood with/8d nails at 6, 6, 12 in. OC,

UBC Table 23-II-I-1.
8.4
249
Figure 8.18 Design response spectra.
Hold-Down/Uplift
Among the shear wall panels the 4.0-ft shear wall panel will receive the
largest of the hold-down (HD) uplifting force. The shear wall will share
4.0/2 26.67 0.075 of the total base shear.
Uplift
13.8(0.075) 10.0/3.75
Less roof and second-floor DL reaction
7.25(9.5 22 6.0 10)/1000
Net uplift
2.67 k
2.00 k
0.67 k 1.95 k
Provided by Simpsons STHD8 or HD2A with/ 58 HD bolts.

SEISMIC IN TRANSVERSE DIRECTION
Seismic in the transverse direction is resisted by several walls on the

left side but lesser shear walls on the right-hand side of the building
250
(kitchen/family room). The share of lateral force on each wall will be

calculated on the basis of tributary areas. As the width of the building,
effective to counter lateral forces, is constant, the exercise is reduced to
length issues proportional to tributary areas. Because the total length of
the building is 94.0 ft measured along its centerline, the central wall
adjacent to the stairs shares
31.5/94(13.8) 4.60 k
The total length of the shear wall including the dining room wall aligned
within 2.0 ft of the stair wall is 31.0 ft:
v
4600
150 lb/ft 260 lb/ft
31.0
Allowed by 38 -in. OSB/plywood with 8d at 6, 6, 12 in. OC,

UBC 1997, Table 23-II-I-1.
Family Room/Bedroom 2 and 3 Shear Wall
Total length 26.5 ft

Lateral force shared by this wall: (17.5/94)(13.8) 2.57 k
v 2570/26.5 97 lb/ft 100 lb/ft
Allowed by 12 -in. gypsum drywall with 5d cooler nails at 7 in. OC.
End Wall, Right Elevation
Load share of this wall: (9.0/94)(13.8) 1.32 k

Length of OSB shear wall panels: 3 4.0 12.0 ft
v 1320/12.0 110 lb/ft 260 lb/ft
Provided by 38 -in. OSB with 8d at 6, 6, 12 in. OC.
VERTICAL LOAD ANALYSIS

Master Bedroom Door Header
Span 8.25 ft
DL 8.4 22 6.0 6 223 lb/ft
LL 8.4 14 6.0 14 200 lb/ft
Total DL LL 0.42 k/ft
8.4
Sreq.
251
0.42 8.252 1.5

29.6 in.3 30.6 in.3
1.45
Provided by 4 8.
GLB to Support Second-Floor Patio
Span 16.0 ft
LL 6.0 60 360 lb/ft
DL 6.0 6 36 lb/ft
396 lb/ft
Say 0.4 k/ft
0.4 16.02 1.5
64.0 in.3 117 in.3
Sreq.
2.4
Provided by 318 15-in. GLB.
Deection
5
(0.4 16)(163)(123)879 1.5 103
384
0.44 in. 0.53 in.
L
360
OK
Patio Column Footings
Pad footings will be provided.

Two-story portion: 12 (14.5 16.5)(17.0) 263 sqft
(14.5 16.5) 12.0
Maximum oor tributary area:
93.0 ft2
4
DL roof 0.022 263
5.79 k
LL roof 0.4 0.02 263 2.11 k
DL floor 0.008 93
0.74 k
LL floor 0.4 0.06 93 2.23 k
Total
10.87 k
breq. (10.87/1.0)1 / 2 3.3 ft 3 ft, 4 in. square footing dim.
Strip Footing for Main Front Bearing Wall
In front of but not at the entrance door:

Tributary width of roof: 34.0/2 17.0 ft
Tributary width of oor: 10.0 5.0 15.0 ft
OK.
252
Maximum linear loads received from

Roof: (22 0.4 20) 17.0 510 lb/ft
Floor: (8 0.4 40) 15.0 360 lb/ft
Weight of wall: 10.0 20 200 lb/ft
Total load
1070 lb/ft
Required footing width:
1.07
1.07 ft 1.3 ft 15 in. provided
1.0
8.5
OK
CASE 3: STEEL-REINFORCED TWO-STORY DUPLEX
PROJECT DESCRIPTION
This is a wood-framed construction, two-story residential duplex at the

riverfront in a moderate- to high-seismicity area (Figure 8.19). The engineering analysis took into consideration the seismic region as well as
the 75-mph winds in the area. The soil prole is SC. The allowable
bearing pressure is 1500 psf per the geotechnical report. The front frame
is reinforced with HSS steel columns (Figure 8.20) and rolled wideange steel beams at roof level and GLBs at the second-oor balcony
level.
WIND LATERAL ANALYSIS

Riverfront Frame
The riverfront frame receives roof reaction because wind impacts on the
front frame blowing downstream in the northsouth direction. The major
impact is at eaves level. Using the 1997 UBC projected-area method,
the lateral wind pressure on the gable end at 23.0 ft CG height, exposure
C, is
p 12.6 (1.166) (1.3)(1.0) 19.0 psf
The tributary area is 12 (9.6 22) 106 sqft. The total lateral wind load
acting at eaves level is
Figure 8.19 Front plan view of structural elevation showing steel frame.
253
254
Figure 8.20 Detail of HSS tubing in section A of riverfront structural elevation.
Hr 0.019 106 2.0 k horizontal

The wind load will be shared by four HSS steel columns, i.e., 0.5 k per
column. The columns are 20.0 ft high and
Mmax 0.5 20.0 10.0 k-ft 120 k-in. at fixed base
Sreq.
120
3.75 in.3 8.5 in.3
32
3
Provided by HSS 7 5
16 structural steel tube.
OK.
However, a 14 -in.-thick tube will be used for better deection control.

Design Steel Beam
Sreq.
120
5.45 in.3 13.4 in.3
22
Provided by W6 20 grade A36.
OK.
Note: A36 vs. A992 A992 is noted as the preferred structural steel
in the AISC Manual of Steel Construction, LRFD, 3rd edition, 2005. A
concern about the welding properties of A992 as opposed to the old
A36 was addressed by AISC Technical Assistance Director Kurt Gustafson, S.E.
There has been a lot of research on the subject of connection details
for seismic conditions since the Northridge E.Q. Much of this involves
the ductility of the connections. In addition to the base material, the weld
8.5
CASE 3: STEEL-REINFORCED TWO-STORY DUPLEX
255
rod and the specic details of seismic connections were studied. Stipulations were incorporated in the AISC Seismic Provisions to enhance the
ductility of connections. ASTM A992 was added to the AWS D1.1-2000
in Table 3.1. The steel mills did considerable testing to get it approved.
On the material question inquired, it was known that almost all ASTM
A36 material of recent production actually had yield stresses closer to 50
ksi than the 36 ksi required minimum. This placed the yield level very
close to the tensile strength resulting in diminished ductility from material
with lower yields. The ASTM A992 Specication now has a Carbon
Equivalent (CE) of 0.45 for shapes, and places a maximum yield-to-tensile
ratio of 0.85 on the material to assure some level of ductility. The AISC
2002 Seismic Provisions stipulate a design requirement in the form of a
Ry Factor to assure this level of ductility. ASTM A36 still can be used,
but the associated Ry Factor is greater than that for ASTM A992 material.
Riverfront Shear Walls Each Side of Bay Windows
Total length: 5.0 2 5.0 5.0 20.0 ft

Total lateral force acting on shear wall system: (10.0 40.0/2)(19.0)
3800 lb
Linear shear induced to shear walls v 3800/20.0 190 lb/ft
260 lb/ft
Provided by 38 -in. OSB with 8d at 6, 6, 12 in.
OK,
1997 UBC, Table 23-II-I-1.
Shear Walls, Garage Front
Total north-south wind impacting on each door shear wall: 19.0

(10.5 30.0/2) 2990 lb
Total shear wall length: 2 40 8.0 ft. The linear shear: v 2990/
8.0 374 lb/ft 380 lb/ft
Provided by 38 -in. OSB w/8d at 4, 4, 12 OC
OK.
Overturning effect on each shear wall panel:

Vertical uplift at each end: To (2.99/2) 9.0/4.0 3.36 k
Less weight of roof:
0.022 7.0 26.0/2 2.00 k
Net uplift 1.36 4.0 k
Provided by HD5A on 6 6 post
Second-Floor Balcony GLB
Carries balcony reaction

Spans 19.4 ft between HSS steel columns
OK.
256
Tributary width: 14.0/2 7.0 ft

WDL 7.0 (60.0 10.0) 10.0 500 lb/ft
Maximum vertical reaction:
9.4(0.5) 4.7 k
Sreq. 0.5 19.42
1.5
117.6 in.3 123 in.3
2.4
Provided by 518 -in. 12 GLB.
OK.
Maximum horizontal shear:

h
4700
76.0 psi 200 psi
61.5
OK
GLB over Riverfront Bay Windows
Supports balcony and second oor

Span 20.0 ft
Tributary width: (30.0 14.0)/2 22.0 ft
WDL 22.0 (40.0 0.6 10) 750 lb/ft 0.75 k/ft
Sreq. 0.75 22.02 1.5/2.4 226 in.3 232 in.3
8.6
OK.
CASE 4: WOOD-FRAMED COMMERCIAL BUILDING

The calculations will show that, even though the structure is in a highseismicity region, seismic does not govern in this case study.
PROJECT DESCRIPTION
This is a 50 80-ft commercial building on a 56,000-sqft lot in Victorville, California, with a retail area of 4000 sq ft, in a high-seismicity
area (Developers: Glen & Pearl Ludwig. Architect: Steve Shover). Plate
height is 14.25 ft, parapet height is 16.0 ft, and roof structure is open
web trusses. See Figure 8.21.
8.6
257
Figure 8.21 Architectural rendering of case 4 building.
DESIGN CRITERIA
The building was designed and engineered in compliance with the 1997
UBC, the 1997 Fire Code, and the City of Victorville Development
Code. See Figure 8.22 for the building plan.
Wind 70 mph, exposure C, seismic zone 4
Soil prole SC
Maximum wind pressure by projected-area method:
p CeCqqsIw 12.6(1.07)(1.3)(1.0) 17.5 psf
WIND ANALYSIS
First eastwest wind analyzed

Total horizontal wind force acting on larger (80-ft-long) west wall
reacting at plate level:
V 17.5 (80.0) 4.0
12.0
14,000 lb
2
Lateral wind force reacting on northern external shear wall at plate

level:
H
14,000
7000 lb
2
258
Figure 8.22 Foundation plan showing the layout of the building. On the right: details of perimeter footings and steel reinforcement
shown encircled on the layout as 1 / S-2, 2 / S-2, and 3 / S-2.
8.6
259
North External Shear Wall
Length: L 13.5 12.5 26.0 ft

Unit shear at base of wall: v 7000/26.0 260 lb/ft
Provided by 38 -in. Plywood/OSB with 8d at 6, 6, 12 in.,
(UBC Table 23-II-I-1.)
Overturning effect on 12.5-ft-long shear wall
Shear force shared: H12.5 (12.5/26.0) 7000 3365 lb
Overturning effect: Mo 3365 12.0 40.4 k-ft
Uplift at the HD bolt is
V
40.4
3.23 k
12.5
less
6.25 16.0 10 (6.25 6.0)(1.0)(10) 1130 lb 1.13 k
Net uplift at HD 2.00 k 2.03 k
Provided by HPAHD22 (Simpsons Catalog).
Right South Shear Wall
Length: L 12.5 15.3 4.0 32.0 ft.

The base shear on this wall consists of 7000 lb from the main structure plus the wind reaction on the tower.
Reaction of wind on the tower: VT 20 (18.0) (6.0 3.5)
3400 lb.
Total wind force reaction on right (south) shear wall at base:
H 7000 3400 10,400 lb
v
10,400
325 lb/ft 380 lb/ft
32.0
Provided by 38 -in. plywood/OSB with 8d at 4, 4, 12 in.,

260
West Shear Wall
Wind acting in northsouth direction

Wind reaction on west wall including wind on tower:
Hw 17.5
52.66
(6.0 4.0) 3400 8.000 lb
2
Total shear wall length: L 2.25 14.0 11.75 10.0 2.25

40.25 ft
v 8000/40.25 198 lb/ft 260 lb/ft
Provided by 38 -in. plywood/OSB with 8d at 6, 6, 12 in.,
East Shear Wall
Total length of wall 80.0 ft

Total shear force acting at its base:
HE 4600 lb
v
4600
58 lb/ft 125 lb/ft
80
Provided by 58 -in. drywall with 6d cooler nails at 7 in. OC, 1997

UBC, Vol. I.
EARTHQUAKE ANALYSIS, ZONE 4, SOIL PROFILE SC
Eastwest E.Q. direction.

Seismic Force on North External Wall
Weight of eastwest external wall reaction as mass at plate height

(80.0/2)(12.0/2 4.0) 8.0
6,400 lb
Weight of ofce/storage roof (40.0)(8.0)(6.0)
1,910 lb
Weight of eastwest partition wall (51.167)(12.0/2)(6.0)
1,842 lb
Weight of main roof (51.167)(80.0/2)
2,048 lb
12,200 lb
Using the UBC 1997 seismic provisions:
8.6
261
Ct 0.2
R 5.5
(Table 16-H)
I 1.0
T Ct (h)3 / 4 0.02(16.0)3 / 4 0.16 s
Z 0.4
Na 1.0
(10 km, Table 16-S)
Ca 0.4 Na 0.4
Nv 1.0
(Table 16-T)
Cv 0.56
Nv 0.56
The base shear for the wall is

V
CvI
0.56(1.0)
W
W 0.636W
RT
5.5(0.16)
V 0.11CaI W 0.044 W
0.8ZNvI
0.8(0.4)(1.0)(1.0)
W
W 0.058 W
R
5.5
(30-4)
(30-6)
(30-7)
But the total design base shear need not exceed the following
V
2.5CaI
W
R
UBC 1997 (30-5)
2.5CaI
W 0.1818W
R
Therefore the maximum base shear on the north external shear wall is
derived as
V 0.1818 (12.2) 2.218 kips
corresponding to the linear shear
262
v 2218/26.0 85 lb/ft
Seismic DOES NOT GOVERN.

Seismic Design Force on South Wall Acting EastWest
Total weight acting at plate level including weight of tower:

Main east and west walls
Main roof
Buttress walls
Total
6,400
2,048
2,302
10,750
lb
lb
lb
lb
V 0.1818 (10.75) 1.95 k 1900 lb

v
1900
60 lb/ft
32.8
Seismic DOES NOT GOVERN.
VERTICAL LOAD SUPPORT SYSTEM

GLB to Support Main Roof Reaction over Opening
Maximum span 12.5 ft (Figure 8.23)

The GLB carries:
Main roof LL
Main roof DL
Girder and miscellaneous
Total
20.0 50.0/2 500

10.0 50.0/2 250
150
900
lb/ft
lb/ft
lb/ft
lb/ft
Mmax 0.9 12.52 1.5 211.0 k-in.

Sreq.
211.0
88.0 in.3 123.0 in.3
2.4
Provided by 518 -in. 12 GLB.
Shear
Maximum shear span 12.0 ft

vmax [(3/2) 12.0(0.9)]/2 61.5 0.132 ksi 155 psi
allowed
OK
8.6
263
Figure 8.23 Glulam beam-to-column connection.
Maximum deection:
max
(5/384)(0.9 12.5)(12.5)3(12)3
0.37 in. 0.42 in.
738 1.8 103
L
150
0.42 in.
360 360
Deection OK.
FOUNDATIONS: PERIMETER FOOTINGS
The worst loading condition occurs for the longitudinal external walls:
Maximum roof reaction (DL LL) (37)(50.0/2) 925 lb/ft
Weight of external wall
200 lb/ft
Total 1125 lb/ft
The required minimum footing width is
264
8.7
1.125
1.125 ft 1.25 ft
1.0
Provided
CASE 5: WOOD-FRAMED RESIDENTIAL BUILDING
Seismic: High-Seismicity Area.
PROJECT DESCRIPTION
This is a one-story residence, including three-car garage, in the County

of Riverside, California (Architecture by Dondelinger Designs). See Figures 8.24 and 8.25.
Dimensions: dwelling 3026 sqft; garage area 816 sqft; patios and
porches 246 sqft
Wind 75 mph, exposure C
Soil prole SD
Allowable bearing pressure 2500 per geotechnical report
The building was designed and engineered in March of 2003 in compliance with the 1997 UBC. Following are the engineering calculations,
which apply to lateral analysis and design and gravity load analysis
and design.
LATERAL ANALYSIS AND DESIGN
The lateral analysis covered seismic analysis and wind analysis.
Figure 8.24 Architectural rendering of the building.
8.7
265
Figure 8.25 Floor plan of the building. 1. Master Bdrm, 2. Family Room, 3. Dining
area, 4. Bdrm. 2, 5. Bdrm. 3, 6. Bdrm. 4, 7. Covered patio, 8. 3-car garage.
266
Seismic Analysis
We used UBC 1997 seismic provisions in conjunction with the recommendations of the geotechnical report. The seismic input data are as
follows:
High-seismicity area
Soil prole SD with median shear wave velocity 270 m/s
Fault type B at 7.0 km
Na 1.0 (16-S)
Nv 1.12 (16-T)
Ca 0.44Na 0.44
Cv 0.64Nv 0.72
T Ct (h3 / 4) 0.02 (18.00.75) 0.175 s
Ts Cv /2.5 Ca 0.655 sec 0.175 s
Therefore equations (30-5) and (30-6) will be compared and selected:
V
2.5CaI
1.0
W 1.1
W 0.2W
R
5.5
GOVERNS
V (0.11)(0.44)(1.0)W 0.048W
(30-5)
(30-6)
Adding the individual unit weights of external and internal walls plus
the weight of the roof and Vseismic of 18 k lateral, we reached a total of
90,000 lb for the design mass of the building.
Wind Analysis
The worst scenario is wind acting on one of the long sides of the building, that is, the entrance side. With 75 mph, exposure C,
P (1.09)(1.3)(15.8)(1.0) 22.4 psf
for roof
P (1.06)(1.3)(15.8)(1.0) 21.8 psf
for walls
The total wind at working load level is

82 [(9.0/2) 21.8 (7.0 22.4)] 20,900 lb
At the limit-state level
8.7
267
VW 1.4(20.9) 29.2 k
Wind GOVERNS acting on the long side.
and
VW 6.6[(9.0/2) 21.8 (6.0 22.4)](1.4) 21,500 lb 21.5 k
Wind also governs acting on the short direction.
Thus the governing base shears to t UBC 1997, Chapter 23, are
V 20.9 k
for minor axis
V 15.4
for major axis
Shear Wall Design
Shear walls will share lateral force in proportion to their tributary width.
The external garage shear wall shares
H
7.5
(20.9) 1.91 k
82
The linear shear is

v
1910
81 lb/ft
23.5
using two 4-ft-wide shear wall panels and

v
1910
238 lb/ft 260 lb/ft
8.0
Provided by 38 -in. plywood with 8d at 6, 6, 12 in. OC.

Hold-down requirements are as follows:
Uplift: entire garage wall resists uplift with roof sitting on it
Vo 1.91 9.0/2.30 0.75 k
Less weight of roof 0.97 k
0.22 k 3.80 k compression
268
No theoretical uplift occurs. Nonetheless one Simpsons STHD8 will be

provided at each end.
External Master Bedroom Wall
Length 17.0 ft
H (15.0/82)(20.9) 3.82 k
v 3820/17.0 225 lb/ft 260 lb/ft
Hold-down requirements are as follows
Vo 3.82 9.0/16.75 2.05 k
Less weight of roof and wall 2.14 k
No theoretical hold-down is needed. Nevertheless one STHD8 will be
provided at each end of the external surface.
Garage (Right), Dining, Kitchen Shear Wall Complex
Total lateral load on this wall system, tributary width 17.5 ft, is determined as
H (17.5/82)(20.9) 4.46 k
L 21.5 14.5 22.0 58.0 ft
V
4460
77 lb/ft
58
However, only 21.0 ft wall width needs to be shear paneled using 38 -in.
plywood:
v 4460/21 212 lb/ft 260 lb/ft
Provided by 38 -in. plywood with 8d at 6, 6, 12 in. OC,

Vo 4.46 (9.0/21.0) 1.91 k
No theoretical uplift occurs. Nevertheless one STHD8 will be provided
at each end.
8.7
269
Porch/Bedroom 2 Wall
Length 13.5 ft
Tributary width 20.0 ft
H (20.0/82) 20.9 5.1 k
v 5100/13.5 377 lb/ft 380 lb/ft
Provided by 38 -in. plywood with 8d at 4, 4, 12 in. OC,
Hold-down requirements are
Vo 5.1
9.0
3.5 k 4.0
13.0
Provided by HD5A (Simpsons Catalog)
OK.
Family Room/Bedroom Wall
Length 17.5 ft
H (16.0/82)(20.9) 4.08 ft
v 4080/17.5 233 lb/ft 380 lb/ft
Vo 4.08(9.0/17.0) 2.1 k 3.7 k
Provided by HD5A on 22x wall stud.
OK.
Right External Wall
Length 38.25 ft
H (6.0/82) 20.9 1.53 k
v (1530/38.25) 40 lb/ft 260 lb/ft
Vo 1530 9.0/38.0 360 lb
Less weight of roof and wall 2600 lb
No uplift occurs; nevertheless one STHD8 strap will be provided at each
end of the wall.
270
Longitudinal Shear Wall Design
Only the external walls of dwelling and garage front entrance will be
utilized to resist lateral forces. The total length of the left (rear) shear
wall system is
L 2 2.5 6.5 3.75 6.5 3.25 3.5 28.5 ft
The total length of the right (front) shear wall system excluding the
front wall of the garage is
L (30.25 2.75) 4.0 2.75 3.5
3.25 (3.0 2) 7.75 54.75 ft
The garage being treated as a separate structure, the total wind force
acting along the longitudinal axis is
V [12 (22.4 21.8)][12 (9.0) 8.0)][12 (38.7 45.3)] 11,600 lb
or
5800 lb acting on each, left or right, shear wall system
Left (Rear) Shear Wall System
The nominal linear shear on the left (rear) wall system is

v
5800
204 lb/ft 260 lb/ft
28.5

Uplift
The worst scenario for uplift is the 3.25-ft shear wall panel at bedroom
4. The load shared by the panel is derived as follows:
H (3.25/28.5) 5.8 0.66 k
Vo 0.66 (9.0/3.0) 1.98 k
Less weight of portion of roof & wall 2.96 k
No uplift can occur; nevertheless one STHD8 will be provided at each
end of the bedroom wall. The front shear wall system is less stressed
than the rear. The same 38 -in. plywood with 8d at 6, 6, 12 in. OC will
be used with STHD8 straps at shear wall extremities.
8.7
271
Garage Front Wall
The total wind load impacting the garage front shear walls is
V 22.1
27.5
13.0 3950 lb
2
acting on four 24-in.-wide piers. The linear shear for each pier is
v
3950
490 lb/ft 510 lb/ft
42
19
Provided by
32 -in. plywood with 10d at 4, 4, 12 in. OC,
Hold-down requirements are as follows:

Vo 1.0 (9.0/1.75) 5.14 k
Less weight of roof (12.0 23.5)(22/4 1000) 1.54 k
Net uplift 3.60 k 4.0 k
Provided by HD5A on 6 6 lumber.
OK.
GRAVITY LOAD ANALYSIS AND DESIGN

Headers
8-ft Opening, Nook

Roof tributary width: (45.0/2) 2.0 24.5 ft
wDL 24.5(22.0 16.0) 930 lb/ft, say 1.0 k/ft
With allowable stress Fb 1350 psi for DF (Douglas Fir) 1
Sreq. 1.0 8.52 1.5/1.35 80.3 in.3 121.2 in.3
Provided by 6 12.
Deection
D L presents the worst scenario:

DL
1.0(8.5)(8.53 123) 5
0.10 in. 0.4 in. allowed
384 1.6 697 103
OK
Use the same 6 12 type of header for the 7.0-ft master bedroom
opening.
272
6.0-ft Openings
Dining room is the worst scenario with 1.0 k/ft uniformly distributed
DL
Sreq. 1.0 6.252 1.5/1.35 43.4 in.3 82.7 in.3
Provided by 6 10.
Glulam Beam (GLB) Design
9.0-ft Single-Garage Door Opening

Receives concentrated load at 3.0 ft from support
Average tributary width from girder truss causing point load: 18.0/2
9.0 ft
Point load:
P 0.038(9.0)
Mmax 4.1
24.0
4.1 k
2
6.0
3.0 8.2 k-ft 98.4 k-in.
9.0
With Fb 2.4 ksi for 24-V7 DF/DF GLB

Sreq. 98.4/2.4 41.0 in.3 123.0 in.3
16.0-ft Double-Garage Opening
Carries 4.5-ft-wide strip of roof DL
w 0.04 4.5 0.18 k/ft, say 0.20 k/ft
Sreq. 0.2 16.52 1.5/2.4 34.0 in.3 123.0 in.3
FOUNDATION DESIGN
Allowable soil pressure is 2500 psi with one-third increase for wind and
seismic per geotechnical report.
External Bearing Wall Footing
Roof span 45.0 ft

wDL 0.038(45.0/2 2.0) 0.93 k/ft roof reaction.
8.8
CASE 6: WOOD-FRAMED GARAGE AND WORKSHOP
273
Total load on strip footing, including weight of wall: 1.0 k/ft

Required footing width: b 1.0/2.5 0.4 ft 1.0 ft
Provided OK.
Pad Footing to Support Girder Truss over Master Bedroom
Girder carries (22.0/2) 11.0-ft-wide roof load. The point load reaction
caused by the girder truss is
P 0.038 11.0 (39.0/2 2.0) 9.0 k
The required footing width is
b
1.9 ft 2.5 ft
9.0
2.5
Provided OK.
Using an overall depth of 18 in., an effective depth of 14 in., and ultimate actual bearing pressure of 2.2 kips/ft2,
Ast
33.0
0.05-in.2 footing 0.8 in.2
0.9 0.85 14 60
Provided by 4-#4 bars bottom each way.
2 ft, 6 in.2 18-in. footing.
OK.
Footing to Support Front of Garage
Worst scenario: 16.0-ft opening

Roof reaction: 0.2 16/2 1.6 k
Force resisted by 1-ft-wide bearing area
Width of continuous footing and length of the pier 2.0 ft
Actual bearing pressure:
B
8.8
1.6
0.8 ksf 2.5 ksf allowed
1.0 2.0
OK
Seismic: Low- to Moderate-Seismicity Area

We have seen that seismic forces governed over wind in a low- to moderate-seismicity region for a masonry design project. In this case wind
274
is prevalent and therefore the calculations are adjusted accordingly for

this wood-framed structure where a garage is combined with a workshop. See Figure 8.26.
PROJECT DESCRIPTION
Soil prole SC
Code used for analysis and design: 1997 UBC
Wind 70 mph
Garage
One-story height, footprint 18 36 ft, length of building 36.0
ft
Plate height 14.0 ft.
Maximum roof height 16.0 ft
Maximum tributary width for longitudinal shear walls: 48.0/4
12.0 ft for wind acting on front
Workshop: Attached to the garage is a 48-ft-wide workshop, selfsupporting against lateral forces such as wind.
WIND ANALYSIS
Basic wind stagnation pressure 12.6 psf

Combined height, exposure coefcient for 015.0 ft height: Ce 1.06
Figure 8.26 Front structural elevation of the building.
8.8
275
Use Method 2, projected-area method.

Importance factor: I 1.0
Wind pressure acting on walls and roof: p 1.06 1.3 12.6
1.0 17.4 psf
Wind pressure on half of left facade: H (48.0/2)(7.0 2.00)
17.4 3860 lb
Longitudinal Analysis
Total length of shear walls: 2 4.0 8.0 ft

Resistance along longitudinal front wall of building
Linear shear: v 3860/8.0 483 lb/ft 490 lb/ft
Provided by 38 -in. OSB with 8d at 3, 3, 12 in. OC.
DESIGN OF FRONT TRANSVERSE TWIN SHEAR WALLS
Maximum wind on the twin walls 3860 lb

Maximum overturning on each wall: (3.86/2)(14.0) 27.0 k-ft
Maximum uplift at HD of 6 6 posts:
27.0/4 6.75 k
Net uplift
5.90 k 7910 lb
Provided by HD8A (Simpsons Catalog p. 21).

DESIGN OF 6 BEAMS FOR WORKSHOP ROOF
Span 24.0 ft.

Total uniform roof load acting on beam including weight of beam:
wDL (14.0 6.0) 12.0 14.0 254 lb/ft
Mmax 0.254 24.02 1.5 219 k-in.
Sreq.
219
165 in.3 167 in.3
1.33
Provided by 6 14 beam.
OK.
276
DESIGN OF 2 ROOF RAFTERS
Span 12.0 ft
Try 2.0 ft OC:
wDL (6.0 20.0) 2.0 56 lb/ft
Say 58 lb/ft including weight of roof rafter
Mmax 0.058 12.02 1.5 12.53 k-in.
Sreq.
12.53
8.9 in.3 7.56 in.3
1.4
NG on 2.0 ft OC.
2 6 rafters must be at 16 in. OC.
FOUNDATION DESIGN
The foundation will be designed for an allowable soil pressure at 12 in.

minimum depth, 1000 psf at service loads.
External Footing Maximum gravity load:
24.0 (24/2) 10.0 8.0
350 lb/ft2
2
350
350 psf 1000 psf
1.0
OK
Individual Pad Footing for 6 6 Posts

Maximum vertical load:
12.0 24.0 (14.0 6.0) 5760 lb 5.76 k
Required footing size:
b
2.40 ft 3.00 ft provided

5.76
1.0
OK
8.9
8.9
LIGHT-GAUGE STEEL AS ALTERNATIVE TO WOOD FRAMING
277
LIGHT-GAUGE STEEL AS ALTERNATIVE TO WOOD FRAMING
Light-gauge steel is gaining increased acceptance in the commercial and housing markets. Some reasons are the environmental concerns over deforestation
to meet the pressing demands for housing, the cost of lumber, and the need
to import from foreign sources (ref. 3 p. 5):
The wood industry looked toward imports from Canada to satisfy construction
needs. They assured builders that the supply would meet demand, especially
through a combination of imports and managed forests. They described timber
products as a sustainable industry, with new growth satisfying demand. However, over the past decade overall lumber prices have both increased and become
more volatile.
The interest in light-gauge steel for residential construction is based on the

strength and uniform quality of studs and joists as compared to their lumber
counterparts. Steel framing offers re safety and termite protection. In addition, the strength and ductility of steel are a good prospect to resist wind and
seismic loads. An added advantage is that about 25% of the content of manufactured steel today is derived from recycled sources. So why not build more
steel houses? According to Timothy J. Waite, P.E., of the National Association
of Home Builders (NAHB) Research Center, there are several reasons: While
steel framing material costs are now competitive with lumber, labor and engineering costs tend to be higher. There is a lack of skilled framing labor in
steel framing. There is an inherent higher connection cost using screws and
screw guns versus nails and nail guns. Also, because there are no standards
in the energy codes, steel suffers a penalty in extra insulation costs in colder
climates. Finally, consumers are not aware of all the benets of steel.
Building Code Provisions
As another example of the interaction between building codes and other standards, IBC 2003 adopted the North American Specication for the Design of
Cold-Formed Steel Structural Members (AISI-NASPEC) for the design and
construction of cold-formed stainless steel structural members in Section
2209, Cold-Formed Steel. Section 2210 of the code addresses cold-formed
steel light-framed construction specically for the design, installation, and
construction of cold-formed carbon or low-alloy steel, structural and nonstructural steel framing. In this case the code adopts the Standard for Cold-Formed
Steel FramingGeneral Provisions of the American Iron and Steel Institute
(AISIGeneral) as well as AISI-NASPEC. Section 2211 of IBC 2003 devoted several pages to cold-formed steel light-framed shear walls, including
detailed tables for shear values for wind and seismic forces.
The 2006 IBC, Sections 2209 and 2210, very much abridged as compared
to IBC 2003, prescribe that the design of cold-formed carbon and low-alloy
278
steel structural members should comply with AISI-NAS. The design of coldformed stainless steel structural members, on the other hand, must follow the
provisions of ASCE 8. Cold-formed steel light-framed construction should
comply with IBC 2006, Section 2210. Section 2210 of IBC 2006 specically
addresses steel light-framed construction, which in general should adhere to
the recommendations of AISIGeneral, AISI-NAS, and in each specic case
AISI-Header, AISI-Truss, AISI-WSD for wall stud design, and AISILateral
for lateral design for light-framed, cold-formed steel walls and diaphragms to
resist wind and seismic loads.
8.10
CASE 7: LIGHT-GAUGE STEEL IN MULTISTORY PROJECT
PROJECT DESCRIPTION
Light-gauge steel curtains and partition walls for two nine-story concrete towers in Long Beach, California
Clear curtain wall stud height 9 ft, 4 in.
Maximum hollow pier/n stud height 19 ft, 4 in.
Design by 1997 UBC, zone 4
SCOPE OF WORK
The following calculations cover Light-Gauge Steel Curtain Walls and

Internal Partition Walls
The light-gauge steel components in the project fall into two categories: curtain walls and ns and other architectural (LGS) facade features (Figure 8.28):
(a) Curtain Walls The span is 9.33 ft for 10.0 ft oor-to-oor
height. These walls will be designed for wind pressures corresponding to the highest oor elevation, that is, LVL 9 with an
average of 93 ft above ground. Exposure is type C of the 1997
UBC, Table 16-G, method 1, Normal Force Method, and 70 mph
basic wind speed:
qs 12.6 psf
(16-F)
Ce 1.58
(16-G)
279
Figure 8.27 One of the exterior walls at rst level showing the use of cold-formed steel. The shaded area is a structural concrete bearing
wall.
280
Figure 8.28 Detail of a parapet above the ninth oor of the towers showing application of light-gauge steel elements.
Cq 0.80 inward
(16-H)
Iw 1.0
(16-K)
p 1.58(0.8)(12.6)(1.0) 15.93 psf

for highest floor elevation
From Table 6.6 of the NASFA (North American Steel Framing
Alliance) Prescriptive Method for Cold-Formed Steel Framing,
2000 edition, with a stud spacing of 16 in. and a 10.0-ft span,
the 550S162-33 stud (33 mils, 20 gauge), the wall is good for
110 mph wind with exposure C.
8.10
CASE 7: LIGHT-GAUGE STEEL IN MULTISTORY PROJECT
281
Deection. The 550S162-33 stud is allowed to span 12 ft, 1

in. for an L/360 and 15.0 psf wind pressure. (Reference: CEMCO
Design Tables, Table 5, p. 34 Allowable Curtain Wall Spans.)
The maximum shear force at each end, top and bottom of stud,
is
16
9.33
(15.93)
99 lb 2 177 354 lb
12
2
allowable capacity of two #10 screws
(Reference: NASFA, Prescriptive Method for Residential ColdFormed Steel Framing, 2000 edition, p. 160.)
(b) Hollow Piers and Fins Maximum span of 19.33 ft is at rst and
second stories, 550S162-68 (14 gauge) studs at 16 in. OC.
Maximum wind pressure with Ce 1.23, exposure C, method 1,
is
p 1.23(0.8)(12.6)(1.0) 12.4 psf
The hollow piers/ns have four side walls of 2 6, 14-gauge
(68-mil) studs cross-braced and bridged at 32 in. OC. Therefore
a sound load sharing exists between the wallsthe side and rear
walls each sharing at least 33% with the front wall. Thus the
applied uniformly distributed wind load on an external stud at 16
in. OC is
16
w (0.33)(
12 )(12.4) 5.5 psf
From Table 1, p. 5, of CEMCO, CS-Punched C Studs & Joists,

158 -in. Flanges, the inertia of 550S162-68, 14-gauge, 512 -in.-deep
studs is
Ix 2.922 in.4
The maximum deection under the above uniformly distributed
wind load with a 19.33-ft span is
max
(5/384)wL4 (5/384)5.5(19.33)(19.333) (123)
EI
2.922 (29)(10)6
0.20 in.
L
0.644 in.
360
Deection OK.
282
2. Partition Walls
350S125-18 (gauge 25) studs at 16 in. OC
Floor-to-oor height 10.0 ft, giving clear stud height of 9 ft, 4 in.
Maximum allowable stud height for non-load-bearing partition walls
for 350S125-18 (gauge 25) stud at 16 in. OC: 10 ft, 8-in.
10 ft, 8 in. 9 ft, 4 in.
OK.
(Reference Table 7.1, NASFA, Prescriptive Method for Residential Cold-Formed Steel Framing, 2000 edition).
SPECIFICATIONS
Following is a summary of the light-gauge steel specications for all

walls of the two towers of the project, levels 29:
Materials should comply with the American Iron and Steel Institute
(AISI) specications for the design of cold-formed steel structural
members as adopted by the NASFA (North American Steel Framing
Alliance), ASTM A 653, grades 33 and 50.
Minimum nominal yield strength for all members should be Fy
33 ksi for 20-gauge steel and Fy 50 ksi for 14-gauge steel.
All studs for external walls and rewalls should be 550 S162-33
(gauge 20) cold-formed steel.
All tracks for external walls should be 550-T162-33 (gauge 20).
All studs for internal partition walls should be 350-S162-18 (gauge
25) cold-formed steel.
All tracks for internal partition walls should be 350-T162-18 (gauge
25) cold-formed steel.
1
Tracks of external walls should be anchored to concrete by
2 -in.diameter A307 at 32 in. OC with a minimum embedment of 6 in.
Tracks and studs at anchor boltholes should have a 6-in.-long, 20gauge stud or plate reinforcement at each bolthole, thus doubling
the metal at the anchor bolthole.
Boltholes for tracks and studs secured to concrete oor, ceiling wall,
1
1
1
or column should be
32
16 in. oversize. Holes over
16 in. require
replacement of sheet metal.
All external light-gauge stud walls should be anchored at top and
bottom to concrete oor by anchor bolts as stated above.
Clips and all other components should be minimum 20-gauge coldformed steel.
All screws connecting metal to metal should be self-drilling #8 hex
head or low-prole head if drywall, OSB, or plywood sheathing
covers connection.
APPENDIX
283
All interior walls should be anchored to concrete with 0.145-in.diameter approved power drive pins at 24 in. OC maximum.
Slotted-hole tracks should be provided at top of steel studs (bottom
of structural slab). Centerline of holes should coincide with bolts
specied per engineering plans. Length of slots should be 1 in.
L 3 in.
APPENDIX
284
APPENDIX
285
286
APPENDIX
287
288
REFERENCES
289
REFERENCES
1. Breyer, D. E., et al, 1999. Design of Wood Structures, 4th ed. New York:
McGraw-Hill.
2. Steinbrugge, K. V. 1970. Earthquake Engineering. Englewood Cliffs, NJ:
Prentice-Hall.
3. Waite, T. 2000. Steel-Frame House Construction. NAHB Research Center, Upper
Marlboro, MD.
CHAPTER 9
9.1
USE OF MATRICES IN ENGINEERING
A coupled massspring system that corresponds to a system of linear equations is illustrated in Figure 9.1. Often it is convenient to express the equation
system in matrix form,
10x 4y 2z 0
8z 0
6x
and the coefcients of x, y, z grouped in compact matrix form as
10
0 8
where the coefcients become the entries of the so-called coefcient matrix
A. The entire equation will be represented as
10 4
6
0 8
x
y 0
z
where x, y, z form a column matrix often called a vector matrix. The exibility
coefcient matrix expresses the loaddeection relationship of the cantilever
structure shown in Figure 9.2.
9.1
USE OF MATRICES IN ENGINEERING
291
Figure 9.1
L2 1
4
EI 18 18
1
Q1
Q2
2
where 1 is the rotation due to Q1 and 2 is the rotation caused by Q2 at the

cantilever end A. The shorthand notation of the matrix equation is
L2
AB C
EI
where A is the coefcient matrix, B is the force vector, and C is the elastic
deformation response matrix, also a vector column. Note that both vectors B
and C have direction and in engineering application, line of action, which is
why they are considered vector matrices, in contrast with the coefcient matrix, which consists of scalar entries. Matrices are represented by uppercase
letters and denoted between square brackets. A matrix that has n rows and m
Figure 9.2 Cantilever structure expressed by the exibility coefcient matrix.
292
columns is called an n m (pronounced n by m) matrix. The n m is called

the size of a matrix. The locationentryis referred to as aij, which represents the entry in the ith row and jth column.
Equality of Matrices
Two matrices A and B are equal (AB) if and only if they have the same
size and all of their corresponding entries are equal:
A [ajk]
9.2
B [bjk]
and
MATRIX ADDITION AND MULTIPLICATION
Matrix operations must follow well-dened rules.

Matrix Addition
Two matrices A [ajk] and B [bjk] can be added only if they have the
same size n m. The addition is done by adding the corresponding entries:
A B [j bj] C [cjk]
Matrix Multiplication
Two matrices A and B can be multiplied as C AB if and only if the number

of columns of A is equal to the number of rows of B. Stated otherwise, if A
is an n m matrix and B is an r p matrix, the operation is dened if and
only if r m. The product C will become an n p matrix. The operation
is done by multiplying each entry of row i of matrix A by the corresponding
entry of column k of matrix B and adding all products together to obtain the
corresponding entries:
C [cik]
Matrix A in AB C product is called the premultiplier to B. The order of
multiplication cannot be changed, that is, AB BA. In other words, matrix
multiplication is not commutative. For instance,
1
0
1 2
3.1 1.2
2 5
(4).1 0.2
3.2 1.5
5 11
(4).2 0.5
4 8
9.2
MATRIX ADDITION AND MULTIPLICATION
293
whereas

1 2
2 5
1
1.3 2.(4)
0
2.3 5.(4)
1.1 2.0
5 3
2.1 5.0
14 7
Scalar Multiplication
The product of an n m matrix and a scalar number c is achieved by multiplying each entry of A [ajk] by c:
cA Ac [cajk] [ajkc]
Examples
1. Add matrices A and B:
22
41
12
3 2 1
A 2 4 2
3 1 2
2 3
2
1 6
1 2
0
Then
32
AB 22
31
13
1
26 4
20
2
4 2
5 4
1
2
2. Multiply A and B:
3 1
AB 2 2
3 2
3(5) 1.2
2(5) 2.2
3(5) 2.2
2
2
3.2 1(2)
13 4
2.2 2(2) 6 0 C
3.2 2(2)
11 2
Note that A n m 3 2 matrix and B r p 2 2. With

r m the product yielded a C n p 3 2 matrix product of
column and row vectors. If the 3 1 matrix
2
A 4
8
294
is multiplied by the 1 3 matrix

B [3
1]
expect that the product C will be a 3 3 matrix (n 3, p 3):
2.3 2.6 2.1

6 12 2
AB 4.3 4.6 4.1 12 24 4 C
8.3 8.6 8.1
24 48 8
9.3
MATRIX FORMS
A matrix with a number of rows that are equal to its number of columns,
u m, is called a square matrix.
A special case of the square matrix is the symmetric matrix in which entries
above and below are symmetrical about the main diagonal.
A skew-symmetric matrix is like the symmetric matrix except the signs of
the entries are reversed (minus instead of plus sign, or vice versa).
A diagonal matrix is a square matrix A [ajk] whose entries above and
below the main diagonal are all zero.
A diagonal matrix (S) whose entries (c) on the main diagonal are all equal
is called a scalar matrix. The matrix commutes with any n n matrix
and the multiplication has the same effect as the multiplication by a
scalar:
AS SA cA
A special case of the scalar matrix is the unit matrix (I), whose entries on
the main diagonal are 1:
AI IA A
Examples
4
D 0
0
0
0
0
0
0 10
diagonal matrix
c 0
S 0 c
0 0
0
0
c
scalar matrix
1 0 0
I 0 1 0
0 0 1
unit matrix
9.5
9.4
MINOR AND COFACTOR MATRICES
295
TRANSPOSITION
So far we have covered most aspects of matrix algebraic operations except

matrix division. To do a matrix division we have to go through a number of
operations, one of them being matrix transposition. Transposition means
changing all rows into columns by keeping the same order; that is, transpose
the rst row into the rst column, then the nth row into the nth column. If A
is the original matrix, its transpose is AT. Assume you have formed the ratio
B/A, where B and A are n n square matrices and A is the divisor and B
the dividend. The ratio a/b in plain algebra can also be expressed as a b1,
where b1 is the inverse of b. In matrix algebra the division is also carried
out by postmultiplying the dividend matrix B by the inverse of the divisor
matrix A. The inverse of a matrix A is denoted A1. Unlike other matrix
operations, forming the inverse of a matrix is quite elaborate. The process
involves creating a matrix M of minors of all entries (ajk) then creating a
cofactor matrix C of A, transpose the cofactor matrix and divide by the determinant D of the original matrix A.
9.5
MINOR AND COFACTOR MATRICES
The minor of the ajk entry of a matrix is formed by replacing the entry by
the determinant of a submatrix. This is obtained by eliminating the row j and
column k intercepting ajk. This will be illustrated by a 3 3 square matrix:
a11 a12 a13

a21 a22 a23
a31 a32 a33
To form the minor of a11, the rst row and the rst column are crossed out
leaving a 2 2 submatrix with a determinant that can be easily evaluated as
a22 a23

a32 a33
a22a33 a23a32 m11
m11 being the minor of the a11 entry. Similarly, the minor of a12 is
m12 a21a33 a23a31
296
Once all the minors are evaluated, the matrix M is formed:
m11
M m21
m31
m12 m13
m22 m23
m32 m33
The cofactor matrix will be formed by giving the appropriate signs to the
minors (njk). The rule is
Thus the cofactor matrix is
c11 c12 c13

m11 m12 m13
C c21 c22 c23 m21 m22 m23
c31 c32 c33
m31 m32 m33
The determinant of a matrix A is obtained as follows:
1. Form the cofactor matrix as described.

2. Transpose the cofactor matrix, called the adjoint matrix Adj[A]:
c11 c21 c31

Adj[A] c12 c22 c32
c13 c23 c33
3. Divide Adj[A] by the determinant of A.
9.6
DETERMINANT OF A MATRIX
The computation of the second-order determinant (second order 2 2

matrix) was already shown as
A
a11 a12
a21 a22
D a11a22 a12a21
9.7
INVERSE OF A MATRIX
297
The determinant of a 3 3 (third-order matrix)
a11 a12 a13

A a21 a22 a23
a31 a32 a33
can be expanded by row or column. For instance, by the rst row, according
to the Laplace expansion,
D a11(a22a33 a23a32) a12(a21a33 a23a31) a13(a21a32 a22a31)
9.7
INVERSE OF A MATRIX
Problem 9.1
Find the inverse of
3 2 1
A 2 4 2
3 1 2
Solution The cofactors of A are
A11 6
A21 3
A31 0
A12 2
A22 3
A32 4
A13 10
A23
3
A33
8
The adjoint of [A] is given as
6
2
10
3
3
det[A] 3(6) 2(2) 1(10) 18 4 10 12

The inverse of A is
12
16
56
14
14
14
0
13
23
298
If one wants to check:

1
AA
First
112
1
112
3
2
3
2
4
1
column
26
64
16
14
14
14
12
16
56
1
2
2
0
31
23
Second column
24
44
41
56 1
10
6 0
10
6 0
34
24
43
14 0
24 1
42 0
Therefore
1 0 0
AA1 0 1 0
0 0 1
This gives I, the unit matrix.
9.8
LINEAR SYSTEMS OF EQUATIONS
Consider the problem of a two-degree (two vibrating masses, M1 and M2)

coupled together by a spring system of K1 and K2 spring constants. We realize
that the equations of motionno damping considered for simplication
are coupled together in a system of linear equations as
y 1
K2
K
K
(y2 y1) 1 1 y1 0
M1
M1 M1
y 2
K2
(y y1) 0
M2 2
where y1 and y2 are accelerations and y1 and y2 are displacements of M1 and

M2 masses, respectively.
The basic pattern of a large number of methods originates from the Gaussian and GaussJordan elimination methods. Consider an example of three
equations:
2x1 4x2 5x3 4
4x1 12x2 4x3 12
6x1 2x2 10x3 2
9.8
LINEAR SYSTEMS OF EQUATIONS
299
or in matrix form
a11 a12
a21 a22
a31 a32
an1
an2
a13
a23
a33
an3

x1
b1
x2
b2
x3 b3
xn
bn
The aim of the method is to separate xn from the rest of the unknowns, so
we have
cnan3 bn
or
an3
bn
cn
where bn is the last entry of the vector [B] of given quantities and the prime
notation indicates a transformed value after carrying out row operations.
We achieve the separation by eliminating the coefcients a21 and a31 from
the second and third rows and eliminating a32 in the following step. The tool
is an elementary row operation that allows multiplying any row by a scalar
number, adding any row to another row, and interchanging rows without altering the mathematical matrices of the original equations.
We can proceed by multiplying the rst row, R1, by 2 and adding it to the
second row, R2, and then multiplying the rst row by 3 and adding the
product to the third row. After the rst step the system of equations becomes
2x1 4x2 5x3
20x2 14x3
20
10x2 5x3 10
or in matrix form the augmented coefcient matrix
4
5
4
20 14
20
2 5 10
The next step is to eliminate a32 by multiplying the second row, R2, by 12 and
adding it to the third row, R3, resulting in
2x1 4x2 5x3 4
20x2 14x3 20
2x3 0
300
expressed in augmented matrix form augmented by the [b] column vector on

the right-hand side of the system of equations in the coefcient matrix (note
that identical row operations were used in the matrix operations):
4
20
5
4
14 20
2
0
which results in x3 0, and by back substituting

20x2 20
x2 1
and
x1
[4(20) 4]
38
2
2x1 4 4(1)
x1 0
At this point, instead of back substituting we will rearrange the diagonal

matrix so that we have only zeros, even above the main diagonal. By adding
212 times row 3 to row 1, we obtain
4
20
0
4
14 20
2
0
and by adding 7 times row 3 to row 2, the next form of the matrix will be
4
20
0
0
2
4
20
0
The next step is to multiply row 2 by 15 and add it to row 1,
0
20
0
0
0 20
2
0
As a nal step, each row is divided by its appropriate entry on the main
diagonal to obtain
9.9
0
1
0
0
2
ELEMENTARY ROW OPERATIONS
0
1
0
301
meaning
1x1 0x2 0x3 0
1x2 0x3 1
2x3 0
giving
x1 0
9.9
x2 1
x3 0
ELEMENTARY ROW OPERATIONS
The operations described above are meant to demonstrate the Gaussian elimination method. For large systems of equations the procedure would require
a rather large number of operations and computer memory. An advanced
version is more suitable for computer programming, requiring less computation time and storage. The method can be characterized as follows:
Cycle 1 Eliminate all ai1 entries of the rst column (m 1) by
multiplying the rst row by ai1 /a11 and adding the product with its
appropriate sign (negative or positive) to each ith row starting with i
2 and ending with the nth row of the n m matrix.
Cycle 2 Eliminate all ai2 entries in the second column by multiplying the
rst row (R1) by ai2 /a12 and adding the rst row thus obtained to each
ith row with appropriate sign (negative or positive) as required.
Cycle 3 Repeat the same procedure for the rest of the columns, ending
the elimination with m 1 to obtain a diagonal matrix with all zeros
below the main diagonal.
Cycle 4 Rearrange the augmented matrix so as to have all zeros below
and above the main diagonal of the coefcient matrix.
Cycle 5 Divide each row with the value of the appropriate entry on the
main diagonal pertaining to the ith row. The result will be a unit matrix to the left of the nalized [b] column matrix. Print the results x1
. . . , x2 . . . , xu . . . .
Although this was not meant to be a complete algorithm, the method described is systematic, well suited for computer programming of large systems.
Naturally, a more detailed algorithm needs to be written.
302
Using the previous examples the following augmented matrices emerge:

Start
4
6
End of cycle 1
4
12
2
5
4
10
4
12
2
2
0
0
4
5
4
20 14
20
10 5 10
Cycle 4
2 4
0 20
0
0
5
14
2
4
20
0
Cycle 5
2 0
0
0
0 20
0 20
0
0 2
0
9.10
Cycle 2
1 0 0 0
0 1 0 1
0 0 1 0
x1 0
x2 1
x3 3
SUMMARY OF MATRIX OPERATIONS
Matrix operation can be summarized as follows:

1. Addition: A B B A. The commutative law applies.
2. Multiplication by a scalar: cA [cajk], obtained by multiplying each
entry in A by c.
3. Product of two matrices: AB BA is not commutative, except if both
A and B are diagonal matrices.
4. A(B C) AB AC. The distributive law applies.
5. A(BC) (AB)C. The association law applies and can be written as
ABC.
6. (A B)T AT BT but (AB)T BT AT. When the parentheses are
removed, the product of the transposed matrices is in reverse order.
7. AT A for symmetric matrices but AT A for skew symmetric
matrices, as
2
0
3
3
0
8. IA AI A
Denition: If a matrix A is invertible, that is, it has an inverse, it is
called nonsingular:
B A1
If B fails to exist (no inverse), A is said to be singular.
CHAPTER 10
10.1
BASIC CONCEPTS
A differential equation can be solved by integrating the expression

y 2x
that is,
y
2x dx x
The constant c, an indispensable companion of the indenite integral, is the

general solution in differential equation terminology and indicates that we
have an innite number of values or solutions. Indeed there are innite identical curves in the xy plane depending on the value of c chosen.
In physics and engineering, a point is given by ordered pairs (triples, tuples,
etc., as the case might be), such as (x 0, y 2), to dene the location
through which the curve must pass. The terms x 0, y 2 are the initial
value, and the procedure is the initial value problem. The value of c is dened
by some given data (e.g., experiments) and the solution is termed the particular solution. For the equation above with
y(0) 2
303
304
meaning the value of y 2 at x 0, we have

y(0) 2 02 c
or
c2
and the particular solution is

y x2 2
Not all problems can be solved so easily, and in most cases more rened
methods are needed.
10.2
FIRST-ORDER DIFFERENTIAL EQUATIONS
In this chapter we will deal only with ordinary differential equations. An

ordinary differential equation is an equation that contains one or several derivatives of an unknown function. Moreover, that unknown function depends
only on one independent variable (x or t), as compared to partial differential
equations, with two or more variables. The task is to nd the unknown function.
Following is a classication of differential equations according to their
order: The order of a differential equation is dened by the highest derivative
that appears in the equation. For example,
y 6y 12x
(1)
y 8y 0
(2)
y cos x 2x 2y y 0
(3)
Equation (1) is a rst-order differential equation; Equations (2) and (3) are
of second and third orders, respectively.
10.3
SEPARATION OF VARIABLES
We will now present a method for solving rst-order differential equations.

Consider the differential equation
dy 4y
dx
x
(4)
10.4
EXACT EQUATIONS
305
for x 0 and y 0. We note that the function is continuous in the rst

quadrant and assumes the existence of a unique continuous solution in that
quadrant. By separating the variables, we have
dy 4 dx
y
x
and obtain a family of solutions
ln y 4 ln x c
Raising it to the exponential yields
eln y e(ln x
2)c
As the exponential and the logarithm cancel each other,

y ecx 2
or letting ec be a constant c1, we can write
y c1x 2
(5)
with c1 0, where (5) is the general solution of (4).

10.4
EXACT EQUATIONS
There are differential equations that contain two parts,

M(x1y) dx N(x1y1) dy 0
(6)
whose partial derivatives are equal,

M
N
y
x
as
M
2u
y
yx
(7)
and
N
2u
x
x y
where
u(x1y) c
(8)
306
is the general solution as
Problem 10.1
du
M
x
(9a)
u
N
y
(9b)
Solve the differential equation

dy (2xy y 2)
dx
x 2 2xy
(10)
Solution Rewritten in differential form,

(2xy y 2) dx (x 2 2xy) dy 0
where
M 2xy y 2
and
N x 2 2xy
Note that
u(x1y) x 2y y 2x c
is the general solution.
PROOF
M
u
2xy y 2
x
and
u
x 2 2yx
y
Testing for exactness by (7),

M
2u
(x 2 2yx) 2x 2y
y
y x
dx
10.5
INTEGRATING FACTOR
307
and
N
2u
(2xy y 2) 2x 2y
x
x y
y
Because the two partial derivatives are equal, it follows, from the fundamental
principle of the total or exact differential (calculus), that
u(x1y)
M dx k(y)
where k(y) plays the role of a constant and can be obtained from (9b). Thus
u
M dx x y y
2
K(y)
Now using (9b),

u
dk
x 2 2yx
N x 2 2xy
y
y
Hence
dk
0
dy
and
0 dy c
(a constant)
Therefore
u(x1y) x 2y y 2x c
setting c1 c or
x 2y y 2x c1
because c1 can take any values. That is, we have proved, following prescribed
rigorous steps, that the differential equation (10) is indeed exact.
10.5
INTEGRATING FACTOR
A basic yet powerful tool to solve differential equations is to use an integrating factor, especially when separation of variables is not possible. Let a
rst-order linear differential equation be of the form
308
A(x)
dy
B(x)y C(x)
dx
(11)
where A(x), B(x), C(x) are some functions of x. By dividing each member of
the equation by A(x), we obtain
dy
P(x)y Q(x)
dx
(12)
The expression is said to be of standard form.

The procedure to solve the equation follows: P(x) premultiplying y forms
the base of the integrating factor. Then:
(a) Integrate P(x):
P(x) dx
(b) Raise P(x) dx to the exponential to obtain
e P(x)dx I(x)
(13)
This is the integrating factor.

(c) Multiply both sides of the equation by the integrating factor to obtain
I(x)
dy
I(x)P(x)y I(x)Q(x)
dx
(14)
The idea is to choose I(x) so that

D(x)[I(x)y] I(x)
dy
I(x)P(x)y
dx
(15)
However, by the denition of the derivative, on the left side we have

I(x)
dy
dy
I(x)y I(x)
I(x)P(x)y
dx
dx
(16)
10.6
SECOND-ORDER LINEAR EQUATIONS
309
This implies that

I(x) I(x)P(x)
(17)
I(x)
P(x)
I(x)
(18)
Integrating both sides and remembering that

/
ln
yields
ln I(x)
P(x) dx
(19)
Taking the exponential on both sides yields

eln Ix e P(x)dx
Because the exponential and natural logarithm cancel each other, we have
I(x) e P(x)dx
(20)
This completes the derivation of the integrating factor.
10.6
An nth-order linear differential equation has the form

y (n) p1(x)y (n1) p2(x)y (n2) pn1(x)y pn(x)y Q(x)
(21)
Two cases are noted:

1. When Q(x) 0, the equation is homogeneous.
2. When Q(x) 0, the equation is nonhomogeneous.
Only homogeneous differential equations are considered in this section. Homogeneous linear differential equations have the property that, for any two
solutions y1 and y2 and any pair of constants c1 and c2, the function described
by
y(x) c1y1(x) c2 y2(x)
is also a solution for the homogeneous equation.
(22)
310
There is no standard elementary technique for solving general homogeneous nth-order linear differential equations. In this chapter we focus our
attention on the special case when the functions p1, p2, . . . , pn are all
constants. Moreover, we simplify matters even further by considering only
the case when n 2, that is, second-order linear differential equations. Equations of motion in structural dynamics are in this important category. In summary, we will address linear differential equations of the form
y (x) py(x) qy(x) 0
(23)
where p and q are constants.

A special case for (23) is when the py(x) term is missing:
y(x) qy(x) 0
or
y(x) qy(x)
(24)
which has the solution

y(x) ceqx
(25)
associated with problems of exponential growth and decay. The solution for
equation (23) is of the form
y(x) emx
(26)
with properly chosen constant m. The rst and second derivatives of (26) are
given as
y(x) memx
(27)
y (x) m2emx
(28)
Substituting (27) and (28) into Equation (23) yields

0 y py qy m2emx pmemx qemx (m2 pm q)emx
As emx 0, the equation is satised if and only if
m2 pm q 0
(29)
10.6
311
Equation (29) is termed the characteristic equation of (23) and has solutions
p p2 4q
m1
2
2
and
p p2 4q
m2
2
2
The solutions assume three different forms depending on the value of p2

4q:
Case 1
When p2 4q 0, m1 and m2 are distinct real numbers, yielding

y1(x) em1x
and
y2(x) em2x
and the general solution is

y(x) c1em1x c2em2x
(30)
for any constants c1 and c2.

Case 2 When p2 4q 0, the characteristic equation has only one root
and the solution is
y1(x) em1x epx / 2
Yet an additional solution exists of the form xepx / 2 to be added to
form the general equation
y(x) c1epx / 2 c2 xepx / 2
(31)
Case 3 When p2 4q 0, the roots m1 and m2 are distinct but complex

numbers. Let
r 12 p
and
s 12 4q p2
Then
m1 12 p 12 4q p2 i r is
m2 r is
The general solution can be expressed as

y(x) c1em1x c2em2x c1e(ris)x c2e(ris)x
leading to
y(x) c1erxesxi c2erxesxi erx(c1esxi c2esxi)
312
and using Eulers equation

eix cos x i sin x
The general solution takes the form
y(x) erx{c1(cos sx i sin sx) c2[cos(sx) i sin(sx)]}
or, since
cos(sx) cos sx
and
sin(sx) sin sx
we have
y(x) erx(k1 cos sx k2 sin sx)
(32)
with
k1 c1 c2
and
k2 c 1 c 2
Problem 10.2 (Case 1) Solve the differential equation

y 8y y 0
(33)
with
y(x) emx
y(x) memx
y (x) m2emx
y 8y 4y (m2 8m 4)emx 0
m1 82 21 64 16 4 5 9
(34)
m2 4 5 1
The general solution is

y(x) c1e9x c2ex
(35)
The explanation for the above procedure follows: The solution of the differential equation is expected to be
[y] [C]et
(36)
where [y] is a vector matrix and [C] a column matrix that has yet to be
determined. Then
10.8
CHARACTERISTIC EQUATION
313
[y] 2[C]et
(37)
[A][C]et [C]et
(38)
and by letting 2,
and canceling et on both sides of the equation yields

[A I][C] 0
(39)
where I is the identity matrix.

10.7
HOMOGENEOUS DIFFERENTIAL EQUATIONS
When the differential equation is reduced to the form of Equation (39), it is

termed a homogeneous differential equation. Equation (39) has a nontrivial
solution
[C] [0]
if and only if its coefcient determinant is zero.
10.8
CHARACTERISTIC EQUATION
det(A I) 0
(40)
Equation (40) is said to be the characteristic equation of A. The column vector

[C] is termed the eigenvector of the system. It is evaluated by substituting
rst the value of 1 into Equation (39) and solving it for [C]1. This will give
the rst eigenvector. To nd the second eigenvector, 2 is substituted in Equation (39) followed by solving for the eigenvector [C]2. One vital feature of
the eigenvectors is to provide the natural mode shapes of the vibration pertaining to the 1, 2, . . . , n frequencies, respectively.
CHAPTER 11
NUMERICAL METHODS AND

ENGINEERING APPLICATIONS
11.1
INTRODUCTION TO DYNAMIC ANALYSIS
First we will look at structural vibrations. Perhaps one of the most important
applications of second-order differential equations is related to mechanical
vibrations. The simplest structure to analyze is the single masssingle spring
assembly, called a single-degree system. Initially for simplicity we will assume no damping and will focus on basic concepts.
A weight W is suspended by a coil spring from a rm support above and
is in static equilibrium. (Figures 11.1 and 11.2) At this point a sudden impulse
[e.g., downward force, velocity y(0)] at time t 0 on the suspended mass m
W/g causes the system to oscillate. As no additional external force is being
applied, we wish to observe and describe mathematically the movement of
the mass from a reference point A that corresponds to zero amplitude or to
the starting point of the system at rest. If F(t) is identically zero, that is, if
there is no forcing function, the resulting motion, unaffected by any external
force, is called free vibration.
Call the time dependent displacement y y(t), the independent variable t
for time, k the spring constant, and m W/g, where g 32.2 ft/sec2 or 980
cm/sec2 is the acceleration of gravity.
At any time t the system is in dynamic equilibrium; that is, the sum of all
forces at any time is zero. This is called the DAlembert principle of equilibrium.
Since there are no external forces acting on the mass once it starts moving,
the only forces acting on the bouncing mass m, are the mass acceleration
force, according to Newtons second law, and the opposing spring force ky.
11.2
EQUATION OF MOTION
315
Figure 11.1 One-degree springmass system without damping, dynamic equilibrium.
11.2
EQUATION OF MOTION
The acceleration is given as

y
d 2y
dt2
and the resulting differential equation of motion is

my ky 0
(1)
W
F(t )
y
F(t )
k
W
Figure 11.2 Moment frame structure idealized as springmass system.
316
NUMERICAL METHODS AND ENGINEERING APPLICATIONS
or
k
y0
m
The solution of the differential equation is
y
y(t) C1 sin
(2)
Mk t C cos Mk
2
(3)
and letting k/M ,

y(t) C1 sin t C2 cos t
(4)
The displacement-versus-time diagram (Figure 11.3) is a cosine curve and,

because there is no damping, it is repetitive. The natural period of the system,
T, governs the repetition. It is governed only by its basic parameters or characteristics mass M and spring coefcient k. The natural period is given as
T
2
M
2
(5)
expressed in seconds. Equally vital is the natural frequency, dened as the

inverse of the natural period:
1
1 k
T 2 M
(6)
normally expressed in cycles per second (cps).
+ymax
(t )
Amplitude
ymin
Figure 11.3 Displacement-versus-time diagram.
11.2
EQUATION OF MOTION
317
The equation of motion (4) indicates free vibration with no damping. It is

interesting to note that textbooks seldom present the derivation of the solution
of such differential equations; instead, only the end results are quoted without
providing the reader with the benet of a proof.
Derivation of Differential Equation of Motion
The free-body diagram shows all forces acting on the oscillating mass m of
the one-degree massspring system (Figure 11.4).
Equations (1) and (2) represent the DAlembert principle of dynamic equilibrium:
my ky 0
or, after dividing by m,
y
k
y0
m
The solution of these equations must be in the form

y ert
(7)
where t is time and r needs to be found. Substituting (7) into (2) and differentiating twice y r 2ert, Equation (2) will take the form
r 2ert
k rt
e 0
m
(8)
Since the equation is homogeneous, that is, the right-hand side equals zero,
(8) reduces to
r2
k
0
m
(9)
Figure 11.4 Dynamic equilibrium, without damping, of a single springmass

system.
318
The solution of (9) yields

k
r2
m
or
mk i mk
(10)
which results in complex roots involving the imaginary number i:
mk
r1 i
mk
r2 i
and
where i is a troublesome feature and our hope is that it will drop out in the
derivation process. This hope will be fullled by Eulers solution. The Taylor
series of ex is given as
ex 1 x
sin x
x2 x3 x4 x5
xn
2! 3! 4! 5!
n!
cos x 1
x3
x5
x7
3!
5!
7!
x2
x4
x6
2!
4!
6!
...
(11)
(12)
Therefore an expression like ei can be put together by combining sin and cos
functions:
ei 1 i
(i)2 (i)3 (i)4 (i)5 (i)6

2!
3!
4!
5!
6!
1 i
2
2!
2
2!
i3
4
i5
6
i7 8

3!
4!
5!
6!
7! 8!
4
4!
6
6!
8
3 5
7
i
...
8!
3! 5! 7!
cos
i sin
(13)
Hence Eulers form of the single springmass differential equation is
ei cos i sin
Remember that
(14)
11.2
i2 11 1
EQUATION OF MOTION
319
i4 1111 1
and
ei 1
k
4
i
i2
m
2
ri
(15)
Therefore the solution is

y c1e(k / m)it c2e(k / m)it
which will be expressed as
mk t i sin mk t c cosmk t i sinmk t
y c1 cos
mk t c i sinmk t c cosmk t c i sinmk t
c1 cos
(16)
Factoring yields cos (k/m)t and i sin (k/m)t and collecting terms gives
mk t [i(c c )] sinmk t C cosmk t iC sinmk t
(c1 c2) cos
(17)
Consider only the cases in which c1 c2 and i(c1 c2) are real. Such
combinations of c1 and c2 exist.
EXAMPLE
Let
c1 C Li
c2 C Li
c1 c2 0 2Li
where L is a real number and the term 2Li is complex. Assume
c1 c2 real number
Therefore
and
i(c1 c2) multiple of i
(18)
320
[i(c1 c2)] i(2Li) 2L

The reader will note that, because of the complementary nature of the
complex conjugates a bi, a bi, i drops out of the equation and
y C1 cost C2 sint
(19)
is the equation of motion.

The derivation proves that y, the time-dependent position of the mass in
free oscillation, can be expressed by the combination of sin and cos functions
that involve and two arbitrary constants C1 and C2. The values of the
constants are determined by the initial value condition of the problem.
Problem 11.1
Given m 2 lb s2 /ft, k 4 lb/ft, calculate
(a) the natural circular frequency ,

(b) the natural period T, and
(c) the natural frequency
for the one-degree springmass system.
Solution
(a) k/m 42 2
r i( k/m) i2
y c1e2it c2e2it
y c1[cos2 t i sin2 t] c2[cos(2 t) i sin(2 t)]
c1 cos2 t c1i sin2 t c2 cos2 t c2i sin2 t
which, as shown above, reduces to

y C1 cos2 t C2 sin2 t
where 2 is the natural circular frequency
(b) The natural period is given as
11.3
321
DAMPING: DAMPED FREE VIBRATION
mk 22 8.88 cps
T 2
(c) The natural frequency is the inverse of the natural period,
11.3
1
0.1125 s
8.88
DAMPING: DAMPED FREE VIBRATION
EXAMPLE
The equation of a one-degree system is
my cy ky 0
where y is the velocity of the excited mass and c is a constant of proportionality. The cy term is named the viscous damping force and gives
the simplest mathematical treatment of the problem. As before, we assume a solution of the form
y est
where s is a constant. Substituting into the differential equation and
noting that y sest and y s2est give
(ms2 cs k)est 0
for all values of t as est 0. Thus
s2
c
k
s
0
m
m
This equation is known as the characteristic equation, a vital tool in

solving differential equations. The equation has two roots:
c
s1
2m

c
2m
k
m
c
s2
2m

c
2m
k
m
Thus we have two answers that we will add to obtain the general solution:
322
y Aes1t Bes2t
y exp
c
t
2m
c
2m
A exp
2
c
2m
B exp
k
t
m
k
t
m
We examine the three possible cases under the radical:

1. If (c/2m)2 is larger than k/m, the exponents in the equation above
are real numbers and no oscillation can take place.
2. If the damping term (c/2m)2 is less than (k/m)(c/2m)2 k/m, the
exponent becomes an imaginary number: i k/m (c/2m)2t
as
ei
3.
k
c
m
2m
t cos
k
c
m
2m
t i sin
k
c
m
2m
Assume (c/2m)2 k/m is the limiting case between oscillatory

and nonoscillatory motion as it reduces the radical to zero. Therefore the value of c, which removes all vibration, is called critical
damping cc:

cc
2m
k
2
m
where 2 is the circular frequency and cc 2km 2m.

In this case the overdamped system merely creeps back to its
neutral position. In practice it is convenient to express the value
of the actual dampinginherent to the structurein terms of the
critical damping by the nondimensional damping ratio
c
cc
Hence we talk of critical damping of 1%, 2%, and so on.
11.5
EIGENVALUES AND EIGENVECTORS
323
Figure 11.5
11.4
FREE VIBRATIONS: TWO-DEGREE SYSTEMS
EXAMPLE
It is evident that the two systems in Figure 11.5 are coupled: The individual masses cannot move independently. The equation of motion is
m1y 1 k1y1 k2 (y2 y1) 0
m2 y 2 k2 (y2 y1) 0
We have a system of equations that is better expressed in matrix form.
The tool to solve such system is the solution of the eigenvalue, which
is discussed next.
11.5
We proceed by writing down the coefcient matrix, subtracting from the

diagonal elements, and setting the determinant to zero:
324
a11 a12
a21 a22
a11 a12
0
a21
a22
det
(a11 )(a22 ) a12a22 0

Problem 11.2 Determine the eigenvalues n n2 and the eigenvectors Vn
associated with the system of equations
x x 6y
y x 2y
Solution This system of equations can be expressed in matrix form as
6
2
6
( 2)( 1) 6 2 3 4 0,
1
2
where 1 1 and 2 4. The s are the eigenvalues of the system.
(b) With 1 1,
(a) det
1 (1)
6
3
2K1
K1
K1
K1
0
K2
6K2 0
3K2 0
3K2 0
the rst eigenvector is

K1
3
1
With 2 4,
1 (4)
2 (4)
3K1 6K2 0
and simplifying gives
K1 2K2 0
K1
0
K2
K1 3K2
11.5
325
Figure 11.6
This yields the second eigenvector,

K2

2
2
4
1
Graphically, the eigenvectors correspond to the mode shapes in Figure 11.6.

Problem 11.3 Two-Degree System For the two-degree coupled system
shown in Figure 11.7 and using the eigenvalue matrix solution, determine
Figure 11.7 Two-degree coupled system.
326
(a) the two natural frequencies and

(b) the two natural periods of the system.
W1 64.4 lb
Weight:
W2 32.2 lb force
m1
64.4
2 lb s2 /ft expressed in mass
g 32.2
m2
32.2
1 lb s2 /ft expressed in mass
32.2
K1 333.3 lb/in. 4000 lb/ft

K2 166.6 lb/in. 2000 lb/ft
Solution
2y1 4000y1 2000(y2 y1) 0
y 1 2000y1 1000(y2 y1) 0
1y2
equation of free vibration
(20)
1000(y2 y1) 0
In matrix form
y 1 3000y1 1000y2
y 1
3000
y 2
1000
det
3000
1000
y 2 1000y1 1000y2
1000
1000
1000
1000
y1
y2
(21)
(22)
(3 103 )(1 103 ) 1.0 106 0

3 106 3 103 103 2 106 0
2 4 103 2 106 0
1,2
4 103 16 106 8 106
1 585.8
2
and
2 3414
(4000 2828)
2
(23)
11.6
MODELING ACTUAL STRUCTURES
327
yielding
1 585.8 24.2 rad/s
and
2 58.2 rad/s
The natural periods are

T1
2
0.26 s
1
T2 0.108 s
The natural frequencies are

1
24.2
3.85 cps
2
n 2n
58.2
9.26 cps
2
n natural circular frequency 2 rad/s
n
natural frequency in cps or Hz
2
Tn
1
natural period
The system just analyzed has two s, two s, and two Ts.
11.6
MODELING ACTUAL STRUCTURES
EXAMPLE
The moment-resisting frame in Figure 11.8 can also be represented by
a springmassdashpot (damping) one-degree system. A horizontal
force, representing mass times acceleration caused by the earthquake, is
applied at the top of the frame. Three basic assumptions make the problem real:
(a) The weight of columns and walls is negligible.
(b) The mass of the oor is concentrated along the beam.
(c) The girder is sufciently rigid to prevent signicant rotation.
The weight of the oorthe portion of the oor capable of producing
seismic body forcesis given as
328
Figure 11.8 Dynamic model of steel moment frame, one-degree system.
W 175,000 lb
175
5.40 kip-s2 /ft
32.2
The spring constant representing the combined stiffness of the two legs
is the force that causes unit deection at the top:
k 12 E
2I
2400
12 29 106 2
3
n
(13.5)3 144
4.715 106 lb/ft
or 4715 kips/ft. Then the natural period of the structure is

5.40
0.2126 s
mk 24715
T 2
and the natural frequency is

I
4.70 cps or 4.70 Hz
T
This is vital information. Through his research in the Santa Monica area,
the author established that the ground in Santa Monica started vibrating
horizontally with 4.0 Hz at the arrival of the s waves, 4.0 s after the
start of the Northridge earthquake.
This structure would have gone into resonance and broken up between 4 and 8 s during the earthquake.
11.7
11.7
THREE-DEGREE SYSTEMS
329
Problem 11.4 The diagram in Figure 11.9 shows a three-degree system. No

damping has been assigned to the structural system. Develop the equation of
motion without external driving function F(t).
Solution
m1y 1 k1y1 k2 (y2 y1) 0
m2y 2 k2 (y2 y1) k3 (y3 y2) 0
m3y 3 k3 (y3 y2) 0
(rst equation)
(second equation)
(third equation)
Problem 11.5 Determine (a) The eigenvalues and (b) the eigenvectors for
the system shown in Problem 11.4.
Solution To have a matrix representation and a matrix solution of the system, it is advisable to complete the following steps:
1. Isolate y1, y2 . . . , yn at each row by dividing by m1, m2, . . . , mn each
at the appropriate nth equation so that y1, y2, . . . , yn will remain on
the right-hand side of the appropriate nth equation. The rest of the terms
of such an equation will be rearranged.
Figure 11.9 A three-degree system without damping.
330
2. Reorganize the system of equations in matrix form, such as
y 1
a11
y 2 a21
y 3
a31
a12
a22
a32
a13
a23
a33

y1
y2
y3
coefcient matrix
The left side will consist of the n n coefcient matrix A multiplied
by the n 1 vector matrix of yn.
3. Subtract from the coefcient matrix Ann the identity matrix I multiplied
by n 2n, (A I)(y) 0, and set it to zero:
a11 a12 a13

0 0
a21 a22 a23 0 0
a31 a32 a33
0 0
y1
y2 0
y3
4. Set the determinant of the resulting coefcient matrix to zero and solve
for ns:
det
a11
a12
a13
a21
a22
a23
0
a31
a32
a33
To fulll the equation, the determinant must be zero.

Note. is the natural circular frequency in radians. The natural
circular frequency is related to the natural frequency by the expression
2
or
The natural period T is the inverse of the natural frequency:

T
An n-degree system has n natural period Tn, n natural frequencies n, and n

natural circular frequencies n.
Problem 11.6 Find (a) the eigenvalues and (b) the eigenvectors of the twodegree system
m1 m2 1
k1 3
k2 2
11.7
331
Solution Set up the system equations:

y 1 5y1 2y2
y 2 2y1 2y2
y 1
5
y 2
2
2
2

y1
y
1
y2
y 2
We know that vibration has the following solution:

y xet
y 2et
Aet
where is the natural circular frequency. Letting 2 and dividing both

sides by et,
Ax x
or, in matrix form (A I)x 0,
2
0
5
2
x
2 2
0
2
2
Ax
(A I)
x1
1 0
0
0
x2
0 1
0
I
diagonal
matrix
where (A I)x 0 is the identity matrix that must be used to carry out
matrix subtraction.
2 7 6 0
( 1)( 6) 0
This results in the two roots

1 1
2 6
These are eigenvalues* and we claim they represent the natural frequencies
of the system. Plugging in the values into the equation above yields
* Eigen means individual property; that is, it cannot be separated from a particular system,
such as the natural frequency and the time-dependent mode of vibration of the deected shape.
(See Figures 11.1011.12.)
332
1:
5 (1)
x1
0
x2
2 (1)
We obtain
4 2x2 0
x2 2
1

x1 1
2
Similarly, with 2
x1 2
x1
1
2
x2 1
x2
The same will happen if you imagine a pole swaying laterally (Figure 11.10):
Eigenvectors: Deected Mode Shapes First mode, deected shape (Figure 11.11)
Second mode, deected shape (Figure 11.12)
Problem 11.7 We will attempt to solve a three-degree system for its three
eigenvalues and three sets of eigenvectors. This will lead us to the natural
frequencies and mode shapes of vibration. A brief review of the steps to solve
it for the determinant of a 3 3 matrix is in order. Given
A33 coefcient matrix
a11 a12 a13
a21 a22 a23
a31 a32 a33
Figure 11.10
11.7
333
Figure 11.11
A
Calculate the determinant of the [A] coefcient matrix.
Solution Remember that the system we used for the 2 2 matrix can be
extended to establish the determinant of a 3 3 matrix:
a11 a12 a13

a11 a12 a13 a11 a12
det a21 a22 a23 a21 a22 a23 a21 a22
a31 a32 a33
a31 a32 a33 a31 a32
that is,
a11 a12 a13 a11 a12

a21 a22 a23 a21 a22
a31 a32 a33 a31 a32
The steps are as follows:
Figure 11.12
334
(a) Add two more columns by adding columns 1 and 2 to the original
matrix.
(b) Cross-multiply the elements along the diagonal, left to right, without
changing sign.
(c) Cross-multiply the elements along the right-to-left diagonals and
change the sign for each cross-product along the line.
By adding up
(a11 a22 a33) (a12
a23
a31) (a13
a21
a32) (a13
(a11
a23
a32) (a12
a21
a33) det[A]
11.8
a22
a31)
EXISTENCE AND UNIQUENESS THEORY: WRONSKIAN
The eigenvectors must be linearly independent. It is advisable to group the

eigenvalues column by column, in one block of the coefcient matrix. Thus,
if X1, X2, . . . , Xn are solution eigenvectors of a homogeneous system, then
the vectors are linearly independent if (and only if) the Wronskian determinant is unequal to zero to guarantee a unique solution:
W(X1, X2, . . . , Xn) X1, X2 . . . , Xn 0
Should the Wronskian* determinant be zero, it would be an indication that
the original set of differential equations is not independent. For instance, one
row of the coefcient matrix must be dependent on another row.
Problem 11.8 Prove that the eigenvectors of the two-degree system in Problem 11.6 are linearly independent.
Solution
W(X1, X2)

1
2
1 (2 2) 5 0
Therefore the eigenvectors are linearly independent.
11.9
DRIVING FUNCTION (Ft): SEISMIC GROUND MOTION AS Ft
So far we have concentrated on differential equations and described mechanical vibrations without the driving function F(t). The tools for those equations
* Wronski (17781853) was a Polish-born mathematician who changed his name from I. M. Hone
to Wronski.
11.9
DRIVING FUNCTION (Ft): SEISMIC GROUND MOTION AS Ft
335
proved powerful to determine the characteristics of a structure, natural frequency, and mode shape of vibrations. Can we apply the same system to the
uneven nature of ground motion? Ground motion involves displacement and
acceleration reected in the jagged trace of graphical representations with
sharp peaks and sudden reversals that defy the closed-form differential equations.
Will the differential equations that require the driving functions of a welldened, smooth curve of a mathematical formulation be applicable to the
structural deformations, stresses, and strain on the structure at any given time
during an earthquake? The reader will realize that such an approach will not
be feasible. In most cases it would be virtually impossible to reveal the relationship between the ground shaking and the structural response that would
give a picture of deformations, stresses, and strains at any given time during
the earthquake.
To answer these questions, the author explored a new avenue. The work
was veried by eld measurements of structural damage caused by the 1994
Northridge/Santa Monica earthquake. Proceeding carefully, rst with hand
calculations, then with digital computer analysis, he applied the lumpedimpulse method of numerical integration to tackle the noncontinuous, jagged
function of earthquake-induced ground motion as driving function input data.
The procedure was applied to an existing multistory steel frame damaged
in the Northridge/Santa Monica seismic event of 1994. What emerged from
the procedure was a time-dependent data of structural response, lateral deformations, and oor accelerations that offered an insight of what actually
happened to the just built steel moment frame structure during the earthquake.
The method is described in Chapter 12.
CHAPTER 12
METHODS AND TOOLS TO UNRAVEL

SECRETS OF EARTHQUAKES
12.1
ELEMENTS OF AN EARTHQUAKE
After a seismic event it is a challenge to nd out what happened during the

earthquake. The authors research on steel frame buildings subjected to earthquake forces conrmed the existence of extremely high frequency vibrations
of 23 Hz coupled with exceptionally large reversals of lateral oor displacements exceeding 9 in.
Perhaps one of the rst steps is to follow the path of the earthquake while
its traces are still undisturbed by human interference. The author visited areas
in the vicinity of the epicenter of the Northridge earthquake and noted power
poles snapped off like match sticks (Figure 12.1); concrete curbs cracked,
broken, or shifted to a different location; chimneys and fences collapsed;
buildings ripped in half; and newly built portions of stone oors split by deep,
widening cracks.
Combining visual observation with organized engineering measurements
and records can give us an insight into the physics and mechanics involved
in the structural response, movement, and resulting damage during an earthquake. Answering questions such as what happened, how did the ground
behave, how did the structure respond during those crucial seconds or milliseconds takes facts, instrumentation, knowledge of physics, soil and structural
dynamics, structural analysis, knowledge of the building materials used, and
mathematics.
At the time of the 1971 San Fernando earthquake the author was doing
research on earthquakes, studying virtually all available information related
to earthquake engineering, including soil dynamics, structural dynamics, properties of soil, and brittle fracture of metals. The most signicant information
12.1
ELEMENTS OF AN EARTHQUAKE
337
Figure 12.1 Overall damage on Balboa Boulevard near the epicenter of the Northridge earthquake.
that came through the university civil engineering department was that the
main building of the Olive View Hospital in the San Fernando Valley and its
separated elevator tower moved several feet.
Another interesting piece of information was that the accelerogram readings at the Pacoima Dam reached 100% g in the lateral direction and nearly
100% g vertical. All of these indicated that the UBC design provisions of
about 13% g lateral and 0% g vertical were woefully inadequate. When the
author brought up these facts at a SEAOC meeting at the Los Angeles Convention Center, the reaction was that upgrading the design forces would increase construction costs. No further consideration was given to the measured
large accelerations and signicant vertical component and no code upgrading
took place in the following period of quieter seismic activity. It took 23 years
and a destructive earthquake such as Northridge for the vertical-component
design to be incorporated into UBC 1997.
In the case of the San Fernando Valley Olive View Hospital severely damaged by the 1971 earthquake the consensus until then had been that towers
having different dynamic response, natural period, and frequency must be
separated from each other. Such design preference was inuenced by SEAOC.
However, such separation, especially if it involves a tall, slender structure
adjacent to another building, can be of disastrous consequences. Because of
the relatively strong swaying movement the Olive View Hospital slender el-
338
Displacement
(cm)
Velocity
(cm/s)
Acceleration
(cm/s/s)
Northridge earthquake JANUARY 17, 1994 04:31 PST

Santa Monica City hall grounds CHN 1: 90 DEG
Instrument-corrected and bandpass-filtered acceleration, velocity and displacement
Filter band: .07.14 TO 23.025.0 HZ.
24538-S2486-94020.06 020494.0914QN94A538
Time (s)
Figure 12.2 Northridge earthquake. Seismograph readings at the Santa Monica City Hall showing the east
west lateral acceleration of the ground.
12.3
NEW METHOD OF DYNAMIC ANALYSIS
339
evator tower knocked down part of the main building. The 23-in. seismic
separation joint considered essential for a good design did not work out,
mainly because the elevator tower started rocking on its foundation under
seismic excitation and acted as a sledgehammer on the adjacent building. It
would have been better to build the two structures together rather than creating
a seismic separation joint.
The Northridge earthquake conrmed the authors prediction: Both horizontal and vertical ground acceleration components recorded at the Cedar
Hills Nursery in Tarzana, California, were close to 200% g. Similar highacceleration values were recorded at several other locations in downtown Los
Angeles and adjacent areas, including the University of Southern California
Medical Center.
12.2
VERTICAL-ACCELERATION COMPONENT
The extremely high vertical acceleration of the Northridge earthquake surprised even those who were studying earthquakes. The impact of vertical
acceleration on structures was equally surprising. The roof structure, composed of sheet metal and lightweight concrete, of the Great Western bank
building in Northridge caved in due to the bouncing vibrations of air conditioning and other equipment, ending up on the oor below. Although banned
in Europe, this roof construction, known as Robinson roof decking, had been
considered reliable until the Northridge event.
As stated earlier, accurate electronic data of site-specic seismograph readings are essential to retrace the response history of a structure during an
earthquake. The next step is what to do with the data. From a geological point
of view and as result of the extensive California statewide network, the data
have been recorded and are available to the public. From a civil/structural
engineering point of view, the work is just about to begin. The rst question
is how to obtain actual time-dependent deformations, internal forces, and
stresses from the raw geological data. Some experts on the subject would say
no problem, use spectral analysis. Yet spectral analysis is based on a single-degree, single-mass, single-dashpot system, while the structures to be analyzed are complex and consist of multiple-mass, multiple-spring and
multiple-damping system.
12.3
NEW METHOD OF DYNAMIC ANALYSIS
Following the 1994 Northridge earthquake and upon the building owners
request, the author investigated the damage suffered by a four-story steel
moment frame just completed in the City of Santa Monica that had been
designed and detailed by the UBC seismic regulations in force (1991). The
damage was severe and extensive. All beam-to-column moment joints were
340
METHODS AND TOOLS TO UNRAVEL SECRETS OF EARTHQUAKES
damaged, beam ange-to-column ange welds cracked, column anges were

torn from their web, and, more signicantly, some column webs were torn,
the tearing going through the column anges.
The extensive damage was clear indication that the actual internal forces
and stresses caused by the earthquake were at least one magnitude larger than
the UBC-recommended design values. What do we mean by one magnitude
larger? Lets take, for instance, a value of 20 obtained by rational analysis.
If the actual stresses were 200 instead of 20, the design assumption would
have been wrong by one whole magnitude larger than assumed as compared
to the actual forces. The implications are serious for a practicing structural
engineer. A small percent deviation, say 10%, from the actual forces acting
on a structure normally would not be catastrophic; yet when the earthquake
forces are one magnitude larger than the assumed design forces, the result
might be the collapse of the structure.
Anyone who wants to determine the time-dependent deformation of a
structure such as the moment frame that occurs at some specic time during
an earthquake will be faced with the dilemma of how to do the analysis. A
closed-form analysis can only be possible if the graph of the driving function
(ground acceleration, displacement, etc.) represents a well-behaved function
which is smooth with continuous curves and no breaks of discontinuity or
abrupt changes. From a mathematical point of view, the trace of an earthquake
is far from a well-behaved function. It has sharp points that represent sudden,
abrupt changes in ground acceleration and displacement. We can thus conclude that a closed-form differential equation will not yield accurate results.
12.4
BACKGROUND OF RESEARCH
Following a thorough review of the performance and mechanism of virtually

all compression testing machines built and used since the turn of the twentieth
century, it became evident to the writer that conventional testing machines do
not allow free lateral expansion or contractiontriaxial testof the specimen
at the machineplatenspecimen interface.1,2
It was not difcult to imagine the lateral restraint that would occur if a
steel specimen were welded to the machine platen. Yet exactly the same phenomenon occurs at the beamcolumn joint interface of a welded moment
frame. The anges of the beam are solidly welded to massive column anges,
which act like the machine platen. The laterally and almost innitely stiff
column prevents free lateral contraction of the beam, which is vital to initiate
yielding. Contrary to expectations, no yielding would take place at the highest
stress gradient, the beamcolumn interface.3
The author overcame the problem by numerical integration using the
lumped-impulse method (Figure 12.3). He succeeded in writing an algorithm
capable of accepting the ground accelerationdisplacement input as the driv-
12.4
BACKGROUND OF RESEARCH
341
m4
y
t t t
k4
t
s1 s s+1
(a)
m3
k3
m2
s1 s s+1
(b)
(s+1)
y AV =
= y (s) + yAV t
t
k2
m1
y (s) y (s 1)
+ y (s ) t
t
Numerical integration
lumped-impulse procedure
Notes:
y = displacement
s = timestation
k1
Dynamic spring-mass
system of the SMRSF
Notes:
k = spring constant of given story
m = floor mass
Figure 12.3 Numerical integration of the lumped-impulse procedure.
ing function created by the impact of the unpredictable, violent, randomly

changing earthquake. The system keeps track of each earthquake-generated
impulse received by the foundation at each fraction of time.
The peak lateral eastwest ground acceleration exceeded 0.9 g and the
vertical acceleration 0.41 g as measured by a seismograph located close to
the actual four-story project analyzed further in this chapter. When combined
these values give us over a 100% resulting ground acceleration associated
with a magnitude larger than the UBC 1994 design force. There is no doubt
that such large disparity between the code-prescribed seismic and actual driving force must have caused the extensive damage to the beam-to-column
joints veried by the authors analysis.
Another major factor, not reected in a purely static analysis, was the
sensitivity of a framed structure to undergo self-inicted oscillations that created a large internal reaction of forces and stresses.3
342
12.5
ANALYSIS OF ACTUAL STRUCTURE
The subject structure analyzed was a four-story SMRSF in the City of Santa
Monica damaged by the 6.7-Richter-magnitude Northridge earthquake of January 1994. Figure 12.4 shows the layout of the frames. Three main intriguing
aspects motivated the research:
1. The damaged structure had been designed according to the latest seismic provisions of the leading andfrom a seismic design point of
viewmost effective building code (UBC 1991) in force at the time of
the earthquake.
2. Although structurally complete when the earthquake hit, a signicant
portion of the mass of the building was still missing, including architectural features such as a heavy stone-clad facade and partitions. It was
most surprising that, having perhaps the best chance to escape the event
unscathed, the structure was severely damaged by the earthquake.
3. The type of structural damage was brittle fracture.
The structural conguration consists of a four-story main tower and a threestory lower wing attached to the tower by a passageway. The moment-
Figure 12.4 Layout of SMRSF frames. Frames carrying gravity loads only not shown
for simplicity.
12.5
ANALYSIS OF ACTUAL STRUCTURE
343
resisting steel structure sits atop cast-in-place walls of a two-story concrete

basement that constitutes a stiff box below ground level. The analysis concentrated on the four-story tower portion of the building. Masses of tributary
oor areas were used in the model to generate earthquake-related inertial
forces at oor level. The results of the analysis of frame 3 are discussed here
(Figure 12.5). The grade of steel was A36 with Fy 36 ksi and Fu 58
80 ksi.
The four-story tower and the three-story wing were considered to act independently in this analysis. It was assumed that the tower would resist its
own generated body seismic forces and the wing would resist its own seismic
forces without transmitting any substantial effect to the tower. No attempt was
made to account for torsion that might have been caused by the nonsymmetrical structural arrangement of the three-story wing or for additional sway
components due to the rocking motion of the basement. No doubt the torsion
and rocking of the substructure or basement would have increased lateral
deformations and stresses in the frame, causing further structural impairment;
however, the purpose of the analysis was to determine a lower bound for
Figure 12.5 Frame 3, the subject of the analysis. () Locations of brittle fracture.
344
deformations, forces, and stresses. If these were found critical without added
adverse effects, the earthquake-induced stresses, contrary to the 1991 or 1994
UBC lateral coefcient method predictions, would be destructive enough to
cause permanent structural damage.4
12.6
RESULTS AND FINDINGS
Figure 12.6 shows the dynamic structural response of rst and second oors
between 8 and 10 s of seismic impact from the seismograph-recorded ground
acceleration. The trace of the seismograph indicates a sudden peak of 0.9 g
eastwest ground acceleration at 9.8 s. The northsouth component of the
lateral acceleration, also signicant, reached a peak of 0.414 g at the same
time. The two vector components produced an acceleration vector of 0.98 g,
something to bear in mind when designing buildings in seismic zones.
The ground acceleration data used directly as input were obtained from
the January 17, 1994, readings of the Strong Motion Seismograph at the Santa
Monica City Hall in the vicinity of the subject structure. The information was
released by the California Department of Conservation, Division of Mines
and Geology.
There was a marked dynamic structural response to ground motion even
before the peak was reached. The displacements are measured in feet from
the unstressed, undeformed positions of the structure before the earthquake.
The results of the computer analysis indicated a dramatic buildup of lateral
deformations between 4 and 14 sthe effective time periodof the quake,
when most of the signicant structural deformations took place.
A sudden increase in structural displacement can be noted in the graph
between 9 and 10 s, when the structure went on a wild ride. At least 16 rstoor lateral displacements (1 0), (2 1) of 67 in. and six peak displacements of 810 in. occurred during this effective time period. These
displacements correspond to 1218 times the allowable story drift specied
by most codes based on a static lateral coefcient method. All other oor
displacements were equally high, all corresponding to signicant column deformations and internal stresses affecting the beam-to-column joint.
According to the authors research, the yield strength of the base metal of
the structure was exceeded several times during the earthquake, sending it
straight into strain hardening. Contrary to expected ductile behavior, almost
all joints fractured in the actual structure showing no signicant sign of beam
yielding or plastic hinge formation. What made the MRSF take an alternate
course for structural response, choosing a brittle fracture mechanism instead
of plastic hinge forming, is analyzed here.
12.7
NATURE AND CAUSES OF JOINT FAILURE
As a moment-resisting frame the steel moment frame resists seismic forces

by bendingnatures way of countering lateral forces by large deections.
345
Figure 12.6 Dynamic structural response of rst and second oors between 8 and 10 s of seismic
impact.
346
Signicant inertial forces generated by the dynamic response of the relatively

large mass of the concrete oors, architectural cladding, and other features
bend the structure back and forward with increasing amplitude.
When all the exural strains of the innitesimal x long elements are integrated during the excessive sway caused by the earthquake, they add up to
considerable structural deformations and large stresses in localized areas.
Such critical stress concentrations occur at the beamcolumn joint where
large beam ange reactions are evoked by the internal moments caused by
Hn and Hn1 story shears. Because of their magnitude, there is every sign that
these stresses cannot be managed. The moment-resisting frame is confronted
with the virtually impossible task of resisting, by bending, exceptionally large
lateral forces.4
Originating in Europe and used on the East Coast of the United States
for essentially static conditions in regions where earthquakes are virtually
unknown, is the steel moment frame suited to resist drift produced by
earthquake-generated dynamic forces? Paradoxically, in Europe this type of
Figure 12.7 The British experiment.
12.7
NATURE AND CAUSES OF JOINT FAILURE
347
Figure 12.8 Above: Column web fracture within the connection panel zone in the
subject structure during the Northridge earthquake. Below: The author during inspection of one of the rst retrottings of cracked welded steel moment-frame structure
connections following the 1994 Northridge earthquake.
348
frame is known as a rigid frame because the beamcolumn joint, unlike other
frame members such as beams and columns, does not deform appreciably.
The fact is that the joint is rigid, not ductile. It performs well under static
loads but exhibits inherent weakness under reversal of stresses caused by
dynamic response to earthquakes.
What happens to the most critically stressed segment of the beam welded
to the column? Contrary to prevalent engineering predictions, the momentresisting frame beam does not yield before the frame columns are damaged
by brittle fracture. The answer to the beamcolumn joint behavior may be
found in a series of British tests5 done in the 1970s on wide-ange, simply
supported steel beams loaded to the limit state, the onset of a permanent
deformation (Figure 12.7).
Identical beams were fabricated and divided into two sets: In set 1, where
the bottom tensile ange of the load-carrying beam A was not welded to the
tensile ange of cross-beam B, the beam yielded under the predicted load. In
set 2, where the bottom tensile anges of beams A and B were solidly welded
together, the loaded beam A did not yield but failed instead in brittle fracture.
Why is welding of transverse structural components to tensile anges so
critical to the load-carrying characteristics of the member? The phenomenon
of necking is essential to promote yielding of metal components subjected to
tension. If necking takes place, a ductile behavior occurs under static tensile
loading condition, satisfying the von Mises yield criterion. Conversely, if
necking is prevented, brittle fracture occurs and all benets of ductile structural behavior are frustrated.
During the British experiment the bottom ange of the cross beam, welded
to the bottom ange of beam A, prevented lateral contraction due to the
Poissons ratio effect of the tensile zone of the load-carrying beam. According
to the authors concept and ndings, an identical phenomenon occurs at the
beamcolumn joint of a MRSF. Massive W14, 1.5 column anges of a full
story-high length of virtually innite lateral resistance prevent lateral contraction, necking, and yielding of the beam anges and formation of a ductile
hinge, leaving no alternative but brittle fracture of the overstressed joint. Figure 12.8 shows a column web fracture in the building analyzed.
REFERENCES
1. Erdey, C. K. 1979. A New Load-Transmitting Medium to Measure Strength of
Brittle Materials. ASTM Journal of Testing and Evaluation, Vol. 7, No. 6, pp. 317
325.
2. Erdey, C. K. 1980. Finite Element Analysis and Tests with a New LoadTransmitting Medium to Measure Compression Strength of Brittle Materials. Materials and Structures, RILEM, Vol. 13, No. 74, pp. 8390.
3. Erdey, C. K. 1997. Earthquake-Caused Brittle Fracture in Steel Framed Buildings.
Structural Engineering Forum (SEF) journal, Vol. 3, Issue 1, pp. 1015.
4. Erdey, C. K. 1999. Performance of Steel Moment Frames in an Earthquake. Paper
presented at Eurosteel 99, Second European Conference on Steel Structures,
Prague, May 2628.
5. BCSA / CONSTRADO. 1978. Battersea College Seminar, England.
CHAPTER 13
RECENT AND FUTURE

DEVELOPMENTS IN SEISMIC DESIGN
13.1
TESTS ON JOINTS
The University of California at San Diego,1 University of Texas at Austin,2

and others have conducted a limited number of quasi-static tests on joints.
Two types of test methodologies were used:
1. Slowly and gradually applying static cyclic loading tests in compliance
with the protocol of the SAC (Structural Engineers Association of California, Applied Technology Council, California Universities for Research in Earthquake Engineering) with a cycle period of approximately
T 4 min (approximate frequency 0.00417 Hz)
2. More accelerated cycle periods, T 1 to 1.25 s (frequencies of 0.80
1.00 Hz)
None of the tests, however, are true representations of the high-frequency
response vibration caused by an earthquake (23 Hz) detected by the author.
Despite the mismatch between actual and laboratory simulated frequencies,
the tests clearly indicate an early breakdown of the specimen under a relatively small joint rotation (2%) and story drift (3%). The authors analytical
work shows that the joint rotation and story drift of the subject structure
during the Northridge earthquake were at least 4% and 6%, respectively
twice as critical as the laboratory tests. Those progress reports are already
an indication that the joint of the conventional frame would not yield at the
beamcolumn interface, not even under static loading, let alone dynamic loading.
349
350
13.2
RECENT AND FUTURE DEVELOPMENTS IN SEISMIC DESIGN
DOGBONE EXPERIMENT
Recent efforts indicate a trend to create a plastic response zone away from
the troubled connection but sufciently close to the column to avoid considerable drop in moment gradient by the use of a reduced beam sectiona
dogbone.3 However, because of the high-frequency speed straining effect of
the earthquake, the author has rmly concluded that the reduced dogbone
section of the beam would not yield during an earthquake but rather would
undergo rapid strain hardening that would make the most strained panel zone
as brittle as glass.
13.3
JOINT STRAIN HARDENING: SPEED STRAINING
The authors evaluation of the results of the dynamic analysis reveals that an
ultrahigh frequency vibration was imparted to the structure by the rapid highfrequency energy release of the ground during the earthquake. On average, 3
cps (3 Hz) lateral oor displacements occurred with associated large story
drifts: n d1 at times exceeding 10 in. The lateral oor displacements
were reversed in rapid succession of about 6 times/s, causing the columns to
bend back and forth equally fast, that is, 6 times/s.
As a result of the high-frequency structural vibration added to the lateral
deformations, large internal ange reaction forces are delivered to the column
joint in a rapid succession of blows. The large reaction forces, as they reverse
from tension to compression alternating at about 6 times/s, give rise to critically high alternating joint stresses of a magnitude uctuating between Fy
and Fu: Fy a Fu.
During a period of 616 s more than 70 critical stress reversals occurred
at the joint interface of the structure analyzed. On about 36 occasions the
actual stress at beam angecolumn interface exceeded the nominal yield
strength F by 40%. On 30 occasions the intensity of actual stresses exceeded
1.5 Fy (54 ksi) and occasionally approached 80 ksi, the maximum recorded
nominal strength of the base metal. On six occasions the actual induced stress
would have exceeded Fu 80 ksi by 3040% had the structure not fractured
at this point.
13.4
MECHANISM OF JOINT DEGRADATION
The extremely large internal forces carried by the beam anges in the absence
of yielding will destroy components of the assembly of the connected area
the weakest will fail in their path: The base metal of the column ange could
be gouged (ange torn), torn by lamellar separation, or sheared off horizontally; the beam ange torn in tension; and the weld metal connecting beam-
13.5
CONCLUSIONS
351
to-column fracture or the column web torn in brittle shear failure. Such
failures, observed by the author, are also veried in a number of publications.4
How does degradation of the material occur? In the authors opinion, due
to the high-frequency pulsating internal reactions and associated high stresses,
the hysteresis loop of the base material and weld in the path of large stresses
is attened at the initial stages of the effective period (46 s in the analyzed
case), leaving a strain-hardened material with virtually no fracture toughness.
The large hysteresis loops reported in quasi-static tests, giving the impression
of considerable energy dissipation, do not exist in an actual earthquake and
thus they are misleading.
The author believes that the brittleness observed after an earthquake is not
caused by the weld but is a consequence of the high-frequency speed straining
generated by the earthquake. At such a high frequency of structural response,
vibration speed straining occurs, resulting in a strain-hardened base and weld
metal with properties entirely different from those not subjected to vibration.
This explains why the earthquake-damaged A36 steel in the subject structure
became brittle and unweldable. In summary, the joint of the steel moment
frame will fail on two counts when subjected to simulated or actual seismic
forces:
No necking, no ductility. Failure will occur even under static or quasi-static
loading5: 1 Hz if the actual stress a exceeds Fy and approaches
Fu, that is, Fy a Fu.
Speed straining accelerates the degradation and breakdown process. Speed straining coupled with high-frequency stress reversals of
magnitudethe induced stress larger than the yieldchanges the crystalline structure of the steel and causes extreme brittleness that affects
not just localized areas but a considerably large zone around the entire
panel joint.
13.5
CONCLUSIONS
We identied three basic problems with this type of structure in an earthquake:

(a) The rigid frame joint is incapable of undergoing plastic deformation
and fractures.
(b) The parent metal of the joint region turns brittle by rapid strain hardening due to speed straining.
(c) Excessive story drift is an inherent feature of the sway frame or
moment-resisting frame. Driven by its large oor mass the sway frame,
unlike braced-frame or shear wall structures, responds to dynamic ex-
352
citation by large lateral displacements of increasing magnitude. Large

lateral movements of a structure during an earthquake are a hazard to
the occupants as proven by the alarming internal damage to the 13story steel-framed Santa Clara Civic Center Ofce Building caused by
the Loma Prieta earthquake mentioned earlier in this book.
The undesirable vibration characteristic of the steel moment frame is aggravated by insufcient inherent damping: absence of built-in partitions on large
open-oor areas and energy-dissipating external walls replaced by curtain
walls, a trend increasingly popular for reasons of planning, economy, and
efforts to reduce mass.
Due to basic conceptual design aws, the conventional moment-resisting
steel frame and its California variation SMRF (special moment-resisting
frame) are prone to earthquake damage. Construction of this structure in California was temporarily suspended after the Northridge earthquake. It would
be a mistake if the structure would be reinstated without attempting wellengineered improvement of the conventional design.
13.6
NEW TRENDS
New avenues should be explored, such as replacing the welded steel moment
frame by a braced steel frame enhanced by added engineered damping with
calibrated hydraulic piston dampers. A question is inevitable: How can we
improve the performance of conventional MRFs and SMRFs during an earthquake? In the authors opinion, a vital principle is to control movement
lateral displacementof the structure. Seismic isolation and engineered
damping seem a good choice to achieve that goal.
There is a fairly extensive literature on engineered systems and projects
accomplished. Robert D. Hanson6 did a great deal of research on supplemental
damping for improved seismic performance. He focused on viscous damping,
viscoelastic damping devices, and friction and yielding metallic damping devices.
Examples of friction devices in large structures are the Canadian Space
Agency and the Casino de Montreal in Montreal, Canada; the Ecole Polyvalente in Sorel, Canada; the Gorgas Hospital in Panama; and the UC Davis
Water Tower in California. The system of metallic yield devices aims at providing supplemental damping/energy dissipation by movement and out-ofplane bending of series of engineered metal plates at strategic locations of
the structure where movements are anticipated due to structural dynamic response to earthquakes. Examples of buildings equipped with this system are
the Cardiology Building and the Social Security Building, both in Mexico
City, Mexico, and the Wells Fargo Bank in San Francisco, California. Buildings provided with viscous devices are, among others, the Civic Center Building in San Francisco and the San Francisco Opera House in California; the
13.7
SEISMIC ISOLATION
353
Hayward City Hall, Hayward, California; the Los Angeles City Hall, California; the San Bernardino County Medical Center, California; and the Light
Towers, Rich Stadium in Buffalo, New York, equipped with viscous dampers
(Taylor Devices). The viscoelastic devices aim at providing supplemental
damping/energy dissipation, for instance, viscoelastic material such as neoprene sandwiched between steel plates that are forced to move with respect
to one another by the dynamic structural response of the building during an
earthquake. Examples of buildings equipped with this system are the Navy
Supply Center, San Diego, California; the San Mateo County Hall of Justice,
Redwood City, California; the Santa Clara County Building, Santa Clara,
California; and the School Building in Phoenix, Arizona.
A number of practicing engineers and researchers believe that, by combining the benets of supplemental damping/energy dissipation systems and
well-developed systems such as the SCBF, signicantly enhanced structural
performance can be expected during earthquakes.
13.7
SEISMIC ISOLATION
As stated in reference 7 (p. 1):

A seismic isolation system may be dened as a exible or sliding interface
positioned between a structure and its foundation, for the purpose of decoupling
the horizontal motions of the ground from the horizontal motions of the structure, thereby reducing earthquake damage to the structure and its contents.
An in-depth description of the systems and design practices for seismic isolation systems is beyond the scope of this text. Only a brief summary is
presented here.
In 1999 the AASHTO (American Association of State Highway and Transportation Ofcials) published a Guide Specication for Seismic Isolation
Design. The IBC provisions address the subject of seismically isolated structures in Chapter 16, Structural Design. The 2000 IBC dedicates several
pages to the topic, treating it in extensive detail in Section 1623, Seismically
Isolated Structures. The 2003 IBC mentions the subject in a few lines in
Section 1623, Seismically Isolated Structures, adopting the requirements of
Section 9.13 of the ASCE 7:
1623.1 Design Requirements. Every seismically isolated structure and every
portion thereof shall be designed and constructed in accordance with the requirements of Section 9.13 of ASCE 7, except as modied in Section 1623.1.1
that refers to re resistance requirements.
As discussed in Chapter 2 of this book, IBC 2006 has reduced signicantly

the sections on Structural Design, with the last section 1613.6.2, referring
354
briey to additional seismic-force-resisting systems for seismically isolated

structures. Again, the requirements are adopted from ASCE 7 with an exception at the end of Section 17.5.4.2 of ASCE 7. The subject is discussed
in further detail in Chapter 2, Section 2.4, IBC 2006.
Researchers on the subject of seismic isolated buildings state that proper
application of this technology leads to better performing structures that will
remain essentially elastic during large earthquakes.8 There are about 1000
seismically isolated structures around the world. The number includes not
only buildings but also bridges and tanks. Of these approximately 150 are in
the United States. Literature on seismic isolation repeatedly quotes the University of Southern California Hospital in Los Angeles as a signicant example of a seismically isolated, seven-story-plus-basement structure that
survived the Northridge earthquake and remained operational. The technology
of seismic isolation has recently made remarkable advancements since the
concept was rst put into practice with two buildings constructed on rollers:
one in Mexico, the other in Sevastopol, Ukraine.
The rst seismically isolated building with a rubber isolation system
emerged in 1969 in Skopje, in former Yugoslavia. It is a three-story school
building that rests on solid blocks of rubber without the inner horizontal steelreinforcing plates as is done today.
The rst bridge structure that utilized an isolation system, with added
damping, was the Te Teko viaduct in New Zealand, built in 1988. The isolation system contains a sandwich of laminated steel and rubber bearing layers
with a central lead core for energy dissipation. This type of isolation system,
referred to as leadrubber bearing (LRB), is now widely used. The rst
building supplied with LRB isolation was the William Clayton Building in
Wellington, New Zealand, in 1981.
The rst seismically isolated building in the United States was the Foothill
Communities Law and Justice Center in Rancho Cucamonga, California, completed in 1985. It took some time until another isolated building was built in
the United States. The reason for the reluctance was quite simple: Seismic
isolated structures did not nd their way into the building codes. Design
professionals, on the other hand, were not able to show any appreciable savings to their clients by using this system.
Theoretically, in a perfectly functioning seismic isolation there will be no
lateral seismic force acting on the isolated superstructure. Yet if the building
codes and building ofcials persist in designing such superstructures to the
same lateral forces pertaining to a xed-base (nonisolated) structure, there
will be no savings. This is because the superstructure will end up with equally
heavy steel sections or massive reinforced-concrete sizes to counter relatively
light lateral seismic design forces.
Common isolation systems are the elastomeric and sliding types. A third
group, called hybrid, are elastomeric isolators combined with at sliding type
of isolators. Figures 13.113.3 show examples of seismic isolators designed
to act as spring system.
13.7
Seismic isolators
located in subbasement
Seismic isolators
located at top of
basement columns
355
SEISMIC ISOLATION
Seismic isolators
located at midheight
of basement columns
Grade
Grade
Seismic isolators
Seismic isolators
Seismic isolators
Figure 13.1 Seismic isolator placement alternatives. From left to right: in subbasement, at top of basement columns, and at midheight of basement columns. (Courtesy
of Dynamic Isolation Systems, Inc.)
The Dynamic Isolation Systems (DIS) seismic (base) isolator consists of

alternate layers of rubber and steel bonded together, with a cylinder of pure
lead tightly inserted through a hole in the middle (Figure 13.4). The rubber
layers allow the isolator to displace sideways, thus reducing the earthquake
loads experienced by the building and its occupants. They are designed to
also act as a spring to ensure that the structure returns to its original position
once the shaking has stopped. Thick steel plates are bonded to the top and
Column above
Isolator mounting bolts
Column base plate
Top isolator plate

Seismic isolator
Base plate
Bottom isolator plate
Grout
Top of footing
Anchor bolt
Figure 13.2 A seismic isolator assembly for new construction, alternate 1. (Courtesy
of Dynamic Isolation Systems, Inc.)
356
Column above
Isolator mounting bolts
Column base plate
Top isolator plate
Seismic isolator
Bottom isolator plate

Embed plate
Bolt coupler
Threaded rods
Anchor bolt embedment
Anchor bolt embedment
Figure 13.3 Seismic isolator assembly for new construction, alternate 2. Isolators
can be placed on foundation footings, at the top of basement columns, or at column
midheight. (Courtesy of Dynamic Isolation Systems, Inc.)
(Top mounting plate not shown)

Lead core
Steel-reinforcing
plates
Internal rubber
layers
Cover
rubber
Bottom mounting
plate
Figure 13.4 Cross section of a DIS Seismic IsolatorTM. Vulcanized rubber layers can
move in any horizontal direction and are laminated between steel sheets to form a
movable, exible base. (Courtesy of Dynamic Isolation Systems, Inc.)
13.8
ENGINEERED DAMPING
357
bottom surfaces to allow the isolator to be solidly bolted to the structure above
and the foundation below. During earthquake events, the lead is pushed sideways by the rubber and steel layers absorbing a portion of the earthquake
energy. This dampening effect helps to further reduce the earthquake forces
and contributes to control the lateral displacement of the structure. Examples
of buildings equipped with the DIS systems are the Rockwell International
Corporation Headquarters Building 80 in Seal Beach, California; the Salt
Lake City City Hall; the San Francisco City Hall; the University of Southern
California Hospital in Los Angeles; the Oakland City Hall; and the Kerkhoff
Hall, University of California at Los Angeles.
In general, the seismic isolation schemes described here are horizontal
systems that act chiey against lateral forces. California earthquakes have
demonstrated that, contrary to common belief, there was a signicant vertical
component that occasionally exceeded 100% g. Stated otherwise, under the
vertical-component force generated by an average California quake, the building is thrown up and down and becomes virtually weightless. Since it is not
tied down to a vertical isolation system, the building can virtually y off its
base or overturn. Unless this problem is resolved, we do not have an optimum
isolation system.
13.8
ENGINEERED DAMPING
While seismic isolation could be costly, especially for tall buildings of excessive mass and dimensions, engineered damping may be a practical and
economical solution that can even be applied to existing structures to boost
a decient inherent damping. Engineered damping, whether applied to a new
building or a retrotted structure, basically consists of bracing that incorporates calibrated hydraulic piston dampers (Figure 13.5). The system reduces
the damage caused by excessive sway in the moment frames (MRFs or
SMRFs) and provides improved shock-absorbing capabilities to brace-framed
buildings.
An example of the use of both isolators and dampers is the Arrowhead
Regional Medical Center in Colton, California (Figure 13.6).
Figure 13.5 Bracing with calibrated hydraulic piston dampers.
358
Figure 13.6 Arrowhead Regional Medical Center. (Courtesy of KPFF Consulting

Engineers.)
In the future, the number of conventional structures built in seismic zones

will be gradually reduced and replaced by either seismic isolators or another
engineered system. An entirely new eld of technology has already emerged
in California to retrot existing buildings or constructing new ones with the
above options, departing from traditional structures susceptible to earthquake
damage.
REFERENCES
1. Uang, C. M., and Bondad, D. M. 1996. Dynamic Testing of Full-Scale Steel
Moment Connections. Paper presented at the Eleventh World Conference on Earthquake Engineering, Acapulco, Mexico.
2. Engelhardt, M. D., and Husain, A. S. 1993. Cyclic-Loading Performance of
Welded Flange-Bolted Connections. Journal of Structural Engineering, ASCE, Vol.
119, No. 12, pp. 35373550.
3. Iwankiw, N. R., and Carter, C. J. 1996. The Dogbone: A New Idea to Chew On.
Modern Steel Construction, AISC, April.
4. SAC 95-01. 1995. Steel Moment Frame Connection. Advisory, No. 3.
5. Zekioglu, A., Mozzafarian, M., Le Chang, K., Uang, C. M., and Noel, S. 1996.
Development and Testing of Moment Connections for City of Hope National
Medical Center. AISC-Northridge Steel Update II.
6. Hanson, R. D. 1997. Supplemental Energy Dissipation for Improved Earthquake
Resistance. University of Michigan, Ann Arbor, MI, assignment with FEMA.
7. ASCE, SEI. 2004. Primer on Seismic Isolation. Task Committee on Seismic Isolation, Reston, VA.
8. Naeim, F., and Kelly, J. M. 1999. Design of Seismic Isolated Structures. New York:
Wiley.
ACRONYMS
AASHTO
ACI
AF&PA
AISC
AISI
AITC
ANSI
APA
ASCE
ASD
ASTM
ATC
AWS
BOCA
BSSC
CABO
CALTRANS
CBF
CEMCO
CRSI
CSI
FEMA
GLB
American Association of State Highway and

Transportation Ofcials
American Concrete Institute
American Forest and Paper Association
American Institute of Steel Construction
American Iron and Steel Institute
American Institute of Timber Construction
American National Standards Institute
The Engineered Wood Association
American Society of Civil Engineers
Allowable stress design
American Society for Testing and Materials
Applied Technology Council
American Welding Society
Building Ofcials and Code Administrators
International
Building Seismic Safety Council
Council of American Building Ofcials
California Department of Transportation
Concentrically braced frame
California Expanded Metal Products Co.
Concrete Reinforcing Steel Institute
Construction Specications Institute
Federal Emergency Management Agency
Glued laminated beam

359
360
ACRONYMS
HSS
IBC
ICBO
ICC
LGSEA
LRB
LRFD
MRF
MSJC
NAHB
NASPEC (or NAS)
NASFA
NBC
NDS
NEHRP
NFPA
NIBS
OCBF
OMF
OMRF
PCA
SAC
SBCCI
SCBF
SEAOC
SEI
SJI
SMF
SMRF
SMRSF
SUG
TMS
UBC
USD
WSD
Hollow steel section

International Building Code
International Conference of Building Ofcials
International Code Council
Light Gauge Steel Engineers Association
Leadrubber bearing
Load and resistance factor design
Moment-resisting frame
Masonry Standards Joint Committee
National Association of Home Builders
North American Specication for the Design of ColdFormed Steel Structural Members (issued by AISI)
North American Steel Framing Alliance
National Building Code
National Design Specication for Wood Construction
National Earthquake Hazard Reduction Program
National Forest Products Association
National Institute of Building Sciences
Ordinary concentrically braced frame
Ordinary moment frame
Ordinary moment-resisting frame
Portland Cement Association
A joint venture of SEAOC, ATC, and CUREe
(California Universities for Research in Earthquake
Engineering)
Southern Building Code Congress International
Special concentrically braced frame
Structural Engineers Association of California
Structural Engineering Institute
Steel Joist Institute
Special moment frame
Special moment-resisting frame
Special moment-resisting space frame
Seismic use group
The Masonry Society
Uniform Building Code
Ulimate strength design
Working strength design
GLOSSARY
2 4, 2 6, 4 8 Nominal dimensions (thickness by width) of the cross

sections of wood members (actual dimensions are about 0.5 in. less).
Absorption Amount of water that a body or unit absorbs when immersed
in water for a certain length of time.
Adhesion bond The power of adhesion of grout or mortar to a masonry
element or unit.
Admixture A material such as aggregate or cement added to concrete to
alter its properties.
Aggregates An ingredient, namely granular, to produce hydraulic cement
concrete or mortar. See Coarse aggregate and Fine aggregate.
Anchor bolts Steel rod threaded at one end used to secure structural members to concrete or masonry. Commonly formed in an L or J shape.
Angles In steel construction, rolled sections in an L shape.
Balanced condition When both steel and concrete yield simultaneously.
Balloon framing Residential building construction in which one-piece studs
extend from the rst oor line or sill to the roof plate. Joists for upper
oors are nailed to the sides of studs and receive additional support from
ledger boards.
Base plate Plate or steel slab upon which a column or scaffold section
stands.
Base shear Total design lateral force V or shear at the base of the structure.
Beam A structural member that resists transverse loads. A simple beam is
placed on supports at each end. A cantilever beam extends beyond the
support or supports. A continuous beam is supported on more of two supports. A xed beam has one or both ends restrained to prevent rotation.
361
362
GLOSSARY
Bearing capacity Maximum unit pressure any material will withstand before failure or deformation.
Bearing footing Foundation that carries vertical loads (weight) only.
Bearing wall Continuous vertical support for oors, other walls, roofs, or
other structural loads. A concrete wall that supports more than 200 lbs per
linear foot as superimposed load or a wall supporting its own weight for
more than one story.
Bed joint In masonry construction, a layer of mortar upon which masonry
units are laid.
Blocked plywood Plywood sheets attached to framing members located
along the entire perimeter.
Blocking Piece of wood fastened between structural members to strengthen
joint, provide structural support, or block air passage.
Box nails Fastener with a at head and a shank not as thick as that of a
common nail. Used in wood that splits easily.
Braced frames Concentrically braced frame (CBF)when the members of
a braced frame are subjected mainly to axial forces. Eccentrically braced
frame (EBF)steel braced frame designed in conformance with UBC
1997 Section 2213.10, IBC 2003 Section 1602.1. Ordinary braced frame
(OBF)steel-braced framed designed in accordance with the provisions
of UBC 1997 Section 2213.8 or 2214.6. Special concentrically braced
frame (SCBF)a steel-braced frame designed in conformance with the
provisions of UBC 1997 Section 2213.9, IBC 2003 Section 1602.1.
Brittle fracture Sudden splitting without (or minimal) previous elastic deformation.
California roof Type of roof with framing members installed above the
structural roof diaphragm and framing. The upper framing is, therefore, an
architectural component and does not participate in the structural resistance
of the house.
Cap Name given to a masonry piece set on top of a masonry wall or pier.
Metal caps are also used.
Cast in place Concrete cast at the job site for permanent placement.
Cast stone Stone manufactured of Portland cement concrete and used as
fascia, veneer, or trim on buildings and other structures.
Ceiling joist Intermediate horizontal structural member used to support nished ceiling material.
Cement A binding ingredient used for concrete, mortar, and grout. See Portland cement.
Checking Development of shallow cracks at regular intervals on the surface
of concrete, plaster, or paint.
Coarse aggregate Usually gravel from a river deposit or crushed stone.
Cold joint Joint or discontinuity in concrete resulting from delay in the
placement of successive lifts.
GLOSSARY
363
Collar joint A vertical joint between two wythes of masonry.

Collar tie Horizontal member that ties rafters together above the wall plate.
Collector(s) In a lateral-force-resisting system, collectors are elements used
to transmit forces between oor diaphragms and other members.
Column sections More suitable than I beams to be used as columns. The
radius of gyration of an I beam about an axis is comparatively small.
Common nails Nails with a smooth cylindrical shaft and a at head. Used
to join wood-framing members and in general carpentry work.
Compaction Process of compressing, vibrating, or tamping to eliminate
voids and reduce the volume of soil, subgrade material, or other porous
material such as freshly placed concrete.
Composite column A column that combines concrete and steel sections.
Generally speaking, a concrete column reinforced longitudinally with steel
shapes.
Composite special moment frame (C-SMF) A moment frame of composite or reinforced-concrete column and either structural steel or composite
beams.
Compressive stress Results from a force that tends to shorten the member.
Concrete masonry unit (CMU) Precast hollow or solid masonry unit
made of Portland cement and ne aggregate with or without admixtures
or pigments. Formed into modular or nonmodular dimensions to be laid
with other similar units.
Concrete slab on grade Concrete reinforced or unreinforced slab poured
against the ground surface.
Concrete stem wall In building construction, any wall made of reinforced
concrete such as a basement wall.
Connectors Fasteners.
Cooler nails Nails with special size and head conguration for use in gypsum board application.
Corbel Ledge formed when courses of masonry project out of the face of
a wall.
Crawl space Unnished accessible area below the rst oor of a structure.
Commonly used for components such as ductwork and piping.
Creep A plastic-type deformation that occurs with time in materials such
as concrete when subjected to continuous stress.
Cripple wall The wood-framed wall (usually between the footing and the
rst oor) not less than 14 in. and not more than 4 ft in height.
Curing The method of maintaining adequate moisture and temperature conditions to develop the required strength and reduce shrinkage of concrete
during its setting phase.
Curtain wall Exterior wall supported by the frame of the building as opposed to being self-supported or load-bearing wall.
364
GLOSSARY
Damping Loss of energy of a system when its vibratory motion dies out
due to internal strains.
Dead load A permanent load on a structure or member such as weight of
materials: columns, oors, framing, partitions, roofs, and walls.
Deection Deformation or deviation of a member as a result of its own
weight, an applied force, or other stress.
Design strength Nominal strength multiplied by a strength reduction factor.
See Strength, design.
Development length Per ACI code, length of embedded reinforcement required to develop the design strength of reinforcement at a critical section.
DF. See Douglas r.
Diaphragm A surface element such as oor slab, deck, or wall that resists
forces in its own plane or transmits forces to resisting systems.
Doubly reinforced beam When reinforcement is placed in the compression
zone of a beam in addition to tensile reinforcement.
Douglas r (DF) Curry-grained wood that resembles white pine used for
plywood or laminated sheets.
Drag struts Members used to transmit lateral loads from the diaphragms to
the shear walls at points of irregularity of the diaphragms.
Dry joint Joint or head without mortar.
Drywall Interior surfacing material applied to framing members using dry
construction. Fireproof gypsum core is encased with heavy paper on one
side and liner paper on the other side.
Ductility Capability of an element or structure to withstand a substantial
amount of distortion without a signicant loss of strength.
Dynamic forces Dynamic forces and loads in a structure are generated by
inertia forces in motion, as opposed to static forces, which are caused by
its stationary weight. They are variable in nature and depend mostly on
the individual dynamic characteristics of the structure in question. Dynamic
forces are of special signicance in relation to earthquake-generated motions.
Edge nailing 1. Nailing pattern along the perimeter of the diaphragm panels. 2. Hidden or toenailing of, for example, oor boards.
Embedment length Per ACI regulations, length of embedded reinforcement
provided beyond a critical section.
Expansion joint A break or space in construction to allow for thermal expansion and contraction of the materials used in the structure.
Factored load Load multiplied by appropriate load factors.
Fascia 1. Horizontal trim member at the lower end of roof rafters. 2. Complete assembly of exterior trim members at the lower end of an overhang.
Field nailing Nailing pattern inside the diaphragm panels.
GLOSSARY
365
Fine aggregate Sand without any substantial amount of silt, organic matter,
or other materials.
Finish grade Elevation of ground (walks, drives) and other improved surfaces after nal grading operations.
Flexure (or bending) When a structural member, say a beam in horizontal
position with ends supported on walls, is subjected to bending stresses
under a load placed at any point on the beam.
Fly ash aggregate Pulverized fuel ash (coal or coke) produced of lightweight aggregates by a specic process where pellets of the material are
sintered at 10001200C.
Footing Commonly, a portion of a shallow bearing-type foundation, usually
concrete poured directly into the excavation.
Furring Finishing of the face of a masonry wall to make room for insulation, prevent moisture propagation, or provide a further nish to the wall.
Gable end Three- or four-sided section of an end wall that extends from
the top wall plate to the ridge.
Girder Large horizontal structural member constructed of several steel,
reinforced-concrete, or timber members that support loads at isolated points
along its length.
GLB (glued-laminated beam) Assembly of laminated lumber; the grain of
all laminations is longitudinally parallel and bonded with adhesives.
Grout From Swedish groot (oatmeal). Slump mixture of cement, aggregates, and water of rather uid consistency poured into void spaces in
masonry construction.
Header 1. Horizontal structural member over the top of a wall opening that
distributes the load to either side of the opening. 2. Floor or ceiling joist
or roof rafter that is perpendicular to the common joists or rafters. Distributes loads to other joists or rafters around openings. 3. Masonry member
perpendicular to the face of the wall to tie the front and back portions of
the wall together.
HD (hold-down) See next.
Hold-downs (bolts) Anchor bolts used to connect frame to foundation.
HSS (hollow structural section) In steel design, the sections can be rectangular, square, or round.
I beam In steel construction, American standard I beam, produced by most
of the rolling mills.
Joist Horizontal support member to which nish oor and ceiling materials
are fastened. Common joist material includes wood, steel, and concrete.
Kern limit Limit set for the eccentricity of compressive force while preventing tensile stress.
King stud Vertical support installed along both sides of a framed opening
for a window or door. Extends from the top to bottom plate.
366
GLOSSARY
Lateral-force-resisting system The portion of the structural system designed to resist design seismic forces.
Let-in bracing In wood house framing, the diagonal braces notched into
studs.
Lightweight concrete Concrete made of aggregates that are the byproduct
of industrial processes.
Limit state A condition reached by a structure when it can no longer fulll
its intended function due to brittle fracture, excessive deformation, collapse, or other factors that make it unusable for the purpose intended.
Live loads Generally speaking, all loads that are not part of a dead load
and are therefore of temporary nature: people, vehicles, equipment, stored
material, movable partitions, or natural phenomena such as winds, snow,
and earthquakes.
Lumber grades Classication of lumber in regard to the strength of material.
Lumber species Classication of lumber in regard to the type of trees.
Masonry General term applied to brickwork, blockwork, and stonework.
Masonry cements Cements specically used in mortar. See Mortar.
Modulus of elasticity Elasticity is the property of a body to resist permanent deformation. The modulus of elasticity involves the concepts of stress
and strain and their relationship.
Modulus of rupture Upper bound of the measured tensile resistance of
concrete.
Moisture content 1. Amount of moisture in a given air space. Expressed
as grains of moisture per pound of dry air. 2. Amount of moisture in the
cellular structure of a material such as aggregate. Expressed as a percentage
of the dry weight of material.
Moment Tendency of a force to produce rotation about a certain given point
or axis.
Moment of inertia The resultant of the mass of a body and the square of
a length, named radius of gyration.
Monolithic A structural member built in one piece or assembly properly
engineered to act as one solid element.
Mortar A mixture of plastic consistency of cementitious materials, ne aggregates, and water. It could be fat when it tends to stick to the trowel,
harsh when difcult to spread for lack of sufcient plasticizer, or lean
when it lacks sufcient cementitious ingredients and is also difcult to
spread.
Mudsill Continuous timber placed on the ground that distributes a load and
provides a level surface for scaffolding and shoring.
Nominal strength Strength of a member calculated per provisions and assumptions of strength design methods.
Nonbearing wall A wall that merely separates space into rooms but does
not carry overhead partitions or oor joists except its own weight, as opposed to a load-bearing wall.
GLOSSARY
367
Open-web steel joists Lightweight steel trusses normally used to support

oor and roof panels between main supporting elements.
Ordinary moment-resisting frame (OMRF) A moment-resisting frame
not meeting special detailing requirements for ductile behavior.
OSB (oriented strand board) A panel of compressed wood particles set in
layers at right angles to one another, bonded with phenolic resin. Widely
used in wood construction.
Overturning moment An arithmetic sum resulting from the moments of
all forces above the base of a structure multiplied by the heights above
such a base.
Panel zone In a beam-to-column connection, the area that transmits moment
by means of a shear panel.
Parapet Part of a wall that projects or extends above roof level.
Particleboard Particles of wood or wood particles and bers bonded together with synthetic resins or other bonding agents to produce a manufactured panel.
P-delta effect A secondary effect (moment) caused by column axial loads
and lateral deections on a structural member.
Perimeter (edge) nailing Pattern of nailing of a shear (horizontal or vertical) diaphragm along its perimeter (edge). More loaded and more responsible connection than eld nailing.
Piers Vertical support that provides bearing in the ground; it functions similarly to a column. The bottom of this support may be widened or bellied
to enlarge the load-bearing area. Upper structural members are set on these
supports.
Pilaster A part of a wall that projects on one or both sides of the wall and
functions as a vertical beam, a column, or even an architectural element.
Plastic zone In general, the yielded zone of a member.
Plate Horizontal framing member at top or bottom of a wood-framed wall.
Studs bear on bottom plate. Joists and rafters rest on top plate.
Plate girder A built-up section to compensate for the case when a rolled
section does not meet the needed requirements. The plate or box girder is
made up of plates and angles welded together to form an I section.
Platform framing System using wood studs one story high nished with a
platform consisting of the underooring for the next story.
Poissons ratio Applies to an elastic body. Ratio of the transverse strain to
the longitudinal strain when body is subjected to a longitudinal stress T.
Pony wall See Cripple wall.
Portland cement A product obtained by thoroughly mixing calcareous, silica, alumina, and iron-oxide-bearing materials, burning them, and grinding
the resulting cinder. Depending on the ingredients and the method of producing it, cements can be high-alumina, granulated blast furnace slag,
pozzolanas, oil-well cements, magnesium oxychloride, and masonry ce-
368
GLOSSARY
ments. The latter are used specically for masonry construction and provide
a more plastic mortar than ordinary Portland cement. See Masonry cements
and Rapid-hardening Portland cement.
Posts Columns or pillars; vertical support.
Precast concrete As opposed to cast in place, precast concrete is cast at
the plant or a location away from the construction site.
Purlin A horizontal member resting usually on trusses and supporting the
roof rafters.
Rafter Sloped roof structural member that supports roof sheathing and roof
loads.
Raised foundation A foundation that raises the rst oor of the structure
above the grade, creating a crawl space. Usually consists of continuousperimeter stem walls/footings and individual piers/footings inside.
Rapid-hardening Portland cement Obtained by a development of manufacturing process, basically ner grinding and perfected method of mixing
of the raw materials, for instance, higher lime contents.
Reactions In general, upward forces at a beam support to keep it in balance
against downward forces (or loads).
Read-out Framing at the opening.
Rebar Steel reinforcement bars of different size and shape commonly used
to strengthen (reinforced) masonry.
Required strength Strength of a member or cross section required to resist
factored loads or related internal moments and forces.
Resistance factor (strength reduction factor) Relates to deviations of the
actual strength from the nominal strength and resulting possible failures.
Retaining wall A concrete or masonry wall designed and built to resist
lateral forces or pressure from or displacement of soil or other materials.
Ridge 1. Highest point of a sloping roof; roof peak. 2. Highest horizontal
member of a sloping roof to which rafters are fastened.
Seismic coefcient A function of soil type and seismic zone.
Service load Load specied by general building codes (without load factors). It is also considered nominal load, expected to be supported by the
structure under normal usage.
Shapes (or sections) In steel construction, the products of the rolling mills.
Shearing force An internal force that works tangential to the section of a
member on which it acts.
Sheathing A protective material that covers prestressing steel mainly to
prevent bonding with the surrounding concrete or protects reinforcing bars
against corrosion. Includes berboard, gypsum board, plywood, polystyrene, and lumber.
Slenderness ratio Related to the radius of gyration in all structural steel
column formulas: l/r, l being the effective length of the column and r the
minimum radius of gyration, both values in inches.
GLOSSARY
369
Soft Underside of beams, roof overhangs, lintels, or reveals.

Spalling Flaking off of the surface of concrete.
Spandrel Portion of a wall between the head of a window and the windowsill above.
Special moment-resisting frame (SMRF) Per UBC 1997, a momentresisting frame detailed to provide ductile behavior and comply with the
requirements given in Chapter 19 or 22.
Splice Between two structural elements, splice is the connection that joins
both members at their ends to produce a single, longer element.
Stirrups Vertical steel bars added to a concrete beam to increase shear
resistance.
Stone concrete Normal-weight concrete. See Lightweight concrete.
Story drift Lateral displacement of one oor with respect to the oor above
or below.
Straps Strip of metal or other material used to provide additional tensile
reinforcement to a joint.
Strength, design Per ACI code, nominal strength multiplied by strength
reduction factor .
Strength reduction factor See Resistance factor.
Stress Intensity of force measured per unit area.
Stucco Exterior nish material composed of Portland cement, lime, sand,
and water.
Studs 1. Wood or metal vertical framing member in a wall. 2. Threaded
fastener that is threaded on both ends and has no head. 3. Bolt anchored
to another member at one end.
Subgrade Compacted soil used to support a concrete slab or other structure.
Tees (structural tees) Steel sections made by splitting W, M, and S shapes
so they become WT, MT, and ST shapes.
Tensile stress Stress that results from a force that tends to lengthen the
member.
Treated lumber Lumber coated or saturated with a stain or chemical to
retard re, insect damage, or decay resulting from exposure to weather.
Trimmer A beam or joist into which a header is framed.
Truss Structural member constructed of components commonly placed in a
triangular arrangement.
T section A T beam that can be handled like rectangular cross sections
provided the depth of the rectangular stress block does not exceed the
thickness of the T ange.
Unbraced length Distance between the braced points of a structural member.
Vertical shear Symbol: V. Refers to the propensity of one part of an element
to move vertically with respect to an adjacent part.
370
GLOSSARY
Von Mises yield criterion Known also as maximum strain-energy-ofdistortion theory. Based on the assumption that inelastic action starts at
any point in a body under stresses when the strain energy of distortion,
per unit volume, equals the distortion absorbed in a simple tensile bar
stressed to its elastic limit under uniaxial stress.
Wall anchor A bearing plate type of anchor used in masonry construction
to support a beam on a masonry wall.
Wide-ange section As a rule, wide-ange steel sections have greater
ange widths than standard I beams.
Wire mesh Heavy-gauge wires joined in a grid to reinforce and increase
tensile strength of concrete.
Working stress design Method based on using actual or working loads.
Wythe In masonry construction, the continuous vertical section of a wall,
one masonry unit thick.
Youngs modulus In 1807, while studying the behavior of elastic bodies
subjected to external forces, Young discovered a constant. Assuming that
T is the stress in the cross section of a thin rod and e the extension or
strain associated with the stress, then T Ee, where E is Youngs modulus
in tension.
REFERENCES
1. Ambrose, J. 1991. Simplied Design of Masonry Structures. Wiley, New York.
2. Lea, F. M. 1971. The Chemistry of Cement and Concrete. Chemical Publishing,
New York.
3. Parker, H. 1967. Simplied Design of Structural Steel, 3rd ed. Wiley, New York.
4. IBC 2003, International Code Council, Country Club Hills, IL.
APPENDIX
COMPUTER ANALYSIS

371
372
A.
COMPUTER ANALYSIS
SMRF PROJECT PART I
A.
SMRF PROJECT PART I
373
374
A.
SMRF PROJECT PART I
375
376
COMPUTER ANALYSIS
*LRFD DESIGN,SEISMIC Z4,70MPH WIND,EXPS.C,

Processing Element Stiffness Matrix. 8:50:38
Processing Global Stiffness Matrix. 8:50:38
Processing Triangular Factorization. 8:50:38
Calculating Joint Displacements.
8:50:38
Calculating Member Forces.
8:50:38
73. PRINT MEMBER FORCES
A.
SMRF PROJECT PART I
377
378
COMPUTER ANALYSIS
A.
SMRF PROJECT PART I
379
380
COMPUTER ANALYSIS
A.
SMRF PROJECT PART I
381
382
COMPUTER ANALYSIS
A.
SMRF PROJECT PART I
383
384
COMPUTER ANALYSIS
A.
SMRF PROJECT PART I
385
386
COMPUTER ANALYSIS
387
388
B.
COMPUTER ANALYSIS
SMRF PROJECT PART II
B.
389
390
B.
391
392
COMPUTER ANALYSIS
B.
393
394
COMPUTER ANALYSIS
B.
395
396
COMPUTER ANALYSIS
B.
397
398
C.
C.
BRACED-FRAME PROJECT
399
400
COMPUTER ANALYSIS
C.
401
402
C.
403
404
COMPUTER ANALYSIS
C.
405
406
COMPUTER ANALYSIS
C.
407
408
COMPUTER ANALYSIS
C.
409
410
COMPUTER ANALYSIS
C.
411
412
COMPUTER ANALYSIS
C.
413
414
COMPUTER ANALYSIS
C.
415
416
COMPUTER ANALYSIS
C.
417
418
COMPUTER ANALYSIS
C.
419
420
COMPUTER ANALYSIS
C.
421
422
COMPUTER ANALYSIS
INDEX
A
A36 versus A992 steel, 254
Acceleration of gravity, 314
Acceleration vector, 344
Accelerogram readings, 337
ACI regulations, 43
Aggregates, 37
AISC Manual of Steel Construction,
86
AISC Seismic Provisions, 28
Allowable bending stress, 194, 242
Allowable story drift, 116
Amplication of dynamic lateral
displacements, 17
Astaneh, A., 183
Axial force, 38, 109, 110
Axial force component, 109, 113
Axial loads, 113, 136, 220
Axial stress in bar, 222
B
Bars, development, 38
Base plate, 217, 224
axially loaded, design, 175
maximum axial compression, 174
maximum uplift, 174
Base shear for earthquake, 75
BCSA / CONSTRADO, 348
Beam
exural buckling, 110
exural resistance, 110
plastic bending moment, 97
Beam allowable stress, 241
Beamcolumn joint failure, 17, 20
mechanism of, 20
Beam ange reactions, 346
Beam-to-column connections, 26, 88,
89
Beam-to-column joint, 92
Beam-to-column plate design, 242
Beam web, 17, 44
Bending stress, 194, 208, 242
Berkeley Earthquake Engineering
Research Center, 99, 128, 182
Bertero, V. V., 127, 182
Black, R. G., 182
Block shear design, 150
Block shear failure mechanism, 150
Bondad, D. M., 127, 358
Boundary conditions, 95
Brace capacity, loss, 170
Braced frame, eccentric (hybrid), 20
Braced-frame project, description,
129
Brace reactions, 148
Brace stiffness, 180, 181

423
424
INDEX
Brittle failure, 181

Brittle fracture failure, 173, 348
Bruneau, M., 182
Buckling, compressed member, 136
Building codes interaction, 27
C
Calibrated hydraulic piston dampers,
357
California Department of
Conservation, Division of Mines
and Geology, 344
California freeway bridges, 15
Carter, C. J., 358
Cedar Hills nursery, 24, 339
Cement, 37
Characteristic equation, 313, 321
CMU wall stresses, 220
Codes cross-referencing, 28
Coefcient matrix, 299
Cold-formed steel, 29, 277
structural members, 277
Column and row vectors, 293
Column(s)
deformations, 344
design of, 109
design for compression, 116
design for tension, 162
tensile resistance, 120
Combined bending and shearing
resistance, 40
Compact matrix form, 290
Component failure, 17
Concentrically braced frames, 33,
128, 156
Concentric braced frame alternative,
20
Concentric braced frames, 18
Concrete
as construction material, 36
compressive strength, 36
crack patterns, 43
design for bending, 39
design for exure, 40
diagonal cracks, 46
modulus of elasticity, 38
modulus of rupture, 38
rectangular compression block

method, 40
splitting, 46
tensile resistance, 38
tensile strength, 38
working-stress design, 39
Constant(s), 298, 303, 307, 309, 311,
314, 320
Constant of proportionality, 321
Construction defects versus
earthquake damage, 235
Corrosion, 51
Cover plate dimensions and welds,
95
Crawl spaces, 228
Cripple wall, 229
Crisscrossing joint, 136
Critical damping, 174
Critical stress concentrations, 346
Crosby, P., 182
Cyclic loading, 180
Cylindrical footings, 228
D
DAlembert principle of equilibrium,
314
Damping ratio, 322
Design lateral pressures, 196
Design panel shear, 109
Design strategies, 89
Detailed systems design requirements,
76, 83, 85, 88, 110, 122, 130,
135, 139, 166, 180
Development length, 45
Diagonal brace
bowing out, 137
slenderness, 137
system, 142
Differential equation of motion, 315,
317
Differential equations
general solution, 303
standard form, 308
Double curvature, 160
Drift evaluation, 83
Dry-jointed connections, 14
Ductile behavior, 344, 348
Ductile hinge, 348
INDEX
Ductility, 180
Dynamic equilibrium without
damping, 317
Dynamic forces, 14, 20, 138, 143,
346
Dynamic structural response, 344
E
Earthquake
magnitude, 7
physics of, 100
source, 2
Earthquake-damaged chimneys, 235
Earthquake-generated cyclic loading,
102
Effective time period of earthquake,
344
Eigenvectors, deected mode shapes,
332
Elastic limit, 111
Element stiffness, 136
Energy-dissipating external walls, 352
Energy dissipation, 95, 173, 351
Engelhardt, M. D., 127, 358
Engineered damping, 352
Engineered energy dissipation,
examples, 352
Engineered metal connectors, 229
Equation of free vibration, 326
Equation of motion, 320
Erdey, C. K., 126, 127, 182, 348
Eulers solution, 318, 319
Excessive sway, 346
Expansion joints, continuous
structures, 16
F
Factored toe pressure, 200
Faults, consideration to existing, 27
Fierro, E. A., 183
First and upper story walls not
aligned, 14
Flexibility coefcient matrix, 290
Flexural compressive stress, 197, 202
Footing design, 215, 225, 244, 251,
263, 276
Footing, external CMU wall, 225
Frame, lateral translation, 117
425
Free lateral contraction, 340

Free vibration, 314
Friction devices, 352
Fundamental period of structure, 25
G
Garages, seismic shortcomings, 234
Gaussian elimination method, 301
Glulam (GLB) support, 244, 262, 271
Goel, S. C., 182, 183
Gravity load, analysis and design,
271
Ground acceleration data, 344
Ground on heel, weight, 203
Ground velocities and accelerations,
27
g vertical acceleration, 100
H
Hangar design, 206
Hangar masonry walls, 209
Hangar, wind and seismic, 209
Hanson, R. D., 182, 183, 358
Hassan, O., 182
High-frequency response, 136
High-frequency speed straining, 351
High-frequency vibrations, 336
Horizontal and vertical ground
acceleration components, 24,
339
Horizontal reinforcement, 60, 195,
209
HSS steel columns, 28, 217, 224,
241, 242, 254
Husain, A. S., 127, 358
Hydraulic piston dampers, calibrated,
357
I
IBC 2000, moment-resisting frame
system category, 187
Imaginary number, 318, 322
Improved connection, 93
Inelastic response displacement, 83
Initial value problem, 303
Internal design forces, modication,
26
426
INDEX
Internal reaction of forces and

stresses, 341
International Conference of Building
Ofcials (ICBO), 192
Iwankiw, N. R., 358
J
Joint, brittle fracture, 95
Joint-penetration-groove weld, 95
Joint stresses, 350
Joist girder-to-column connection,
224
K
Kareem, A., 183
Kelly, J. M., 358
Khatib, I. F., 182
Krawinkler, H., 127
L
Laplace expansion, 297
Lateral analysis and design, 264
garage, 243
Lateral coefcient, 23
Lateral connement, 20, 176
Lateral eastwest ground
acceleration, 341
Lateral oor displacements, 10
Lateral force distribution, 78
Lateral oscillations, 10
Lateral and vertical earthquake
forces, 22
Le Chang, K., 358
Light-gauge steel
design example, 278
partition walls, 281
specications, 282
versus wood construction, 277
Lightweight concrete, 51
Limit-state design, 39
Limit-state pattern, 51
Linear equations, 290
Load cases, set of, 69
Load combinations, LRFD method,
82, 89
Load factor, lateral pressure, 197
Load sharing, 79, 80, 281
Loma Prieta earthquake, 173
Longitudinal component of the
quake, 10
Low-hazard structures, 30
Lumped-impulse method, 340
M
Mahin, S. A., 182
Major lateral force-resisting systems,
17
Manhole openings, 215
Masonry
horizontal reinforcement, 209
seismic collapses, 191
seismic overview, 191
and steel structure, 217
vertical reinforcement, 209
Material degradation, 351
Matrix
multiplication, 292
nonsingular, 302
singular 302
Maximum bending moment, 197
Maximum brace reactions, 148
Maximum inelastic response
displacements, 83
McCormac, J. C., 36, 127
Mechanical vibrations, 314
Mechanical vibrations without driving
function, 334
Mechanism of destruction of moment
frame / end shear wall
construction, 12
Member overstress, 69
Metallic yield devices, 352
Minimum llet weld size, 94
Modulus of elasticity, 366
Moment frame failure, 10
Moment frames as rigid frames, 21
Moment frameshear wall
combination, 10
Moment-resisting frame, reinforced
concrete, 20
nonductile performance, 20
Mozzafarian, H., 358
N
Naeim, F., 358
Natural circular frequency, 320
Natural frequency, 316
Necking, 348
New Madrid earthquake, 5
Noel, S., 358
INDEX
No necking, no ductility, 351

Northridge experience, 68
Northridge lesson, 228
O
Occupancy category, 30
Oscillation, 322
Out-of-plane bending, 13, 352
Overdamped system, 322
Overstressed joint, 348
Overstressed structure, 229
Overturning
factor of safety, 203
and hold-down bolts, 244
moment, 196
P
Pacic tectonic plate edge, 192
Pacoima dam readings, 22, 100
Pad footing, 226, 272, 276
Panel zone, 87, 88, 90, 347, 350
Panel zone shear strength, 101
Parapet, 219
Parent metal brittleness, 351
Parking structures, 49
Particular solution, 303
Paso Robles Clock Tower, 192
Permanent deformation, 348
Permanent structural damage, 344
Perry, C., 183
Pister, K. S., 182
Plastic deformation, 351
Plastic hinge, 344
Popov, E. P., 127, 182
Post and pier supports, 228
Postbuckling, 171
Postbuckling stage, 170
Potential energy absorption, 181
Precast concrete circular plate, 214
Q
Quasi-static tests, 349, 351
R
RC parking structure, 49
Redundant backup system, 189
Reinforcement
effective depth, 205
overstressed, 222
Reinforcing bars, 37
427
Reliability / redundancy factor , 86

braced frames, 141
Reserve shearing resistance, 98
Reserve strength, 21
Resonance factor, 26
Response spectrum analysis, 138
Restoring moment, 203
Retaining wall
10 ft, 196
13 ft, 199
15 ft high, 203
seismic zones 3 and 4, 193
Reversals of magnitude, 351
Reversible earthquake forces, 142
R factor, 34
Rigid joint, 348
Ring foundation, 216
S
Sabol, T. A., 127
SAC 95-01, 1995, 358
San Fernando earthquake, 13, 21, 22,
23
Santa Monica seismic motion, 338
Scalar number, 293
Section neutral axis, 198
Seismic design forces, zone 2B, 218
Seismic design philosophy, 68
Seismic isolation, primer on, ASCE,
SEI 2004, 353
Seismic isolation systems, 353
Seismic pressure on component, 219
Seismic, transverse direction, 249
Seismic not governing, 261
Seismic versus wind, 206
Seismograph readings, 51, 338, 345
Shear
and compression, 45
and exural resistance, 46
and moment combined, 46
reinforcement, 46
Shear tab, 17
design, 96
moment of resistance, 17
Shear tabs cracked and split, 105
Shear wall pier, 244
Shearing resistance, see Combined
bending and shearing resistance
Shift of force in tensile
reinforcement, 43
428
INDEX
Shrinkage, 51
Signicant U.S. earthquakes, 8
Single-degree system, 314
Single-direction oriented lateral
forces, 143
Single springmass differential
equation, 318
Slenderness ratio, 138
Speed straining, 350
Spring coefcient, 316
Spring constant, 314
Springmassdashpot, 327
Square matrix, 295
Static force method, 138
Steel, modulus of elasticity, 85
Steel portal frame, 234
Steel-reinforced
duplex, 252
wood-framed building, 237
Steel reinforcement, 36
Stephen, R. M., 127
Stirrups in resisting moment, 46
Stirrup sizes, 45
Stirrup spacing, 45
Story-drift control, 83
Strain hardening, 350
Strength design, 45
Strength-level bearing pressures, 199
Strength-level factored loads, 83
Stress reversals, 135, 138, 179, 350,
351
Stress values, masonry project, 220
Strong columnweak beam, 113
Structural details, 223
Structural displacement, increase, 344
Structural layout and member sizes,
70
Structural vibrations, 314
Stucco and wood frame, 229
Sunset Crater volcano, 5
Sway components due to rocking
motion, 343
T
Tang, X., 182
T-assembly static moment, 242
Tectonic plate edge, 192
Tensile reinforcement, shift of force,
43
Tensile strength by yielding, 94
Tensile stress, 195

Thornton, W. A., 183
Tilt-up walls, 49
Toe nailing, 233
Toe of footing design, 198
Tognarelli, M., 183
Transfer of overturning moment, 14
Triangular distribution, 204
Tsai, K. C., 127
U
Uang, C. M., 127, 182, 358
Ultimate strength design, 41
Unique continuous solution, 305
University of Michigan, 128, 181
V
Vaulted ceilings, 234
Vector matrix, 290
Vertical reinforcement, 13, 194, 196,
197, 201, 209
Viscoelastic devices, 352, 353
Viscous damping force, 321
Viscous devices, 352
Vulcraft joists, 217, 223
W
Watercement ratio, 37
Web joint, welding, 98
Wegener, A., 3
Wenger, W. A., 182
Whittaker, A. S., 182
Whittier Narrows earthquake, 1987,
20, 21
Width-to-wall thickness ratio, 138
Wind
and earthquake loads, 135
normal force method, 72
projected-area method, 72
on three-story steel frame, 238
Wood frame / masonry chimney
incompatibility, 235
Wood-framed seismic performance,
227
Wood-framed structure failures, 228
Wronski, 334
Z
Zekioglu, A., 358
Z zone factor, 25

Earthquake Engineering Application To Design PDF

Uploaded by

Document Information

Original Title

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

Earthquake Engineering Application To Design PDF

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

EARTHQUAKE ENGINEERING

Earthquake Engineering: Application to Design. Charles K. Erdey

JOHN WILEY & SONS, INC.

This book is printed on acid-free paper.

SEISMIC DESIGN REGULATIONS

SEISMIC STEEL DESIGN: SMRF

Design of SMRF Structure: LRFD Method / 68

Column Final Design Data / 115

SEISMIC STEEL DESIGN: BRACED FRAMES

5.25 SEAOC Blue Book and the Code / 180

IBC SEISMIC DESIGN OF SMRF STRUCTURES

IBC Setup of Seismic Design Forces / 184

Use of Matrices in Engineering / 290

Basic Concepts / 303

NUMERICAL METHODS AND ENGINEERING APPLICATIONS 314

Determinant of a Matrix / 296

Introduction to Dynamic Analysis / 314

METHODS AND TOOLS TO UNRAVEL SECRETS OF

RECENT AND FUTURE DEVELOPMENTS IN SEISMIC

A. SMRF Project Part I / 372

The author gratefully acknowledges the comments and suggestions of Tom

cross-sectional area (in.2)

panel zone thickness including doubler plates (in.)

As usual in our vibrant, free society, it is up to us to decide whether to face the

During an earthquake an individual could be thrown out of bed at night, be

performed well in seismic events and coming up with improved versions

CONCEPTS, TERMINOLOGY, AND SOURCE OF EARTHQUAKES

CONCEPTS, TERMINOLOGY, AND SOURCE OF EARTHQUAKES

Orogenic Movements and Crust Convection (Conveyor Belt)

intensive heat under the continent and produces geothermal irregularities

Figure 1.4 Discontinuity of seismic waves, named the Mohorovicic discontinuity.

WAVE PROPAGATION AND VELOCITIES

Figure 1.5 Subduction process.

WAVE PROPAGATION AND VELOCITIES

where the distance s (1/ vs 1/ vp)1 T from simple arithmetic. We need

where E Youngs modulus

Figure 1.6 Seismograph reading of ground vibration caused by an earthquake.

Velocities vs of typical transverse waves to propagate through the ground for

To compare earthquakes, we need some yardstick or scale such as the one

1.73 log10 100

where M is the magnitude at a distance calculated from the basic Richter

As a measure of the magnitude of destruction caused by the 1994 Northridge

TABLE 1.1 Signicant U.S. Earthquakes

Cascadia Subduction Zone

TABLE 1.1 (Continued )

Failures by Building Class

STRUCTURAL FAILURES: OVERALL FAILURE

STRUCTURAL FAILURES: OVERALL FAILURE

STRUCTURAL FAILURES: OVERALL FAILURE

Figure 1.11 Cross section of building with discontinuous shear walls.

STRUCTURAL FAILURES: OVERALL FAILURE

During an earthquake of relatively large magnitude, such as the 1994

COMPONENT OR JOINT FAILURE

COMPONENT OR JOINT FAILURE

Component failure refers to failure of one or more structural elements, mostly

COMPONENT OR JOINT FAILURE

Of all structures, perhaps the reinforced-concrete moment-resisting frame is

CODE DESIGN FORCES: RESERVE STRENGTH TO COUNTER EXTREME FORCES

CODE DESIGN FORCES: RESERVE STRENGTH TO COUNTER EXTREME FORCES

SEISMIC DESIGN REGULATIONS

for base shear

expression for the base shear.

SEISMIC DESIGN REGULATIONS